diff options
| author | Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> | 2019-07-16 12:21:41 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> | 2019-07-16 12:21:41 -0700 |
| commit | c309b6f24222246c18a8b65d3950e6e755440865 (patch) | |
| tree | 11893170f5c246bb0dee8066e85878af04162ab0 /Documentation/driver-api | |
| parent | 3e859477a1db52a0435d06a55fdb54f62d69c292 (diff) | |
| parent | 168869492e7009b6861b615f1d030c99bc805e83 (diff) | |
| download | linux-stable-c309b6f24222246c18a8b65d3950e6e755440865.tar.gz linux-stable-c309b6f24222246c18a8b65d3950e6e755440865.tar.bz2 linux-stable-c309b6f24222246c18a8b65d3950e6e755440865.zip | |
Merge tag 'docs/v5.3-1' of git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/mchehab/linux-media
Pull rst conversion of docs from Mauro Carvalho Chehab:
"As agreed with Jon, I'm sending this big series directly to you, c/c
him, as this series required a special care, in order to avoid
conflicts with other trees"
* tag 'docs/v5.3-1' of git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/mchehab/linux-media: (77 commits)
docs: kbuild: fix build with pdf and fix some minor issues
docs: block: fix pdf output
docs: arm: fix a breakage with pdf output
docs: don't use nested tables
docs: gpio: add sysfs interface to the admin-guide
docs: locking: add it to the main index
docs: add some directories to the main documentation index
docs: add SPDX tags to new index files
docs: add a memory-devices subdir to driver-api
docs: phy: place documentation under driver-api
docs: serial: move it to the driver-api
docs: driver-api: add remaining converted dirs to it
docs: driver-api: add xilinx driver API documentation
docs: driver-api: add a series of orphaned documents
docs: admin-guide: add a series of orphaned documents
docs: cgroup-v1: add it to the admin-guide book
docs: aoe: add it to the driver-api book
docs: add some documentation dirs to the driver-api book
docs: driver-model: move it to the driver-api book
docs: lp855x-driver.rst: add it to the driver-api book
...
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation/driver-api')
90 files changed, 15175 insertions, 111 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/backlight/lp855x-driver.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/backlight/lp855x-driver.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1e0b224fc397 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/backlight/lp855x-driver.rst @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +==================== +Kernel driver lp855x +==================== + +Backlight driver for LP855x ICs + +Supported chips: + + Texas Instruments LP8550, LP8551, LP8552, LP8553, LP8555, LP8556 and + LP8557 + +Author: Milo(Woogyom) Kim <milo.kim@ti.com> + +Description +----------- + +* Brightness control + + Brightness can be controlled by the pwm input or the i2c command. + The lp855x driver supports both cases. + +* Device attributes + + 1) bl_ctl_mode + + Backlight control mode. + + Value: pwm based or register based + + 2) chip_id + + The lp855x chip id. + + Value: lp8550/lp8551/lp8552/lp8553/lp8555/lp8556/lp8557 + +Platform data for lp855x +------------------------ + +For supporting platform specific data, the lp855x platform data can be used. + +* name: + Backlight driver name. If it is not defined, default name is set. +* device_control: + Value of DEVICE CONTROL register. +* initial_brightness: + Initial value of backlight brightness. +* period_ns: + Platform specific PWM period value. unit is nano. + Only valid when brightness is pwm input mode. +* size_program: + Total size of lp855x_rom_data. +* rom_data: + List of new eeprom/eprom registers. + +Examples +======== + +1) lp8552 platform data: i2c register mode with new eeprom data:: + + #define EEPROM_A5_ADDR 0xA5 + #define EEPROM_A5_VAL 0x4f /* EN_VSYNC=0 */ + + static struct lp855x_rom_data lp8552_eeprom_arr[] = { + {EEPROM_A5_ADDR, EEPROM_A5_VAL}, + }; + + static struct lp855x_platform_data lp8552_pdata = { + .name = "lcd-bl", + .device_control = I2C_CONFIG(LP8552), + .initial_brightness = INITIAL_BRT, + .size_program = ARRAY_SIZE(lp8552_eeprom_arr), + .rom_data = lp8552_eeprom_arr, + }; + +2) lp8556 platform data: pwm input mode with default rom data:: + + static struct lp855x_platform_data lp8556_pdata = { + .device_control = PWM_CONFIG(LP8556), + .initial_brightness = INITIAL_BRT, + .period_ns = 1000000, + }; diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/bt8xxgpio.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/bt8xxgpio.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a845feb074de --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/bt8xxgpio.rst @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +=================================================================== +A driver for a selfmade cheap BT8xx based PCI GPIO-card (bt8xxgpio) +=================================================================== + +For advanced documentation, see http://www.bu3sch.de/btgpio.php + +A generic digital 24-port PCI GPIO card can be built out of an ordinary +Brooktree bt848, bt849, bt878 or bt879 based analog TV tuner card. The +Brooktree chip is used in old analog Hauppauge WinTV PCI cards. You can easily +find them used for low prices on the net. + +The bt8xx chip does have 24 digital GPIO ports. +These ports are accessible via 24 pins on the SMD chip package. + + +How to physically access the GPIO pins +====================================== + +The are several ways to access these pins. One might unsolder the whole chip +and put it on a custom PCI board, or one might only unsolder each individual +GPIO pin and solder that to some tiny wire. As the chip package really is tiny +there are some advanced soldering skills needed in any case. + +The physical pinouts are drawn in the following ASCII art. +The GPIO pins are marked with G00-G23:: + + G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 + 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 + | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | + --------------------------------------------------------------------------- + --| ^ ^ |-- + --| pin 86 pin 67 |-- + --| |-- + --| pin 61 > |-- G18 + --| |-- G19 + --| |-- G20 + --| |-- G21 + --| |-- G22 + --| pin 56 > |-- G23 + --| |-- + --| Brooktree 878/879 |-- + --| |-- + --| |-- + --| |-- + --| |-- + --| |-- + --| |-- + --| |-- + --| |-- + --| |-- + --| |-- + --| |-- + --| |-- + --| |-- + --| O |-- + --| |-- + --------------------------------------------------------------------------- + | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | + ^ + This is pin 1 + diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/connector.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/connector.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c100c7482289 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/connector.rst @@ -0,0 +1,156 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +================ +Kernel Connector +================ + +Kernel connector - new netlink based userspace <-> kernel space easy +to use communication module. + +The Connector driver makes it easy to connect various agents using a +netlink based network. One must register a callback and an identifier. +When the driver receives a special netlink message with the appropriate +identifier, the appropriate callback will be called. + +From the userspace point of view it's quite straightforward: + + - socket(); + - bind(); + - send(); + - recv(); + +But if kernelspace wants to use the full power of such connections, the +driver writer must create special sockets, must know about struct sk_buff +handling, etc... The Connector driver allows any kernelspace agents to use +netlink based networking for inter-process communication in a significantly +easier way:: + + int cn_add_callback(struct cb_id *id, char *name, void (*callback) (struct cn_msg *, struct netlink_skb_parms *)); + void cn_netlink_send_multi(struct cn_msg *msg, u16 len, u32 portid, u32 __group, int gfp_mask); + void cn_netlink_send(struct cn_msg *msg, u32 portid, u32 __group, int gfp_mask); + + struct cb_id + { + __u32 idx; + __u32 val; + }; + +idx and val are unique identifiers which must be registered in the +connector.h header for in-kernel usage. `void (*callback) (void *)` is a +callback function which will be called when a message with above idx.val +is received by the connector core. The argument for that function must +be dereferenced to `struct cn_msg *`:: + + struct cn_msg + { + struct cb_id id; + + __u32 seq; + __u32 ack; + + __u32 len; /* Length of the following data */ + __u8 data[0]; + }; + +Connector interfaces +==================== + + .. kernel-doc:: include/linux/connector.h + + Note: + When registering new callback user, connector core assigns + netlink group to the user which is equal to its id.idx. + +Protocol description +==================== + +The current framework offers a transport layer with fixed headers. The +recommended protocol which uses such a header is as following: + +msg->seq and msg->ack are used to determine message genealogy. When +someone sends a message, they use a locally unique sequence and random +acknowledge number. The sequence number may be copied into +nlmsghdr->nlmsg_seq too. + +The sequence number is incremented with each message sent. + +If you expect a reply to the message, then the sequence number in the +received message MUST be the same as in the original message, and the +acknowledge number MUST be the same + 1. + +If we receive a message and its sequence number is not equal to one we +are expecting, then it is a new message. If we receive a message and +its sequence number is the same as one we are expecting, but its +acknowledge is not equal to the sequence number in the original +message + 1, then it is a new message. + +Obviously, the protocol header contains the above id. + +The connector allows event notification in the following form: kernel +driver or userspace process can ask connector to notify it when +selected ids will be turned on or off (registered or unregistered its +callback). It is done by sending a special command to the connector +driver (it also registers itself with id={-1, -1}). + +As example of this usage can be found in the cn_test.c module which +uses the connector to request notification and to send messages. + +Reliability +=========== + +Netlink itself is not a reliable protocol. That means that messages can +be lost due to memory pressure or process' receiving queue overflowed, +so caller is warned that it must be prepared. That is why the struct +cn_msg [main connector's message header] contains u32 seq and u32 ack +fields. + +Userspace usage +=============== + +2.6.14 has a new netlink socket implementation, which by default does not +allow people to send data to netlink groups other than 1. +So, if you wish to use a netlink socket (for example using connector) +with a different group number, the userspace application must subscribe to +that group first. It can be achieved by the following pseudocode:: + + s = socket(PF_NETLINK, SOCK_DGRAM, NETLINK_CONNECTOR); + + l_local.nl_family = AF_NETLINK; + l_local.nl_groups = 12345; + l_local.nl_pid = 0; + + if (bind(s, (struct sockaddr *)&l_local, sizeof(struct sockaddr_nl)) == -1) { + perror("bind"); + close(s); + return -1; + } + + { + int on = l_local.nl_groups; + setsockopt(s, 270, 1, &on, sizeof(on)); + } + +Where 270 above is SOL_NETLINK, and 1 is a NETLINK_ADD_MEMBERSHIP socket +option. To drop a multicast subscription, one should call the above socket +option with the NETLINK_DROP_MEMBERSHIP parameter which is defined as 0. + +2.6.14 netlink code only allows to select a group which is less or equal to +the maximum group number, which is used at netlink_kernel_create() time. +In case of connector it is CN_NETLINK_USERS + 0xf, so if you want to use +group number 12345, you must increment CN_NETLINK_USERS to that number. +Additional 0xf numbers are allocated to be used by non-in-kernel users. + +Due to this limitation, group 0xffffffff does not work now, so one can +not use add/remove connector's group notifications, but as far as I know, +only cn_test.c test module used it. + +Some work in netlink area is still being done, so things can be changed in +2.6.15 timeframe, if it will happen, documentation will be updated for that +kernel. + +Code samples +============ + +Sample code for a connector test module and user space can be found +in samples/connector/. To build this code, enable CONFIG_CONNECTOR +and CONFIG_SAMPLES. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/console.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/console.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8394ad7747ac --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/console.rst @@ -0,0 +1,152 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +=============== +Console Drivers +=============== + +The Linux kernel has 2 general types of console drivers. The first type is +assigned by the kernel to all the virtual consoles during the boot process. +This type will be called 'system driver', and only one system driver is allowed +to exist. The system driver is persistent and it can never be unloaded, though +it may become inactive. + +The second type has to be explicitly loaded and unloaded. This will be called +'modular driver' by this document. Multiple modular drivers can coexist at +any time with each driver sharing the console with other drivers including +the system driver. However, modular drivers cannot take over the console +that is currently occupied by another modular driver. (Exception: Drivers that +call do_take_over_console() will succeed in the takeover regardless of the type +of driver occupying the consoles.) They can only take over the console that is +occupied by the system driver. In the same token, if the modular driver is +released by the console, the system driver will take over. + +Modular drivers, from the programmer's point of view, have to call:: + + do_take_over_console() - load and bind driver to console layer + give_up_console() - unload driver; it will only work if driver + is fully unbound + +In newer kernels, the following are also available:: + + do_register_con_driver() + do_unregister_con_driver() + +If sysfs is enabled, the contents of /sys/class/vtconsole can be +examined. This shows the console backends currently registered by the +system which are named vtcon<n> where <n> is an integer from 0 to 15. +Thus:: + + ls /sys/class/vtconsole + . .. vtcon0 vtcon1 + +Each directory in /sys/class/vtconsole has 3 files:: + + ls /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon0 + . .. bind name uevent + +What do these files signify? + + 1. bind - this is a read/write file. It shows the status of the driver if + read, or acts to bind or unbind the driver to the virtual consoles + when written to. The possible values are: + + 0 + - means the driver is not bound and if echo'ed, commands the driver + to unbind + + 1 + - means the driver is bound and if echo'ed, commands the driver to + bind + + 2. name - read-only file. Shows the name of the driver in this format:: + + cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon0/name + (S) VGA+ + + '(S)' stands for a (S)ystem driver, i.e., it cannot be directly + commanded to bind or unbind + + 'VGA+' is the name of the driver + + cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/name + (M) frame buffer device + + In this case, '(M)' stands for a (M)odular driver, one that can be + directly commanded to bind or unbind. + + 3. uevent - ignore this file + +When unbinding, the modular driver is detached first, and then the system +driver takes over the consoles vacated by the driver. Binding, on the other +hand, will bind the driver to the consoles that are currently occupied by a +system driver. + +NOTE1: + Binding and unbinding must be selected in Kconfig. It's under:: + + Device Drivers -> + Character devices -> + Support for binding and unbinding console drivers + +NOTE2: + If any of the virtual consoles are in KD_GRAPHICS mode, then binding or + unbinding will not succeed. An example of an application that sets the + console to KD_GRAPHICS is X. + +How useful is this feature? This is very useful for console driver +developers. By unbinding the driver from the console layer, one can unload the +driver, make changes, recompile, reload and rebind the driver without any need +for rebooting the kernel. For regular users who may want to switch from +framebuffer console to VGA console and vice versa, this feature also makes +this possible. (NOTE NOTE NOTE: Please read fbcon.txt under Documentation/fb +for more details.) + +Notes for developers +==================== + +do_take_over_console() is now broken up into:: + + do_register_con_driver() + do_bind_con_driver() - private function + +give_up_console() is a wrapper to do_unregister_con_driver(), and a driver must +be fully unbound for this call to succeed. con_is_bound() will check if the +driver is bound or not. + +Guidelines for console driver writers +===================================== + +In order for binding to and unbinding from the console to properly work, +console drivers must follow these guidelines: + +1. All drivers, except system drivers, must call either do_register_con_driver() + or do_take_over_console(). do_register_con_driver() will just add the driver + to the console's internal list. It won't take over the + console. do_take_over_console(), as it name implies, will also take over (or + bind to) the console. + +2. All resources allocated during con->con_init() must be released in + con->con_deinit(). + +3. All resources allocated in con->con_startup() must be released when the + driver, which was previously bound, becomes unbound. The console layer + does not have a complementary call to con->con_startup() so it's up to the + driver to check when it's legal to release these resources. Calling + con_is_bound() in con->con_deinit() will help. If the call returned + false(), then it's safe to release the resources. This balance has to be + ensured because con->con_startup() can be called again when a request to + rebind the driver to the console arrives. + +4. Upon exit of the driver, ensure that the driver is totally unbound. If the + condition is satisfied, then the driver must call do_unregister_con_driver() + or give_up_console(). + +5. do_unregister_con_driver() can also be called on conditions which make it + impossible for the driver to service console requests. This can happen + with the framebuffer console that suddenly lost all of its drivers. + +The current crop of console drivers should still work correctly, but binding +and unbinding them may cause problems. With minimal fixes, these drivers can +be made to work correctly. + +Antonino Daplas <adaplas@pol.net> diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/dcdbas.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/dcdbas.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..309cc57a7c1c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/dcdbas.rst @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +=================================== +Dell Systems Management Base Driver +=================================== + +Overview +======== + +The Dell Systems Management Base Driver provides a sysfs interface for +systems management software such as Dell OpenManage to perform system +management interrupts and host control actions (system power cycle or +power off after OS shutdown) on certain Dell systems. + +Dell OpenManage requires this driver on the following Dell PowerEdge systems: +300, 1300, 1400, 400SC, 500SC, 1500SC, 1550, 600SC, 1600SC, 650, 1655MC, +700, and 750. Other Dell software such as the open source libsmbios project +is expected to make use of this driver, and it may include the use of this +driver on other Dell systems. + +The Dell libsmbios project aims towards providing access to as much BIOS +information as possible. See http://linux.dell.com/libsmbios/main/ for +more information about the libsmbios project. + + +System Management Interrupt +=========================== + +On some Dell systems, systems management software must access certain +management information via a system management interrupt (SMI). The SMI data +buffer must reside in 32-bit address space, and the physical address of the +buffer is required for the SMI. The driver maintains the memory required for +the SMI and provides a way for the application to generate the SMI. +The driver creates the following sysfs entries for systems management +software to perform these system management interrupts:: + + /sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/smi_data + /sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/smi_data_buf_phys_addr + /sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/smi_data_buf_size + /sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/smi_request + +Systems management software must perform the following steps to execute +a SMI using this driver: + +1) Lock smi_data. +2) Write system management command to smi_data. +3) Write "1" to smi_request to generate a calling interface SMI or + "2" to generate a raw SMI. +4) Read system management command response from smi_data. +5) Unlock smi_data. + + +Host Control Action +=================== + +Dell OpenManage supports a host control feature that allows the administrator +to perform a power cycle or power off of the system after the OS has finished +shutting down. On some Dell systems, this host control feature requires that +a driver perform a SMI after the OS has finished shutting down. + +The driver creates the following sysfs entries for systems management software +to schedule the driver to perform a power cycle or power off host control +action after the system has finished shutting down: + +/sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/host_control_action +/sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/host_control_smi_type +/sys/devices/platform/dcdbas/host_control_on_shutdown + +Dell OpenManage performs the following steps to execute a power cycle or +power off host control action using this driver: + +1) Write host control action to be performed to host_control_action. +2) Write type of SMI that driver needs to perform to host_control_smi_type. +3) Write "1" to host_control_on_shutdown to enable host control action. +4) Initiate OS shutdown. + (Driver will perform host control SMI when it is notified that the OS + has finished shutting down.) + + +Host Control SMI Type +===================== + +The following table shows the value to write to host_control_smi_type to +perform a power cycle or power off host control action: + +=================== ===================== +PowerEdge System Host Control SMI Type +=================== ===================== + 300 HC_SMITYPE_TYPE1 + 1300 HC_SMITYPE_TYPE1 + 1400 HC_SMITYPE_TYPE2 + 500SC HC_SMITYPE_TYPE2 + 1500SC HC_SMITYPE_TYPE2 + 1550 HC_SMITYPE_TYPE2 + 600SC HC_SMITYPE_TYPE2 + 1600SC HC_SMITYPE_TYPE2 + 650 HC_SMITYPE_TYPE2 + 1655MC HC_SMITYPE_TYPE2 + 700 HC_SMITYPE_TYPE3 + 750 HC_SMITYPE_TYPE3 +=================== ===================== diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/dell_rbu.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/dell_rbu.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5d1ce7bcd04d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/dell_rbu.rst @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ +============================================================= +Usage of the new open sourced rbu (Remote BIOS Update) driver +============================================================= + +Purpose +======= + +Document demonstrating the use of the Dell Remote BIOS Update driver. +for updating BIOS images on Dell servers and desktops. + +Scope +===== + +This document discusses the functionality of the rbu driver only. +It does not cover the support needed from applications to enable the BIOS to +update itself with the image downloaded in to the memory. + +Overview +======== + +This driver works with Dell OpenManage or Dell Update Packages for updating +the BIOS on Dell servers (starting from servers sold since 1999), desktops +and notebooks (starting from those sold in 2005). + +Please go to http://support.dell.com register and you can find info on +OpenManage and Dell Update packages (DUP). + +Libsmbios can also be used to update BIOS on Dell systems go to +http://linux.dell.com/libsmbios/ for details. + +Dell_RBU driver supports BIOS update using the monolithic image and packetized +image methods. In case of monolithic the driver allocates a contiguous chunk +of physical pages having the BIOS image. In case of packetized the app +using the driver breaks the image in to packets of fixed sizes and the driver +would place each packet in contiguous physical memory. The driver also +maintains a link list of packets for reading them back. + +If the dell_rbu driver is unloaded all the allocated memory is freed. + +The rbu driver needs to have an application (as mentioned above)which will +inform the BIOS to enable the update in the next system reboot. + +The user should not unload the rbu driver after downloading the BIOS image +or updating. + +The driver load creates the following directories under the /sys file system:: + + /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/loading + /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/data + /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/image_type + /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/data + /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/packet_size + +The driver supports two types of update mechanism; monolithic and packetized. +These update mechanism depends upon the BIOS currently running on the system. +Most of the Dell systems support a monolithic update where the BIOS image is +copied to a single contiguous block of physical memory. + +In case of packet mechanism the single memory can be broken in smaller chunks +of contiguous memory and the BIOS image is scattered in these packets. + +By default the driver uses monolithic memory for the update type. This can be +changed to packets during the driver load time by specifying the load +parameter image_type=packet. This can also be changed later as below:: + + echo packet > /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/image_type + +In packet update mode the packet size has to be given before any packets can +be downloaded. It is done as below:: + + echo XXXX > /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/packet_size + +In the packet update mechanism, the user needs to create a new file having +packets of data arranged back to back. It can be done as follows +The user creates packets header, gets the chunk of the BIOS image and +places it next to the packetheader; now, the packetheader + BIOS image chunk +added together should match the specified packet_size. This makes one +packet, the user needs to create more such packets out of the entire BIOS +image file and then arrange all these packets back to back in to one single +file. + +This file is then copied to /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/data. +Once this file gets to the driver, the driver extracts packet_size data from +the file and spreads it across the physical memory in contiguous packet_sized +space. + +This method makes sure that all the packets get to the driver in a single operation. + +In monolithic update the user simply get the BIOS image (.hdr file) and copies +to the data file as is without any change to the BIOS image itself. + +Do the steps below to download the BIOS image. + +1) echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/loading +2) cp bios_image.hdr /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/data +3) echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/loading + +The /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/ entries will remain till the following is +done. + +:: + + echo -1 > /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/loading + +Until this step is completed the driver cannot be unloaded. + +Also echoing either mono, packet or init in to image_type will free up the +memory allocated by the driver. + +If a user by accident executes steps 1 and 3 above without executing step 2; +it will make the /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/ entries disappear. + +The entries can be recreated by doing the following:: + + echo init > /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/image_type + +.. note:: echoing init in image_type does not change it original value. + +Also the driver provides /sys/devices/platform/dell_rbu/data readonly file to +read back the image downloaded. + +.. note:: + + After updating the BIOS image a user mode application needs to execute + code which sends the BIOS update request to the BIOS. So on the next reboot + the BIOS knows about the new image downloaded and it updates itself. + Also don't unload the rbu driver if the image has to be updated. + diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/binding.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/binding.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7ea1d7a41e1d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/binding.rst @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +============== +Driver Binding +============== + +Driver binding is the process of associating a device with a device +driver that can control it. Bus drivers have typically handled this +because there have been bus-specific structures to represent the +devices and the drivers. With generic device and device driver +structures, most of the binding can take place using common code. + + +Bus +~~~ + +The bus type structure contains a list of all devices that are on that bus +type in the system. When device_register is called for a device, it is +inserted into the end of this list. The bus object also contains a +list of all drivers of that bus type. When driver_register is called +for a driver, it is inserted at the end of this list. These are the +two events which trigger driver binding. + + +device_register +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +When a new device is added, the bus's list of drivers is iterated over +to find one that supports it. In order to determine that, the device +ID of the device must match one of the device IDs that the driver +supports. The format and semantics for comparing IDs is bus-specific. +Instead of trying to derive a complex state machine and matching +algorithm, it is up to the bus driver to provide a callback to compare +a device against the IDs of a driver. The bus returns 1 if a match was +found; 0 otherwise. + +int match(struct device * dev, struct device_driver * drv); + +If a match is found, the device's driver field is set to the driver +and the driver's probe callback is called. This gives the driver a +chance to verify that it really does support the hardware, and that +it's in a working state. + +Device Class +~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Upon the successful completion of probe, the device is registered with +the class to which it belongs. Device drivers belong to one and only one +class, and that is set in the driver's devclass field. +devclass_add_device is called to enumerate the device within the class +and actually register it with the class, which happens with the +class's register_dev callback. + + +Driver +~~~~~~ + +When a driver is attached to a device, the device is inserted into the +driver's list of devices. + + +sysfs +~~~~~ + +A symlink is created in the bus's 'devices' directory that points to +the device's directory in the physical hierarchy. + +A symlink is created in the driver's 'devices' directory that points +to the device's directory in the physical hierarchy. + +A directory for the device is created in the class's directory. A +symlink is created in that directory that points to the device's +physical location in the sysfs tree. + +A symlink can be created (though this isn't done yet) in the device's +physical directory to either its class directory, or the class's +top-level directory. One can also be created to point to its driver's +directory also. + + +driver_register +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The process is almost identical for when a new driver is added. +The bus's list of devices is iterated over to find a match. Devices +that already have a driver are skipped. All the devices are iterated +over, to bind as many devices as possible to the driver. + + +Removal +~~~~~~~ + +When a device is removed, the reference count for it will eventually +go to 0. When it does, the remove callback of the driver is called. It +is removed from the driver's list of devices and the reference count +of the driver is decremented. All symlinks between the two are removed. + +When a driver is removed, the list of devices that it supports is +iterated over, and the driver's remove callback is called for each +one. The device is removed from that list and the symlinks removed. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/bus.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/bus.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..016b15a6e8ea --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/bus.rst @@ -0,0 +1,146 @@ +========= +Bus Types +========= + +Definition +~~~~~~~~~~ +See the kerneldoc for the struct bus_type. + +int bus_register(struct bus_type * bus); + + +Declaration +~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Each bus type in the kernel (PCI, USB, etc) should declare one static +object of this type. They must initialize the name field, and may +optionally initialize the match callback:: + + struct bus_type pci_bus_type = { + .name = "pci", + .match = pci_bus_match, + }; + +The structure should be exported to drivers in a header file: + +extern struct bus_type pci_bus_type; + + +Registration +~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +When a bus driver is initialized, it calls bus_register. This +initializes the rest of the fields in the bus object and inserts it +into a global list of bus types. Once the bus object is registered, +the fields in it are usable by the bus driver. + + +Callbacks +~~~~~~~~~ + +match(): Attaching Drivers to Devices +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The format of device ID structures and the semantics for comparing +them are inherently bus-specific. Drivers typically declare an array +of device IDs of devices they support that reside in a bus-specific +driver structure. + +The purpose of the match callback is to give the bus an opportunity to +determine if a particular driver supports a particular device by +comparing the device IDs the driver supports with the device ID of a +particular device, without sacrificing bus-specific functionality or +type-safety. + +When a driver is registered with the bus, the bus's list of devices is +iterated over, and the match callback is called for each device that +does not have a driver associated with it. + + + +Device and Driver Lists +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The lists of devices and drivers are intended to replace the local +lists that many buses keep. They are lists of struct devices and +struct device_drivers, respectively. Bus drivers are free to use the +lists as they please, but conversion to the bus-specific type may be +necessary. + +The LDM core provides helper functions for iterating over each list:: + + int bus_for_each_dev(struct bus_type * bus, struct device * start, + void * data, + int (*fn)(struct device *, void *)); + + int bus_for_each_drv(struct bus_type * bus, struct device_driver * start, + void * data, int (*fn)(struct device_driver *, void *)); + +These helpers iterate over the respective list, and call the callback +for each device or driver in the list. All list accesses are +synchronized by taking the bus's lock (read currently). The reference +count on each object in the list is incremented before the callback is +called; it is decremented after the next object has been obtained. The +lock is not held when calling the callback. + + +sysfs +~~~~~~~~ +There is a top-level directory named 'bus'. + +Each bus gets a directory in the bus directory, along with two default +directories:: + + /sys/bus/pci/ + |-- devices + `-- drivers + +Drivers registered with the bus get a directory in the bus's drivers +directory:: + + /sys/bus/pci/ + |-- devices + `-- drivers + |-- Intel ICH + |-- Intel ICH Joystick + |-- agpgart + `-- e100 + +Each device that is discovered on a bus of that type gets a symlink in +the bus's devices directory to the device's directory in the physical +hierarchy:: + + /sys/bus/pci/ + |-- devices + | |-- 00:00.0 -> ../../../root/pci0/00:00.0 + | |-- 00:01.0 -> ../../../root/pci0/00:01.0 + | `-- 00:02.0 -> ../../../root/pci0/00:02.0 + `-- drivers + + +Exporting Attributes +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +:: + + struct bus_attribute { + struct attribute attr; + ssize_t (*show)(struct bus_type *, char * buf); + ssize_t (*store)(struct bus_type *, const char * buf, size_t count); + }; + +Bus drivers can export attributes using the BUS_ATTR_RW macro that works +similarly to the DEVICE_ATTR_RW macro for devices. For example, a +definition like this:: + + static BUS_ATTR_RW(debug); + +is equivalent to declaring:: + + static bus_attribute bus_attr_debug; + +This can then be used to add and remove the attribute from the bus's +sysfs directory using:: + + int bus_create_file(struct bus_type *, struct bus_attribute *); + void bus_remove_file(struct bus_type *, struct bus_attribute *); diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/class.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/class.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fff55b80e86a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/class.rst @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ +============== +Device Classes +============== + +Introduction +~~~~~~~~~~~~ +A device class describes a type of device, like an audio or network +device. The following device classes have been identified: + +<Insert List of Device Classes Here> + + +Each device class defines a set of semantics and a programming interface +that devices of that class adhere to. Device drivers are the +implementation of that programming interface for a particular device on +a particular bus. + +Device classes are agnostic with respect to what bus a device resides +on. + + +Programming Interface +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The device class structure looks like:: + + + typedef int (*devclass_add)(struct device *); + typedef void (*devclass_remove)(struct device *); + +See the kerneldoc for the struct class. + +A typical device class definition would look like:: + + struct device_class input_devclass = { + .name = "input", + .add_device = input_add_device, + .remove_device = input_remove_device, + }; + +Each device class structure should be exported in a header file so it +can be used by drivers, extensions and interfaces. + +Device classes are registered and unregistered with the core using:: + + int devclass_register(struct device_class * cls); + void devclass_unregister(struct device_class * cls); + + +Devices +~~~~~~~ +As devices are bound to drivers, they are added to the device class +that the driver belongs to. Before the driver model core, this would +typically happen during the driver's probe() callback, once the device +has been initialized. It now happens after the probe() callback +finishes from the core. + +The device is enumerated in the class. Each time a device is added to +the class, the class's devnum field is incremented and assigned to the +device. The field is never decremented, so if the device is removed +from the class and re-added, it will receive a different enumerated +value. + +The class is allowed to create a class-specific structure for the +device and store it in the device's class_data pointer. + +There is no list of devices in the device class. Each driver has a +list of devices that it supports. The device class has a list of +drivers of that particular class. To access all of the devices in the +class, iterate over the device lists of each driver in the class. + + +Device Drivers +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Device drivers are added to device classes when they are registered +with the core. A driver specifies the class it belongs to by setting +the struct device_driver::devclass field. + + +sysfs directory structure +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +There is a top-level sysfs directory named 'class'. + +Each class gets a directory in the class directory, along with two +default subdirectories:: + + class/ + `-- input + |-- devices + `-- drivers + + +Drivers registered with the class get a symlink in the drivers/ directory +that points to the driver's directory (under its bus directory):: + + class/ + `-- input + |-- devices + `-- drivers + `-- usb:usb_mouse -> ../../../bus/drivers/usb_mouse/ + + +Each device gets a symlink in the devices/ directory that points to the +device's directory in the physical hierarchy:: + + class/ + `-- input + |-- devices + | `-- 1 -> ../../../root/pci0/00:1f.0/usb_bus/00:1f.2-1:0/ + `-- drivers + + +Exporting Attributes +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +:: + + struct devclass_attribute { + struct attribute attr; + ssize_t (*show)(struct device_class *, char * buf, size_t count, loff_t off); + ssize_t (*store)(struct device_class *, const char * buf, size_t count, loff_t off); + }; + +Class drivers can export attributes using the DEVCLASS_ATTR macro that works +similarly to the DEVICE_ATTR macro for devices. For example, a definition +like this:: + + static DEVCLASS_ATTR(debug,0644,show_debug,store_debug); + +is equivalent to declaring:: + + static devclass_attribute devclass_attr_debug; + +The bus driver can add and remove the attribute from the class's +sysfs directory using:: + + int devclass_create_file(struct device_class *, struct devclass_attribute *); + void devclass_remove_file(struct device_class *, struct devclass_attribute *); + +In the example above, the file will be named 'debug' in placed in the +class's directory in sysfs. + + +Interfaces +~~~~~~~~~~ +There may exist multiple mechanisms for accessing the same device of a +particular class type. Device interfaces describe these mechanisms. + +When a device is added to a device class, the core attempts to add it +to every interface that is registered with the device class. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/design-patterns.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/design-patterns.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..41eb8f41f7dd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/design-patterns.rst @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ +============================= +Device Driver Design Patterns +============================= + +This document describes a few common design patterns found in device drivers. +It is likely that subsystem maintainers will ask driver developers to +conform to these design patterns. + +1. State Container +2. container_of() + + +1. State Container +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +While the kernel contains a few device drivers that assume that they will +only be probed() once on a certain system (singletons), it is custom to assume +that the device the driver binds to will appear in several instances. This +means that the probe() function and all callbacks need to be reentrant. + +The most common way to achieve this is to use the state container design +pattern. It usually has this form:: + + struct foo { + spinlock_t lock; /* Example member */ + (...) + }; + + static int foo_probe(...) + { + struct foo *foo; + + foo = devm_kzalloc(dev, sizeof(*foo), GFP_KERNEL); + if (!foo) + return -ENOMEM; + spin_lock_init(&foo->lock); + (...) + } + +This will create an instance of struct foo in memory every time probe() is +called. This is our state container for this instance of the device driver. +Of course it is then necessary to always pass this instance of the +state around to all functions that need access to the state and its members. + +For example, if the driver is registering an interrupt handler, you would +pass around a pointer to struct foo like this:: + + static irqreturn_t foo_handler(int irq, void *arg) + { + struct foo *foo = arg; + (...) + } + + static int foo_probe(...) + { + struct foo *foo; + + (...) + ret = request_irq(irq, foo_handler, 0, "foo", foo); + } + +This way you always get a pointer back to the correct instance of foo in +your interrupt handler. + + +2. container_of() +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Continuing on the above example we add an offloaded work:: + + struct foo { + spinlock_t lock; + struct workqueue_struct *wq; + struct work_struct offload; + (...) + }; + + static void foo_work(struct work_struct *work) + { + struct foo *foo = container_of(work, struct foo, offload); + + (...) + } + + static irqreturn_t foo_handler(int irq, void *arg) + { + struct foo *foo = arg; + + queue_work(foo->wq, &foo->offload); + (...) + } + + static int foo_probe(...) + { + struct foo *foo; + + foo->wq = create_singlethread_workqueue("foo-wq"); + INIT_WORK(&foo->offload, foo_work); + (...) + } + +The design pattern is the same for an hrtimer or something similar that will +return a single argument which is a pointer to a struct member in the +callback. + +container_of() is a macro defined in <linux/kernel.h> + +What container_of() does is to obtain a pointer to the containing struct from +a pointer to a member by a simple subtraction using the offsetof() macro from +standard C, which allows something similar to object oriented behaviours. +Notice that the contained member must not be a pointer, but an actual member +for this to work. + +We can see here that we avoid having global pointers to our struct foo * +instance this way, while still keeping the number of parameters passed to the +work function to a single pointer. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/device.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/device.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2b868d49d349 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/device.rst @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ +========================== +The Basic Device Structure +========================== + +See the kerneldoc for the struct device. + + +Programming Interface +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The bus driver that discovers the device uses this to register the +device with the core:: + + int device_register(struct device * dev); + +The bus should initialize the following fields: + + - parent + - name + - bus_id + - bus + +A device is removed from the core when its reference count goes to +0. The reference count can be adjusted using:: + + struct device * get_device(struct device * dev); + void put_device(struct device * dev); + +get_device() will return a pointer to the struct device passed to it +if the reference is not already 0 (if it's in the process of being +removed already). + +A driver can access the lock in the device structure using:: + + void lock_device(struct device * dev); + void unlock_device(struct device * dev); + + +Attributes +~~~~~~~~~~ + +:: + + struct device_attribute { + struct attribute attr; + ssize_t (*show)(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr, + char *buf); + ssize_t (*store)(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr, + const char *buf, size_t count); + }; + +Attributes of devices can be exported by a device driver through sysfs. + +Please see Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt for more information +on how sysfs works. + +As explained in Documentation/kobject.txt, device attributes must be +created before the KOBJ_ADD uevent is generated. The only way to realize +that is by defining an attribute group. + +Attributes are declared using a macro called DEVICE_ATTR:: + + #define DEVICE_ATTR(name,mode,show,store) + +Example::: + + static DEVICE_ATTR(type, 0444, show_type, NULL); + static DEVICE_ATTR(power, 0644, show_power, store_power); + +This declares two structures of type struct device_attribute with respective +names 'dev_attr_type' and 'dev_attr_power'. These two attributes can be +organized as follows into a group:: + + static struct attribute *dev_attrs[] = { + &dev_attr_type.attr, + &dev_attr_power.attr, + NULL, + }; + + static struct attribute_group dev_attr_group = { + .attrs = dev_attrs, + }; + + static const struct attribute_group *dev_attr_groups[] = { + &dev_attr_group, + NULL, + }; + +This array of groups can then be associated with a device by setting the +group pointer in struct device before device_register() is invoked:: + + dev->groups = dev_attr_groups; + device_register(dev); + +The device_register() function will use the 'groups' pointer to create the +device attributes and the device_unregister() function will use this pointer +to remove the device attributes. + +Word of warning: While the kernel allows device_create_file() and +device_remove_file() to be called on a device at any time, userspace has +strict expectations on when attributes get created. When a new device is +registered in the kernel, a uevent is generated to notify userspace (like +udev) that a new device is available. If attributes are added after the +device is registered, then userspace won't get notified and userspace will +not know about the new attributes. + +This is important for device driver that need to publish additional +attributes for a device at driver probe time. If the device driver simply +calls device_create_file() on the device structure passed to it, then +userspace will never be notified of the new attributes. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/devres.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/devres.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4ac99122b5f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/devres.rst @@ -0,0 +1,414 @@ +================================ +Devres - Managed Device Resource +================================ + +Tejun Heo <teheo@suse.de> + +First draft 10 January 2007 + +.. contents + + 1. Intro : Huh? Devres? + 2. Devres : Devres in a nutshell + 3. Devres Group : Group devres'es and release them together + 4. Details : Life time rules, calling context, ... + 5. Overhead : How much do we have to pay for this? + 6. List of managed interfaces: Currently implemented managed interfaces + + +1. Intro +-------- + +devres came up while trying to convert libata to use iomap. Each +iomapped address should be kept and unmapped on driver detach. For +example, a plain SFF ATA controller (that is, good old PCI IDE) in +native mode makes use of 5 PCI BARs and all of them should be +maintained. + +As with many other device drivers, libata low level drivers have +sufficient bugs in ->remove and ->probe failure path. Well, yes, +that's probably because libata low level driver developers are lazy +bunch, but aren't all low level driver developers? After spending a +day fiddling with braindamaged hardware with no document or +braindamaged document, if it's finally working, well, it's working. + +For one reason or another, low level drivers don't receive as much +attention or testing as core code, and bugs on driver detach or +initialization failure don't happen often enough to be noticeable. +Init failure path is worse because it's much less travelled while +needs to handle multiple entry points. + +So, many low level drivers end up leaking resources on driver detach +and having half broken failure path implementation in ->probe() which +would leak resources or even cause oops when failure occurs. iomap +adds more to this mix. So do msi and msix. + + +2. Devres +--------- + +devres is basically linked list of arbitrarily sized memory areas +associated with a struct device. Each devres entry is associated with +a release function. A devres can be released in several ways. No +matter what, all devres entries are released on driver detach. On +release, the associated release function is invoked and then the +devres entry is freed. + +Managed interface is created for resources commonly used by device +drivers using devres. For example, coherent DMA memory is acquired +using dma_alloc_coherent(). The managed version is called +dmam_alloc_coherent(). It is identical to dma_alloc_coherent() except +for the DMA memory allocated using it is managed and will be +automatically released on driver detach. Implementation looks like +the following:: + + struct dma_devres { + size_t size; + void *vaddr; + dma_addr_t dma_handle; + }; + + static void dmam_coherent_release(struct device *dev, void *res) + { + struct dma_devres *this = res; + + dma_free_coherent(dev, this->size, this->vaddr, this->dma_handle); + } + + dmam_alloc_coherent(dev, size, dma_handle, gfp) + { + struct dma_devres *dr; + void *vaddr; + + dr = devres_alloc(dmam_coherent_release, sizeof(*dr), gfp); + ... + + /* alloc DMA memory as usual */ + vaddr = dma_alloc_coherent(...); + ... + + /* record size, vaddr, dma_handle in dr */ + dr->vaddr = vaddr; + ... + + devres_add(dev, dr); + + return vaddr; + } + +If a driver uses dmam_alloc_coherent(), the area is guaranteed to be +freed whether initialization fails half-way or the device gets +detached. If most resources are acquired using managed interface, a +driver can have much simpler init and exit code. Init path basically +looks like the following:: + + my_init_one() + { + struct mydev *d; + + d = devm_kzalloc(dev, sizeof(*d), GFP_KERNEL); + if (!d) + return -ENOMEM; + + d->ring = dmam_alloc_coherent(...); + if (!d->ring) + return -ENOMEM; + + if (check something) + return -EINVAL; + ... + + return register_to_upper_layer(d); + } + +And exit path:: + + my_remove_one() + { + unregister_from_upper_layer(d); + shutdown_my_hardware(); + } + +As shown above, low level drivers can be simplified a lot by using +devres. Complexity is shifted from less maintained low level drivers +to better maintained higher layer. Also, as init failure path is +shared with exit path, both can get more testing. + +Note though that when converting current calls or assignments to +managed devm_* versions it is up to you to check if internal operations +like allocating memory, have failed. Managed resources pertains to the +freeing of these resources *only* - all other checks needed are still +on you. In some cases this may mean introducing checks that were not +necessary before moving to the managed devm_* calls. + + +3. Devres group +--------------- + +Devres entries can be grouped using devres group. When a group is +released, all contained normal devres entries and properly nested +groups are released. One usage is to rollback series of acquired +resources on failure. For example:: + + if (!devres_open_group(dev, NULL, GFP_KERNEL)) + return -ENOMEM; + + acquire A; + if (failed) + goto err; + + acquire B; + if (failed) + goto err; + ... + + devres_remove_group(dev, NULL); + return 0; + + err: + devres_release_group(dev, NULL); + return err_code; + +As resource acquisition failure usually means probe failure, constructs +like above are usually useful in midlayer driver (e.g. libata core +layer) where interface function shouldn't have side effect on failure. +For LLDs, just returning error code suffices in most cases. + +Each group is identified by `void *id`. It can either be explicitly +specified by @id argument to devres_open_group() or automatically +created by passing NULL as @id as in the above example. In both +cases, devres_open_group() returns the group's id. The returned id +can be passed to other devres functions to select the target group. +If NULL is given to those functions, the latest open group is +selected. + +For example, you can do something like the following:: + + int my_midlayer_create_something() + { + if (!devres_open_group(dev, my_midlayer_create_something, GFP_KERNEL)) + return -ENOMEM; + + ... + + devres_close_group(dev, my_midlayer_create_something); + return 0; + } + + void my_midlayer_destroy_something() + { + devres_release_group(dev, my_midlayer_create_something); + } + + +4. Details +---------- + +Lifetime of a devres entry begins on devres allocation and finishes +when it is released or destroyed (removed and freed) - no reference +counting. + +devres core guarantees atomicity to all basic devres operations and +has support for single-instance devres types (atomic +lookup-and-add-if-not-found). Other than that, synchronizing +concurrent accesses to allocated devres data is caller's +responsibility. This is usually non-issue because bus ops and +resource allocations already do the job. + +For an example of single-instance devres type, read pcim_iomap_table() +in lib/devres.c. + +All devres interface functions can be called without context if the +right gfp mask is given. + + +5. Overhead +----------- + +Each devres bookkeeping info is allocated together with requested data +area. With debug option turned off, bookkeeping info occupies 16 +bytes on 32bit machines and 24 bytes on 64bit (three pointers rounded +up to ull alignment). If singly linked list is used, it can be +reduced to two pointers (8 bytes on 32bit, 16 bytes on 64bit). + +Each devres group occupies 8 pointers. It can be reduced to 6 if +singly linked list is used. + +Memory space overhead on ahci controller with two ports is between 300 +and 400 bytes on 32bit machine after naive conversion (we can +certainly invest a bit more effort into libata core layer). + + +6. List of managed interfaces +----------------------------- + +CLOCK + devm_clk_get() + devm_clk_get_optional() + devm_clk_put() + devm_clk_hw_register() + devm_of_clk_add_hw_provider() + devm_clk_hw_register_clkdev() + +DMA + dmaenginem_async_device_register() + dmam_alloc_coherent() + dmam_alloc_attrs() + dmam_free_coherent() + dmam_pool_create() + dmam_pool_destroy() + +DRM + devm_drm_dev_init() + +GPIO + devm_gpiod_get() + devm_gpiod_get_index() + devm_gpiod_get_index_optional() + devm_gpiod_get_optional() + devm_gpiod_put() + devm_gpiod_unhinge() + devm_gpiochip_add_data() + devm_gpio_request() + devm_gpio_request_one() + devm_gpio_free() + +I2C + devm_i2c_new_dummy_device() + +IIO + devm_iio_device_alloc() + devm_iio_device_free() + devm_iio_device_register() + devm_iio_device_unregister() + devm_iio_kfifo_allocate() + devm_iio_kfifo_free() + devm_iio_triggered_buffer_setup() + devm_iio_triggered_buffer_cleanup() + devm_iio_trigger_alloc() + devm_iio_trigger_free() + devm_iio_trigger_register() + devm_iio_trigger_unregister() + devm_iio_channel_get() + devm_iio_channel_release() + devm_iio_channel_get_all() + devm_iio_channel_release_all() + +INPUT + devm_input_allocate_device() + +IO region + devm_release_mem_region() + devm_release_region() + devm_release_resource() + devm_request_mem_region() + devm_request_region() + devm_request_resource() + +IOMAP + devm_ioport_map() + devm_ioport_unmap() + devm_ioremap() + devm_ioremap_nocache() + devm_ioremap_wc() + devm_ioremap_resource() : checks resource, requests memory region, ioremaps + devm_iounmap() + pcim_iomap() + pcim_iomap_regions() : do request_region() and iomap() on multiple BARs + pcim_iomap_table() : array of mapped addresses indexed by BAR + pcim_iounmap() + +IRQ + devm_free_irq() + devm_request_any_context_irq() + devm_request_irq() + devm_request_threaded_irq() + devm_irq_alloc_descs() + devm_irq_alloc_desc() + devm_irq_alloc_desc_at() + devm_irq_alloc_desc_from() + devm_irq_alloc_descs_from() + devm_irq_alloc_generic_chip() + devm_irq_setup_generic_chip() + devm_irq_sim_init() + +LED + devm_led_classdev_register() + devm_led_classdev_unregister() + +MDIO + devm_mdiobus_alloc() + devm_mdiobus_alloc_size() + devm_mdiobus_free() + +MEM + devm_free_pages() + devm_get_free_pages() + devm_kasprintf() + devm_kcalloc() + devm_kfree() + devm_kmalloc() + devm_kmalloc_array() + devm_kmemdup() + devm_kstrdup() + devm_kvasprintf() + devm_kzalloc() + +MFD + devm_mfd_add_devices() + +MUX + devm_mux_chip_alloc() + devm_mux_chip_register() + devm_mux_control_get() + +PER-CPU MEM + devm_alloc_percpu() + devm_free_percpu() + +PCI + devm_pci_alloc_host_bridge() : managed PCI host bridge allocation + devm_pci_remap_cfgspace() : ioremap PCI configuration space + devm_pci_remap_cfg_resource() : ioremap PCI configuration space resource + pcim_enable_device() : after success, all PCI ops become managed + pcim_pin_device() : keep PCI device enabled after release + +PHY + devm_usb_get_phy() + devm_usb_put_phy() + +PINCTRL + devm_pinctrl_get() + devm_pinctrl_put() + devm_pinctrl_register() + devm_pinctrl_unregister() + +POWER + devm_reboot_mode_register() + devm_reboot_mode_unregister() + +PWM + devm_pwm_get() + devm_pwm_put() + +REGULATOR + devm_regulator_bulk_get() + devm_regulator_get() + devm_regulator_put() + devm_regulator_register() + +RESET + devm_reset_control_get() + devm_reset_controller_register() + +SERDEV + devm_serdev_device_open() + +SLAVE DMA ENGINE + devm_acpi_dma_controller_register() + +SPI + devm_spi_register_master() + +WATCHDOG + devm_watchdog_register_device() diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/driver.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/driver.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..11d281506a04 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/driver.rst @@ -0,0 +1,223 @@ +============== +Device Drivers +============== + +See the kerneldoc for the struct device_driver. + + +Allocation +~~~~~~~~~~ + +Device drivers are statically allocated structures. Though there may +be multiple devices in a system that a driver supports, struct +device_driver represents the driver as a whole (not a particular +device instance). + +Initialization +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The driver must initialize at least the name and bus fields. It should +also initialize the devclass field (when it arrives), so it may obtain +the proper linkage internally. It should also initialize as many of +the callbacks as possible, though each is optional. + +Declaration +~~~~~~~~~~~ + +As stated above, struct device_driver objects are statically +allocated. Below is an example declaration of the eepro100 +driver. This declaration is hypothetical only; it relies on the driver +being converted completely to the new model:: + + static struct device_driver eepro100_driver = { + .name = "eepro100", + .bus = &pci_bus_type, + + .probe = eepro100_probe, + .remove = eepro100_remove, + .suspend = eepro100_suspend, + .resume = eepro100_resume, + }; + +Most drivers will not be able to be converted completely to the new +model because the bus they belong to has a bus-specific structure with +bus-specific fields that cannot be generalized. + +The most common example of this are device ID structures. A driver +typically defines an array of device IDs that it supports. The format +of these structures and the semantics for comparing device IDs are +completely bus-specific. Defining them as bus-specific entities would +sacrifice type-safety, so we keep bus-specific structures around. + +Bus-specific drivers should include a generic struct device_driver in +the definition of the bus-specific driver. Like this:: + + struct pci_driver { + const struct pci_device_id *id_table; + struct device_driver driver; + }; + +A definition that included bus-specific fields would look like +(using the eepro100 driver again):: + + static struct pci_driver eepro100_driver = { + .id_table = eepro100_pci_tbl, + .driver = { + .name = "eepro100", + .bus = &pci_bus_type, + .probe = eepro100_probe, + .remove = eepro100_remove, + .suspend = eepro100_suspend, + .resume = eepro100_resume, + }, + }; + +Some may find the syntax of embedded struct initialization awkward or +even a bit ugly. So far, it's the best way we've found to do what we want... + +Registration +~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +:: + + int driver_register(struct device_driver *drv); + +The driver registers the structure on startup. For drivers that have +no bus-specific fields (i.e. don't have a bus-specific driver +structure), they would use driver_register and pass a pointer to their +struct device_driver object. + +Most drivers, however, will have a bus-specific structure and will +need to register with the bus using something like pci_driver_register. + +It is important that drivers register their driver structure as early as +possible. Registration with the core initializes several fields in the +struct device_driver object, including the reference count and the +lock. These fields are assumed to be valid at all times and may be +used by the device model core or the bus driver. + + +Transition Bus Drivers +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +By defining wrapper functions, the transition to the new model can be +made easier. Drivers can ignore the generic structure altogether and +let the bus wrapper fill in the fields. For the callbacks, the bus can +define generic callbacks that forward the call to the bus-specific +callbacks of the drivers. + +This solution is intended to be only temporary. In order to get class +information in the driver, the drivers must be modified anyway. Since +converting drivers to the new model should reduce some infrastructural +complexity and code size, it is recommended that they are converted as +class information is added. + +Access +~~~~~~ + +Once the object has been registered, it may access the common fields of +the object, like the lock and the list of devices:: + + int driver_for_each_dev(struct device_driver *drv, void *data, + int (*callback)(struct device *dev, void *data)); + +The devices field is a list of all the devices that have been bound to +the driver. The LDM core provides a helper function to operate on all +the devices a driver controls. This helper locks the driver on each +node access, and does proper reference counting on each device as it +accesses it. + + +sysfs +~~~~~ + +When a driver is registered, a sysfs directory is created in its +bus's directory. In this directory, the driver can export an interface +to userspace to control operation of the driver on a global basis; +e.g. toggling debugging output in the driver. + +A future feature of this directory will be a 'devices' directory. This +directory will contain symlinks to the directories of devices it +supports. + + + +Callbacks +~~~~~~~~~ + +:: + + int (*probe) (struct device *dev); + +The probe() entry is called in task context, with the bus's rwsem locked +and the driver partially bound to the device. Drivers commonly use +container_of() to convert "dev" to a bus-specific type, both in probe() +and other routines. That type often provides device resource data, such +as pci_dev.resource[] or platform_device.resources, which is used in +addition to dev->platform_data to initialize the driver. + +This callback holds the driver-specific logic to bind the driver to a +given device. That includes verifying that the device is present, that +it's a version the driver can handle, that driver data structures can +be allocated and initialized, and that any hardware can be initialized. +Drivers often store a pointer to their state with dev_set_drvdata(). +When the driver has successfully bound itself to that device, then probe() +returns zero and the driver model code will finish its part of binding +the driver to that device. + +A driver's probe() may return a negative errno value to indicate that +the driver did not bind to this device, in which case it should have +released all resources it allocated:: + + int (*remove) (struct device *dev); + +remove is called to unbind a driver from a device. This may be +called if a device is physically removed from the system, if the +driver module is being unloaded, during a reboot sequence, or +in other cases. + +It is up to the driver to determine if the device is present or +not. It should free any resources allocated specifically for the +device; i.e. anything in the device's driver_data field. + +If the device is still present, it should quiesce the device and place +it into a supported low-power state:: + + int (*suspend) (struct device *dev, pm_message_t state); + +suspend is called to put the device in a low power state:: + + int (*resume) (struct device *dev); + +Resume is used to bring a device back from a low power state. + + +Attributes +~~~~~~~~~~ + +:: + + struct driver_attribute { + struct attribute attr; + ssize_t (*show)(struct device_driver *driver, char *buf); + ssize_t (*store)(struct device_driver *, const char *buf, size_t count); + }; + +Device drivers can export attributes via their sysfs directories. +Drivers can declare attributes using a DRIVER_ATTR_RW and DRIVER_ATTR_RO +macro that works identically to the DEVICE_ATTR_RW and DEVICE_ATTR_RO +macros. + +Example:: + + DRIVER_ATTR_RW(debug); + +This is equivalent to declaring:: + + struct driver_attribute driver_attr_debug; + +This can then be used to add and remove the attribute from the +driver's directory using:: + + int driver_create_file(struct device_driver *, const struct driver_attribute *); + void driver_remove_file(struct device_driver *, const struct driver_attribute *); diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/index.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..755016422269 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +============ +Driver Model +============ + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 1 + + binding + bus + class + design-patterns + device + devres + driver + overview + platform + porting + +.. only:: subproject and html + + Indices + ======= + + * :ref:`genindex` diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/overview.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/overview.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d4d1e9b40e0c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/overview.rst @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ +============================= +The Linux Kernel Device Model +============================= + +Patrick Mochel <mochel@digitalimplant.org> + +Drafted 26 August 2002 +Updated 31 January 2006 + + +Overview +~~~~~~~~ + +The Linux Kernel Driver Model is a unification of all the disparate driver +models that were previously used in the kernel. It is intended to augment the +bus-specific drivers for bridges and devices by consolidating a set of data +and operations into globally accessible data structures. + +Traditional driver models implemented some sort of tree-like structure +(sometimes just a list) for the devices they control. There wasn't any +uniformity across the different bus types. + +The current driver model provides a common, uniform data model for describing +a bus and the devices that can appear under the bus. The unified bus +model includes a set of common attributes which all busses carry, and a set +of common callbacks, such as device discovery during bus probing, bus +shutdown, bus power management, etc. + +The common device and bridge interface reflects the goals of the modern +computer: namely the ability to do seamless device "plug and play", power +management, and hot plug. In particular, the model dictated by Intel and +Microsoft (namely ACPI) ensures that almost every device on almost any bus +on an x86-compatible system can work within this paradigm. Of course, +not every bus is able to support all such operations, although most +buses support most of those operations. + + +Downstream Access +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Common data fields have been moved out of individual bus layers into a common +data structure. These fields must still be accessed by the bus layers, +and sometimes by the device-specific drivers. + +Other bus layers are encouraged to do what has been done for the PCI layer. +struct pci_dev now looks like this:: + + struct pci_dev { + ... + + struct device dev; /* Generic device interface */ + ... + }; + +Note first that the struct device dev within the struct pci_dev is +statically allocated. This means only one allocation on device discovery. + +Note also that that struct device dev is not necessarily defined at the +front of the pci_dev structure. This is to make people think about what +they're doing when switching between the bus driver and the global driver, +and to discourage meaningless and incorrect casts between the two. + +The PCI bus layer freely accesses the fields of struct device. It knows about +the structure of struct pci_dev, and it should know the structure of struct +device. Individual PCI device drivers that have been converted to the current +driver model generally do not and should not touch the fields of struct device, +unless there is a compelling reason to do so. + +The above abstraction prevents unnecessary pain during transitional phases. +If it were not done this way, then when a field was renamed or removed, every +downstream driver would break. On the other hand, if only the bus layer +(and not the device layer) accesses the struct device, it is only the bus +layer that needs to change. + + +User Interface +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +By virtue of having a complete hierarchical view of all the devices in the +system, exporting a complete hierarchical view to userspace becomes relatively +easy. This has been accomplished by implementing a special purpose virtual +file system named sysfs. + +Almost all mainstream Linux distros mount this filesystem automatically; you +can see some variation of the following in the output of the "mount" command:: + + $ mount + ... + none on /sys type sysfs (rw,noexec,nosuid,nodev) + ... + $ + +The auto-mounting of sysfs is typically accomplished by an entry similar to +the following in the /etc/fstab file:: + + none /sys sysfs defaults 0 0 + +or something similar in the /lib/init/fstab file on Debian-based systems:: + + none /sys sysfs nodev,noexec,nosuid 0 0 + +If sysfs is not automatically mounted, you can always do it manually with:: + + # mount -t sysfs sysfs /sys + +Whenever a device is inserted into the tree, a directory is created for it. +This directory may be populated at each layer of discovery - the global layer, +the bus layer, or the device layer. + +The global layer currently creates two files - 'name' and 'power'. The +former only reports the name of the device. The latter reports the +current power state of the device. It will also be used to set the current +power state. + +The bus layer may also create files for the devices it finds while probing the +bus. For example, the PCI layer currently creates 'irq' and 'resource' files +for each PCI device. + +A device-specific driver may also export files in its directory to expose +device-specific data or tunable interfaces. + +More information about the sysfs directory layout can be found in +the other documents in this directory and in the file +Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/platform.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/platform.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..334dd4071ae4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/platform.rst @@ -0,0 +1,246 @@ +============================ +Platform Devices and Drivers +============================ + +See <linux/platform_device.h> for the driver model interface to the +platform bus: platform_device, and platform_driver. This pseudo-bus +is used to connect devices on busses with minimal infrastructure, +like those used to integrate peripherals on many system-on-chip +processors, or some "legacy" PC interconnects; as opposed to large +formally specified ones like PCI or USB. + + +Platform devices +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Platform devices are devices that typically appear as autonomous +entities in the system. This includes legacy port-based devices and +host bridges to peripheral buses, and most controllers integrated +into system-on-chip platforms. What they usually have in common +is direct addressing from a CPU bus. Rarely, a platform_device will +be connected through a segment of some other kind of bus; but its +registers will still be directly addressable. + +Platform devices are given a name, used in driver binding, and a +list of resources such as addresses and IRQs:: + + struct platform_device { + const char *name; + u32 id; + struct device dev; + u32 num_resources; + struct resource *resource; + }; + + +Platform drivers +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Platform drivers follow the standard driver model convention, where +discovery/enumeration is handled outside the drivers, and drivers +provide probe() and remove() methods. They support power management +and shutdown notifications using the standard conventions:: + + struct platform_driver { + int (*probe)(struct platform_device *); + int (*remove)(struct platform_device *); + void (*shutdown)(struct platform_device *); + int (*suspend)(struct platform_device *, pm_message_t state); + int (*suspend_late)(struct platform_device *, pm_message_t state); + int (*resume_early)(struct platform_device *); + int (*resume)(struct platform_device *); + struct device_driver driver; + }; + +Note that probe() should in general verify that the specified device hardware +actually exists; sometimes platform setup code can't be sure. The probing +can use device resources, including clocks, and device platform_data. + +Platform drivers register themselves the normal way:: + + int platform_driver_register(struct platform_driver *drv); + +Or, in common situations where the device is known not to be hot-pluggable, +the probe() routine can live in an init section to reduce the driver's +runtime memory footprint:: + + int platform_driver_probe(struct platform_driver *drv, + int (*probe)(struct platform_device *)) + +Kernel modules can be composed of several platform drivers. The platform core +provides helpers to register and unregister an array of drivers:: + + int __platform_register_drivers(struct platform_driver * const *drivers, + unsigned int count, struct module *owner); + void platform_unregister_drivers(struct platform_driver * const *drivers, + unsigned int count); + +If one of the drivers fails to register, all drivers registered up to that +point will be unregistered in reverse order. Note that there is a convenience +macro that passes THIS_MODULE as owner parameter:: + + #define platform_register_drivers(drivers, count) + + +Device Enumeration +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +As a rule, platform specific (and often board-specific) setup code will +register platform devices:: + + int platform_device_register(struct platform_device *pdev); + + int platform_add_devices(struct platform_device **pdevs, int ndev); + +The general rule is to register only those devices that actually exist, +but in some cases extra devices might be registered. For example, a kernel +might be configured to work with an external network adapter that might not +be populated on all boards, or likewise to work with an integrated controller +that some boards might not hook up to any peripherals. + +In some cases, boot firmware will export tables describing the devices +that are populated on a given board. Without such tables, often the +only way for system setup code to set up the correct devices is to build +a kernel for a specific target board. Such board-specific kernels are +common with embedded and custom systems development. + +In many cases, the memory and IRQ resources associated with the platform +device are not enough to let the device's driver work. Board setup code +will often provide additional information using the device's platform_data +field to hold additional information. + +Embedded systems frequently need one or more clocks for platform devices, +which are normally kept off until they're actively needed (to save power). +System setup also associates those clocks with the device, so that that +calls to clk_get(&pdev->dev, clock_name) return them as needed. + + +Legacy Drivers: Device Probing +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Some drivers are not fully converted to the driver model, because they take +on a non-driver role: the driver registers its platform device, rather than +leaving that for system infrastructure. Such drivers can't be hotplugged +or coldplugged, since those mechanisms require device creation to be in a +different system component than the driver. + +The only "good" reason for this is to handle older system designs which, like +original IBM PCs, rely on error-prone "probe-the-hardware" models for hardware +configuration. Newer systems have largely abandoned that model, in favor of +bus-level support for dynamic configuration (PCI, USB), or device tables +provided by the boot firmware (e.g. PNPACPI on x86). There are too many +conflicting options about what might be where, and even educated guesses by +an operating system will be wrong often enough to make trouble. + +This style of driver is discouraged. If you're updating such a driver, +please try to move the device enumeration to a more appropriate location, +outside the driver. This will usually be cleanup, since such drivers +tend to already have "normal" modes, such as ones using device nodes that +were created by PNP or by platform device setup. + +None the less, there are some APIs to support such legacy drivers. Avoid +using these calls except with such hotplug-deficient drivers:: + + struct platform_device *platform_device_alloc( + const char *name, int id); + +You can use platform_device_alloc() to dynamically allocate a device, which +you will then initialize with resources and platform_device_register(). +A better solution is usually:: + + struct platform_device *platform_device_register_simple( + const char *name, int id, + struct resource *res, unsigned int nres); + +You can use platform_device_register_simple() as a one-step call to allocate +and register a device. + + +Device Naming and Driver Binding +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The platform_device.dev.bus_id is the canonical name for the devices. +It's built from two components: + + * platform_device.name ... which is also used to for driver matching. + + * platform_device.id ... the device instance number, or else "-1" + to indicate there's only one. + +These are concatenated, so name/id "serial"/0 indicates bus_id "serial.0", and +"serial/3" indicates bus_id "serial.3"; both would use the platform_driver +named "serial". While "my_rtc"/-1 would be bus_id "my_rtc" (no instance id) +and use the platform_driver called "my_rtc". + +Driver binding is performed automatically by the driver core, invoking +driver probe() after finding a match between device and driver. If the +probe() succeeds, the driver and device are bound as usual. There are +three different ways to find such a match: + + - Whenever a device is registered, the drivers for that bus are + checked for matches. Platform devices should be registered very + early during system boot. + + - When a driver is registered using platform_driver_register(), all + unbound devices on that bus are checked for matches. Drivers + usually register later during booting, or by module loading. + + - Registering a driver using platform_driver_probe() works just like + using platform_driver_register(), except that the driver won't + be probed later if another device registers. (Which is OK, since + this interface is only for use with non-hotpluggable devices.) + + +Early Platform Devices and Drivers +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The early platform interfaces provide platform data to platform device +drivers early on during the system boot. The code is built on top of the +early_param() command line parsing and can be executed very early on. + +Example: "earlyprintk" class early serial console in 6 steps + +1. Registering early platform device data +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The architecture code registers platform device data using the function +early_platform_add_devices(). In the case of early serial console this +should be hardware configuration for the serial port. Devices registered +at this point will later on be matched against early platform drivers. + +2. Parsing kernel command line +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The architecture code calls parse_early_param() to parse the kernel +command line. This will execute all matching early_param() callbacks. +User specified early platform devices will be registered at this point. +For the early serial console case the user can specify port on the +kernel command line as "earlyprintk=serial.0" where "earlyprintk" is +the class string, "serial" is the name of the platform driver and +0 is the platform device id. If the id is -1 then the dot and the +id can be omitted. + +3. Installing early platform drivers belonging to a certain class +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The architecture code may optionally force registration of all early +platform drivers belonging to a certain class using the function +early_platform_driver_register_all(). User specified devices from +step 2 have priority over these. This step is omitted by the serial +driver example since the early serial driver code should be disabled +unless the user has specified port on the kernel command line. + +4. Early platform driver registration +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Compiled-in platform drivers making use of early_platform_init() are +automatically registered during step 2 or 3. The serial driver example +should use early_platform_init("earlyprintk", &platform_driver). + +5. Probing of early platform drivers belonging to a certain class +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The architecture code calls early_platform_driver_probe() to match +registered early platform devices associated with a certain class with +registered early platform drivers. Matched devices will get probed(). +This step can be executed at any point during the early boot. As soon +as possible may be good for the serial port case. + +6. Inside the early platform driver probe() +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +The driver code needs to take special care during early boot, especially +when it comes to memory allocation and interrupt registration. The code +in the probe() function can use is_early_platform_device() to check if +it is called at early platform device or at the regular platform device +time. The early serial driver performs register_console() at this point. + +For further information, see <linux/platform_device.h>. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/porting.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/porting.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..931ea879af3f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/porting.rst @@ -0,0 +1,448 @@ +======================================= +Porting Drivers to the New Driver Model +======================================= + +Patrick Mochel + +7 January 2003 + + +Overview + +Please refer to `Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/*.rst` for definitions of +various driver types and concepts. + +Most of the work of porting devices drivers to the new model happens +at the bus driver layer. This was intentional, to minimize the +negative effect on kernel drivers, and to allow a gradual transition +of bus drivers. + +In a nutshell, the driver model consists of a set of objects that can +be embedded in larger, bus-specific objects. Fields in these generic +objects can replace fields in the bus-specific objects. + +The generic objects must be registered with the driver model core. By +doing so, they will exported via the sysfs filesystem. sysfs can be +mounted by doing:: + + # mount -t sysfs sysfs /sys + + + +The Process + +Step 0: Read include/linux/device.h for object and function definitions. + +Step 1: Registering the bus driver. + + +- Define a struct bus_type for the bus driver:: + + struct bus_type pci_bus_type = { + .name = "pci", + }; + + +- Register the bus type. + + This should be done in the initialization function for the bus type, + which is usually the module_init(), or equivalent, function:: + + static int __init pci_driver_init(void) + { + return bus_register(&pci_bus_type); + } + + subsys_initcall(pci_driver_init); + + + The bus type may be unregistered (if the bus driver may be compiled + as a module) by doing:: + + bus_unregister(&pci_bus_type); + + +- Export the bus type for others to use. + + Other code may wish to reference the bus type, so declare it in a + shared header file and export the symbol. + +From include/linux/pci.h:: + + extern struct bus_type pci_bus_type; + + +From file the above code appears in:: + + EXPORT_SYMBOL(pci_bus_type); + + + +- This will cause the bus to show up in /sys/bus/pci/ with two + subdirectories: 'devices' and 'drivers':: + + # tree -d /sys/bus/pci/ + /sys/bus/pci/ + |-- devices + `-- drivers + + + +Step 2: Registering Devices. + +struct device represents a single device. It mainly contains metadata +describing the relationship the device has to other entities. + + +- Embed a struct device in the bus-specific device type:: + + + struct pci_dev { + ... + struct device dev; /* Generic device interface */ + ... + }; + + It is recommended that the generic device not be the first item in + the struct to discourage programmers from doing mindless casts + between the object types. Instead macros, or inline functions, + should be created to convert from the generic object type:: + + + #define to_pci_dev(n) container_of(n, struct pci_dev, dev) + + or + + static inline struct pci_dev * to_pci_dev(struct kobject * kobj) + { + return container_of(n, struct pci_dev, dev); + } + + This allows the compiler to verify type-safety of the operations + that are performed (which is Good). + + +- Initialize the device on registration. + + When devices are discovered or registered with the bus type, the + bus driver should initialize the generic device. The most important + things to initialize are the bus_id, parent, and bus fields. + + The bus_id is an ASCII string that contains the device's address on + the bus. The format of this string is bus-specific. This is + necessary for representing devices in sysfs. + + parent is the physical parent of the device. It is important that + the bus driver sets this field correctly. + + The driver model maintains an ordered list of devices that it uses + for power management. This list must be in order to guarantee that + devices are shutdown before their physical parents, and vice versa. + The order of this list is determined by the parent of registered + devices. + + Also, the location of the device's sysfs directory depends on a + device's parent. sysfs exports a directory structure that mirrors + the device hierarchy. Accurately setting the parent guarantees that + sysfs will accurately represent the hierarchy. + + The device's bus field is a pointer to the bus type the device + belongs to. This should be set to the bus_type that was declared + and initialized before. + + Optionally, the bus driver may set the device's name and release + fields. + + The name field is an ASCII string describing the device, like + + "ATI Technologies Inc Radeon QD" + + The release field is a callback that the driver model core calls + when the device has been removed, and all references to it have + been released. More on this in a moment. + + +- Register the device. + + Once the generic device has been initialized, it can be registered + with the driver model core by doing:: + + device_register(&dev->dev); + + It can later be unregistered by doing:: + + device_unregister(&dev->dev); + + This should happen on buses that support hotpluggable devices. + If a bus driver unregisters a device, it should not immediately free + it. It should instead wait for the driver model core to call the + device's release method, then free the bus-specific object. + (There may be other code that is currently referencing the device + structure, and it would be rude to free the device while that is + happening). + + + When the device is registered, a directory in sysfs is created. + The PCI tree in sysfs looks like:: + + /sys/devices/pci0/ + |-- 00:00.0 + |-- 00:01.0 + | `-- 01:00.0 + |-- 00:02.0 + | `-- 02:1f.0 + | `-- 03:00.0 + |-- 00:1e.0 + | `-- 04:04.0 + |-- 00:1f.0 + |-- 00:1f.1 + | |-- ide0 + | | |-- 0.0 + | | `-- 0.1 + | `-- ide1 + | `-- 1.0 + |-- 00:1f.2 + |-- 00:1f.3 + `-- 00:1f.5 + + Also, symlinks are created in the bus's 'devices' directory + that point to the device's directory in the physical hierarchy:: + + /sys/bus/pci/devices/ + |-- 00:00.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:00.0 + |-- 00:01.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:01.0 + |-- 00:02.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:02.0 + |-- 00:1e.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1e.0 + |-- 00:1f.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.0 + |-- 00:1f.1 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.1 + |-- 00:1f.2 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.2 + |-- 00:1f.3 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.3 + |-- 00:1f.5 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.5 + |-- 01:00.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:01.0/01:00.0 + |-- 02:1f.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:02.0/02:1f.0 + |-- 03:00.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:02.0/02:1f.0/03:00.0 + `-- 04:04.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1e.0/04:04.0 + + + +Step 3: Registering Drivers. + +struct device_driver is a simple driver structure that contains a set +of operations that the driver model core may call. + + +- Embed a struct device_driver in the bus-specific driver. + + Just like with devices, do something like:: + + struct pci_driver { + ... + struct device_driver driver; + }; + + +- Initialize the generic driver structure. + + When the driver registers with the bus (e.g. doing pci_register_driver()), + initialize the necessary fields of the driver: the name and bus + fields. + + +- Register the driver. + + After the generic driver has been initialized, call:: + + driver_register(&drv->driver); + + to register the driver with the core. + + When the driver is unregistered from the bus, unregister it from the + core by doing:: + + driver_unregister(&drv->driver); + + Note that this will block until all references to the driver have + gone away. Normally, there will not be any. + + +- Sysfs representation. + + Drivers are exported via sysfs in their bus's 'driver's directory. + For example:: + + /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ + |-- 3c59x + |-- Ensoniq AudioPCI + |-- agpgart-amdk7 + |-- e100 + `-- serial + + +Step 4: Define Generic Methods for Drivers. + +struct device_driver defines a set of operations that the driver model +core calls. Most of these operations are probably similar to +operations the bus already defines for drivers, but taking different +parameters. + +It would be difficult and tedious to force every driver on a bus to +simultaneously convert their drivers to generic format. Instead, the +bus driver should define single instances of the generic methods that +forward call to the bus-specific drivers. For instance:: + + + static int pci_device_remove(struct device * dev) + { + struct pci_dev * pci_dev = to_pci_dev(dev); + struct pci_driver * drv = pci_dev->driver; + + if (drv) { + if (drv->remove) + drv->remove(pci_dev); + pci_dev->driver = NULL; + } + return 0; + } + + +The generic driver should be initialized with these methods before it +is registered:: + + /* initialize common driver fields */ + drv->driver.name = drv->name; + drv->driver.bus = &pci_bus_type; + drv->driver.probe = pci_device_probe; + drv->driver.resume = pci_device_resume; + drv->driver.suspend = pci_device_suspend; + drv->driver.remove = pci_device_remove; + + /* register with core */ + driver_register(&drv->driver); + + +Ideally, the bus should only initialize the fields if they are not +already set. This allows the drivers to implement their own generic +methods. + + +Step 5: Support generic driver binding. + +The model assumes that a device or driver can be dynamically +registered with the bus at any time. When registration happens, +devices must be bound to a driver, or drivers must be bound to all +devices that it supports. + +A driver typically contains a list of device IDs that it supports. The +bus driver compares these IDs to the IDs of devices registered with it. +The format of the device IDs, and the semantics for comparing them are +bus-specific, so the generic model does attempt to generalize them. + +Instead, a bus may supply a method in struct bus_type that does the +comparison:: + + int (*match)(struct device * dev, struct device_driver * drv); + +match should return positive value if the driver supports the device, +and zero otherwise. It may also return error code (for example +-EPROBE_DEFER) if determining that given driver supports the device is +not possible. + +When a device is registered, the bus's list of drivers is iterated +over. bus->match() is called for each one until a match is found. + +When a driver is registered, the bus's list of devices is iterated +over. bus->match() is called for each device that is not already +claimed by a driver. + +When a device is successfully bound to a driver, device->driver is +set, the device is added to a per-driver list of devices, and a +symlink is created in the driver's sysfs directory that points to the +device's physical directory:: + + /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ + |-- 3c59x + | `-- 00:0b.0 -> ../../../../devices/pci0/00:0b.0 + |-- Ensoniq AudioPCI + |-- agpgart-amdk7 + | `-- 00:00.0 -> ../../../../devices/pci0/00:00.0 + |-- e100 + | `-- 00:0c.0 -> ../../../../devices/pci0/00:0c.0 + `-- serial + + +This driver binding should replace the existing driver binding +mechanism the bus currently uses. + + +Step 6: Supply a hotplug callback. + +Whenever a device is registered with the driver model core, the +userspace program /sbin/hotplug is called to notify userspace. +Users can define actions to perform when a device is inserted or +removed. + +The driver model core passes several arguments to userspace via +environment variables, including + +- ACTION: set to 'add' or 'remove' +- DEVPATH: set to the device's physical path in sysfs. + +A bus driver may also supply additional parameters for userspace to +consume. To do this, a bus must implement the 'hotplug' method in +struct bus_type:: + + int (*hotplug) (struct device *dev, char **envp, + int num_envp, char *buffer, int buffer_size); + +This is called immediately before /sbin/hotplug is executed. + + +Step 7: Cleaning up the bus driver. + +The generic bus, device, and driver structures provide several fields +that can replace those defined privately to the bus driver. + +- Device list. + +struct bus_type contains a list of all devices registered with the bus +type. This includes all devices on all instances of that bus type. +An internal list that the bus uses may be removed, in favor of using +this one. + +The core provides an iterator to access these devices:: + + int bus_for_each_dev(struct bus_type * bus, struct device * start, + void * data, int (*fn)(struct device *, void *)); + + +- Driver list. + +struct bus_type also contains a list of all drivers registered with +it. An internal list of drivers that the bus driver maintains may +be removed in favor of using the generic one. + +The drivers may be iterated over, like devices:: + + int bus_for_each_drv(struct bus_type * bus, struct device_driver * start, + void * data, int (*fn)(struct device_driver *, void *)); + + +Please see drivers/base/bus.c for more information. + + +- rwsem + +struct bus_type contains an rwsem that protects all core accesses to +the device and driver lists. This can be used by the bus driver +internally, and should be used when accessing the device or driver +lists the bus maintains. + + +- Device and driver fields. + +Some of the fields in struct device and struct device_driver duplicate +fields in the bus-specific representations of these objects. Feel free +to remove the bus-specific ones and favor the generic ones. Note +though, that this will likely mean fixing up all the drivers that +reference the bus-specific fields (though those should all be 1-line +changes). diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/early-userspace/buffer-format.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/early-userspace/buffer-format.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7f74e301fdf3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/early-userspace/buffer-format.rst @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ +======================= +initramfs buffer format +======================= + +Al Viro, H. Peter Anvin + +Last revision: 2002-01-13 + +Starting with kernel 2.5.x, the old "initial ramdisk" protocol is +getting {replaced/complemented} with the new "initial ramfs" +(initramfs) protocol. The initramfs contents is passed using the same +memory buffer protocol used by the initrd protocol, but the contents +is different. The initramfs buffer contains an archive which is +expanded into a ramfs filesystem; this document details the format of +the initramfs buffer format. + +The initramfs buffer format is based around the "newc" or "crc" CPIO +formats, and can be created with the cpio(1) utility. The cpio +archive can be compressed using gzip(1). One valid version of an +initramfs buffer is thus a single .cpio.gz file. + +The full format of the initramfs buffer is defined by the following +grammar, where:: + + * is used to indicate "0 or more occurrences of" + (|) indicates alternatives + + indicates concatenation + GZIP() indicates the gzip(1) of the operand + ALGN(n) means padding with null bytes to an n-byte boundary + + initramfs := ("\0" | cpio_archive | cpio_gzip_archive)* + + cpio_gzip_archive := GZIP(cpio_archive) + + cpio_archive := cpio_file* + (<nothing> | cpio_trailer) + + cpio_file := ALGN(4) + cpio_header + filename + "\0" + ALGN(4) + data + + cpio_trailer := ALGN(4) + cpio_header + "TRAILER!!!\0" + ALGN(4) + + +In human terms, the initramfs buffer contains a collection of +compressed and/or uncompressed cpio archives (in the "newc" or "crc" +formats); arbitrary amounts zero bytes (for padding) can be added +between members. + +The cpio "TRAILER!!!" entry (cpio end-of-archive) is optional, but is +not ignored; see "handling of hard links" below. + +The structure of the cpio_header is as follows (all fields contain +hexadecimal ASCII numbers fully padded with '0' on the left to the +full width of the field, for example, the integer 4780 is represented +by the ASCII string "000012ac"): + +============= ================== ============================================== +Field name Field size Meaning +============= ================== ============================================== +c_magic 6 bytes The string "070701" or "070702" +c_ino 8 bytes File inode number +c_mode 8 bytes File mode and permissions +c_uid 8 bytes File uid +c_gid 8 bytes File gid +c_nlink 8 bytes Number of links +c_mtime 8 bytes Modification time +c_filesize 8 bytes Size of data field +c_maj 8 bytes Major part of file device number +c_min 8 bytes Minor part of file device number +c_rmaj 8 bytes Major part of device node reference +c_rmin 8 bytes Minor part of device node reference +c_namesize 8 bytes Length of filename, including final \0 +c_chksum 8 bytes Checksum of data field if c_magic is 070702; + otherwise zero +============= ================== ============================================== + +The c_mode field matches the contents of st_mode returned by stat(2) +on Linux, and encodes the file type and file permissions. + +The c_filesize should be zero for any file which is not a regular file +or symlink. + +The c_chksum field contains a simple 32-bit unsigned sum of all the +bytes in the data field. cpio(1) refers to this as "crc", which is +clearly incorrect (a cyclic redundancy check is a different and +significantly stronger integrity check), however, this is the +algorithm used. + +If the filename is "TRAILER!!!" this is actually an end-of-archive +marker; the c_filesize for an end-of-archive marker must be zero. + + +Handling of hard links +====================== + +When a nondirectory with c_nlink > 1 is seen, the (c_maj,c_min,c_ino) +tuple is looked up in a tuple buffer. If not found, it is entered in +the tuple buffer and the entry is created as usual; if found, a hard +link rather than a second copy of the file is created. It is not +necessary (but permitted) to include a second copy of the file +contents; if the file contents is not included, the c_filesize field +should be set to zero to indicate no data section follows. If data is +present, the previous instance of the file is overwritten; this allows +the data-carrying instance of a file to occur anywhere in the sequence +(GNU cpio is reported to attach the data to the last instance of a +file only.) + +c_filesize must not be zero for a symlink. + +When a "TRAILER!!!" end-of-archive marker is seen, the tuple buffer is +reset. This permits archives which are generated independently to be +concatenated. + +To combine file data from different sources (without having to +regenerate the (c_maj,c_min,c_ino) fields), therefore, either one of +the following techniques can be used: + +a) Separate the different file data sources with a "TRAILER!!!" + end-of-archive marker, or + +b) Make sure c_nlink == 1 for all nondirectory entries. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/early-userspace/early_userspace_support.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/early-userspace/early_userspace_support.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..3deefb34046b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/early-userspace/early_userspace_support.rst @@ -0,0 +1,154 @@ +======================= +Early userspace support +======================= + +Last update: 2004-12-20 tlh + + +"Early userspace" is a set of libraries and programs that provide +various pieces of functionality that are important enough to be +available while a Linux kernel is coming up, but that don't need to be +run inside the kernel itself. + +It consists of several major infrastructure components: + +- gen_init_cpio, a program that builds a cpio-format archive + containing a root filesystem image. This archive is compressed, and + the compressed image is linked into the kernel image. +- initramfs, a chunk of code that unpacks the compressed cpio image + midway through the kernel boot process. +- klibc, a userspace C library, currently packaged separately, that is + optimized for correctness and small size. + +The cpio file format used by initramfs is the "newc" (aka "cpio -H newc") +format, and is documented in the file "buffer-format.txt". There are +two ways to add an early userspace image: specify an existing cpio +archive to be used as the image or have the kernel build process build +the image from specifications. + +CPIO ARCHIVE method +------------------- + +You can create a cpio archive that contains the early userspace image. +Your cpio archive should be specified in CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE and it +will be used directly. Only a single cpio file may be specified in +CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE and directory and file names are not allowed in +combination with a cpio archive. + +IMAGE BUILDING method +--------------------- + +The kernel build process can also build an early userspace image from +source parts rather than supplying a cpio archive. This method provides +a way to create images with root-owned files even though the image was +built by an unprivileged user. + +The image is specified as one or more sources in +CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE. Sources can be either directories or files - +cpio archives are *not* allowed when building from sources. + +A source directory will have it and all of its contents packaged. The +specified directory name will be mapped to '/'. When packaging a +directory, limited user and group ID translation can be performed. +INITRAMFS_ROOT_UID can be set to a user ID that needs to be mapped to +user root (0). INITRAMFS_ROOT_GID can be set to a group ID that needs +to be mapped to group root (0). + +A source file must be directives in the format required by the +usr/gen_init_cpio utility (run 'usr/gen_init_cpio -h' to get the +file format). The directives in the file will be passed directly to +usr/gen_init_cpio. + +When a combination of directories and files are specified then the +initramfs image will be an aggregate of all of them. In this way a user +can create a 'root-image' directory and install all files into it. +Because device-special files cannot be created by a unprivileged user, +special files can be listed in a 'root-files' file. Both 'root-image' +and 'root-files' can be listed in CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE and a complete +early userspace image can be built by an unprivileged user. + +As a technical note, when directories and files are specified, the +entire CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE is passed to +usr/gen_initramfs_list.sh. This means that CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE +can really be interpreted as any legal argument to +gen_initramfs_list.sh. If a directory is specified as an argument then +the contents are scanned, uid/gid translation is performed, and +usr/gen_init_cpio file directives are output. If a directory is +specified as an argument to usr/gen_initramfs_list.sh then the +contents of the file are simply copied to the output. All of the output +directives from directory scanning and file contents copying are +processed by usr/gen_init_cpio. + +See also 'usr/gen_initramfs_list.sh -h'. + +Where's this all leading? +========================= + +The klibc distribution contains some of the necessary software to make +early userspace useful. The klibc distribution is currently +maintained separately from the kernel. + +You can obtain somewhat infrequent snapshots of klibc from +https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/libs/klibc/ + +For active users, you are better off using the klibc git +repository, at http://git.kernel.org/?p=libs/klibc/klibc.git + +The standalone klibc distribution currently provides three components, +in addition to the klibc library: + +- ipconfig, a program that configures network interfaces. It can + configure them statically, or use DHCP to obtain information + dynamically (aka "IP autoconfiguration"). +- nfsmount, a program that can mount an NFS filesystem. +- kinit, the "glue" that uses ipconfig and nfsmount to replace the old + support for IP autoconfig, mount a filesystem over NFS, and continue + system boot using that filesystem as root. + +kinit is built as a single statically linked binary to save space. + +Eventually, several more chunks of kernel functionality will hopefully +move to early userspace: + +- Almost all of init/do_mounts* (the beginning of this is already in + place) +- ACPI table parsing +- Insert unwieldy subsystem that doesn't really need to be in kernel + space here + +If kinit doesn't meet your current needs and you've got bytes to burn, +the klibc distribution includes a small Bourne-compatible shell (ash) +and a number of other utilities, so you can replace kinit and build +custom initramfs images that meet your needs exactly. + +For questions and help, you can sign up for the early userspace +mailing list at http://www.zytor.com/mailman/listinfo/klibc + +How does it work? +================= + +The kernel has currently 3 ways to mount the root filesystem: + +a) all required device and filesystem drivers compiled into the kernel, no + initrd. init/main.c:init() will call prepare_namespace() to mount the + final root filesystem, based on the root= option and optional init= to run + some other init binary than listed at the end of init/main.c:init(). + +b) some device and filesystem drivers built as modules and stored in an + initrd. The initrd must contain a binary '/linuxrc' which is supposed to + load these driver modules. It is also possible to mount the final root + filesystem via linuxrc and use the pivot_root syscall. The initrd is + mounted and executed via prepare_namespace(). + +c) using initramfs. The call to prepare_namespace() must be skipped. + This means that a binary must do all the work. Said binary can be stored + into initramfs either via modifying usr/gen_init_cpio.c or via the new + initrd format, an cpio archive. It must be called "/init". This binary + is responsible to do all the things prepare_namespace() would do. + + To maintain backwards compatibility, the /init binary will only run if it + comes via an initramfs cpio archive. If this is not the case, + init/main.c:init() will run prepare_namespace() to mount the final root + and exec one of the predefined init binaries. + +Bryan O'Sullivan <bos@serpentine.com> diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/early-userspace/index.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/early-userspace/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..149c1822f06d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/early-userspace/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +=============== +Early Userspace +=============== + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 1 + + early_userspace_support + buffer-format + +.. only:: subproject and html + + Indices + ======= + + * :ref:`genindex` diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/edid.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/edid.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b1b5acd501ed --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/edid.rst @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +==== +EDID +==== + +In the good old days when graphics parameters were configured explicitly +in a file called xorg.conf, even broken hardware could be managed. + +Today, with the advent of Kernel Mode Setting, a graphics board is +either correctly working because all components follow the standards - +or the computer is unusable, because the screen remains dark after +booting or it displays the wrong area. Cases when this happens are: +- The graphics board does not recognize the monitor. +- The graphics board is unable to detect any EDID data. +- The graphics board incorrectly forwards EDID data to the driver. +- The monitor sends no or bogus EDID data. +- A KVM sends its own EDID data instead of querying the connected monitor. +Adding the kernel parameter "nomodeset" helps in most cases, but causes +restrictions later on. + +As a remedy for such situations, the kernel configuration item +CONFIG_DRM_LOAD_EDID_FIRMWARE was introduced. It allows to provide an +individually prepared or corrected EDID data set in the /lib/firmware +directory from where it is loaded via the firmware interface. The code +(see drivers/gpu/drm/drm_edid_load.c) contains built-in data sets for +commonly used screen resolutions (800x600, 1024x768, 1280x1024, 1600x1200, +1680x1050, 1920x1080) as binary blobs, but the kernel source tree does +not contain code to create these data. In order to elucidate the origin +of the built-in binary EDID blobs and to facilitate the creation of +individual data for a specific misbehaving monitor, commented sources +and a Makefile environment are given here. + +To create binary EDID and C source code files from the existing data +material, simply type "make". + +If you want to create your own EDID file, copy the file 1024x768.S, +replace the settings with your own data and add a new target to the +Makefile. Please note that the EDID data structure expects the timing +values in a different way as compared to the standard X11 format. + +X11: + HTimings: + hdisp hsyncstart hsyncend htotal + VTimings: + vdisp vsyncstart vsyncend vtotal + +EDID:: + + #define XPIX hdisp + #define XBLANK htotal-hdisp + #define XOFFSET hsyncstart-hdisp + #define XPULSE hsyncend-hsyncstart + + #define YPIX vdisp + #define YBLANK vtotal-vdisp + #define YOFFSET vsyncstart-vdisp + #define YPULSE vsyncend-vsyncstart diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/eisa.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/eisa.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c07565ba57da --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/eisa.rst @@ -0,0 +1,230 @@ +================ +EISA bus support +================ + +:Author: Marc Zyngier <maz@wild-wind.fr.eu.org> + +This document groups random notes about porting EISA drivers to the +new EISA/sysfs API. + +Starting from version 2.5.59, the EISA bus is almost given the same +status as other much more mainstream busses such as PCI or USB. This +has been possible through sysfs, which defines a nice enough set of +abstractions to manage busses, devices and drivers. + +Although the new API is quite simple to use, converting existing +drivers to the new infrastructure is not an easy task (mostly because +detection code is generally also used to probe ISA cards). Moreover, +most EISA drivers are among the oldest Linux drivers so, as you can +imagine, some dust has settled here over the years. + +The EISA infrastructure is made up of three parts: + + - The bus code implements most of the generic code. It is shared + among all the architectures that the EISA code runs on. It + implements bus probing (detecting EISA cards available on the bus), + allocates I/O resources, allows fancy naming through sysfs, and + offers interfaces for driver to register. + + - The bus root driver implements the glue between the bus hardware + and the generic bus code. It is responsible for discovering the + device implementing the bus, and setting it up to be latter probed + by the bus code. This can go from something as simple as reserving + an I/O region on x86, to the rather more complex, like the hppa + EISA code. This is the part to implement in order to have EISA + running on an "new" platform. + + - The driver offers the bus a list of devices that it manages, and + implements the necessary callbacks to probe and release devices + whenever told to. + +Every function/structure below lives in <linux/eisa.h>, which depends +heavily on <linux/device.h>. + +Bus root driver +=============== + +:: + + int eisa_root_register (struct eisa_root_device *root); + +The eisa_root_register function is used to declare a device as the +root of an EISA bus. The eisa_root_device structure holds a reference +to this device, as well as some parameters for probing purposes:: + + struct eisa_root_device { + struct device *dev; /* Pointer to bridge device */ + struct resource *res; + unsigned long bus_base_addr; + int slots; /* Max slot number */ + int force_probe; /* Probe even when no slot 0 */ + u64 dma_mask; /* from bridge device */ + int bus_nr; /* Set by eisa_root_register */ + struct resource eisa_root_res; /* ditto */ + }; + +============= ====================================================== +node used for eisa_root_register internal purpose +dev pointer to the root device +res root device I/O resource +bus_base_addr slot 0 address on this bus +slots max slot number to probe +force_probe Probe even when slot 0 is empty (no EISA mainboard) +dma_mask Default DMA mask. Usually the bridge device dma_mask. +bus_nr unique bus id, set by eisa_root_register +============= ====================================================== + +Driver +====== + +:: + + int eisa_driver_register (struct eisa_driver *edrv); + void eisa_driver_unregister (struct eisa_driver *edrv); + +Clear enough ? + +:: + + struct eisa_device_id { + char sig[EISA_SIG_LEN]; + unsigned long driver_data; + }; + + struct eisa_driver { + const struct eisa_device_id *id_table; + struct device_driver driver; + }; + +=============== ==================================================== +id_table an array of NULL terminated EISA id strings, + followed by an empty string. Each string can + optionally be paired with a driver-dependent value + (driver_data). + +driver a generic driver, such as described in + Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/driver.rst. Only .name, + .probe and .remove members are mandatory. +=============== ==================================================== + +An example is the 3c59x driver:: + + static struct eisa_device_id vortex_eisa_ids[] = { + { "TCM5920", EISA_3C592_OFFSET }, + { "TCM5970", EISA_3C597_OFFSET }, + { "" } + }; + + static struct eisa_driver vortex_eisa_driver = { + .id_table = vortex_eisa_ids, + .driver = { + .name = "3c59x", + .probe = vortex_eisa_probe, + .remove = vortex_eisa_remove + } + }; + +Device +====== + +The sysfs framework calls .probe and .remove functions upon device +discovery and removal (note that the .remove function is only called +when driver is built as a module). + +Both functions are passed a pointer to a 'struct device', which is +encapsulated in a 'struct eisa_device' described as follows:: + + struct eisa_device { + struct eisa_device_id id; + int slot; + int state; + unsigned long base_addr; + struct resource res[EISA_MAX_RESOURCES]; + u64 dma_mask; + struct device dev; /* generic device */ + }; + +======== ============================================================ +id EISA id, as read from device. id.driver_data is set from the + matching driver EISA id. +slot slot number which the device was detected on +state set of flags indicating the state of the device. Current + flags are EISA_CONFIG_ENABLED and EISA_CONFIG_FORCED. +res set of four 256 bytes I/O regions allocated to this device +dma_mask DMA mask set from the parent device. +dev generic device (see Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/device.rst) +======== ============================================================ + +You can get the 'struct eisa_device' from 'struct device' using the +'to_eisa_device' macro. + +Misc stuff +========== + +:: + + void eisa_set_drvdata (struct eisa_device *edev, void *data); + +Stores data into the device's driver_data area. + +:: + + void *eisa_get_drvdata (struct eisa_device *edev): + +Gets the pointer previously stored into the device's driver_data area. + +:: + + int eisa_get_region_index (void *addr); + +Returns the region number (0 <= x < EISA_MAX_RESOURCES) of a given +address. + +Kernel parameters +================= + +eisa_bus.enable_dev + A comma-separated list of slots to be enabled, even if the firmware + set the card as disabled. The driver must be able to properly + initialize the device in such conditions. + +eisa_bus.disable_dev + A comma-separated list of slots to be enabled, even if the firmware + set the card as enabled. The driver won't be called to handle this + device. + +virtual_root.force_probe + Force the probing code to probe EISA slots even when it cannot find an + EISA compliant mainboard (nothing appears on slot 0). Defaults to 0 + (don't force), and set to 1 (force probing) when either + CONFIG_ALPHA_JENSEN or CONFIG_EISA_VLB_PRIMING are set. + +Random notes +============ + +Converting an EISA driver to the new API mostly involves *deleting* +code (since probing is now in the core EISA code). Unfortunately, most +drivers share their probing routine between ISA, and EISA. Special +care must be taken when ripping out the EISA code, so other busses +won't suffer from these surgical strikes... + +You *must not* expect any EISA device to be detected when returning +from eisa_driver_register, since the chances are that the bus has not +yet been probed. In fact, that's what happens most of the time (the +bus root driver usually kicks in rather late in the boot process). +Unfortunately, most drivers are doing the probing by themselves, and +expect to have explored the whole machine when they exit their probe +routine. + +For example, switching your favorite EISA SCSI card to the "hotplug" +model is "the right thing"(tm). + +Thanks +====== + +I'd like to thank the following people for their help: + +- Xavier Benigni for lending me a wonderful Alpha Jensen, +- James Bottomley, Jeff Garzik for getting this stuff into the kernel, +- Andries Brouwer for contributing numerous EISA ids, +- Catrin Jones for coping with far too many machines at home. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst index 349f2dc33029..921c71a3d683 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ symbol: will pass the struct gpio_chip* for the chip to all IRQ callbacks, so the callbacks need to embed the gpio_chip in its state container and obtain a pointer to the container using container_of(). - (See Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.rst) + (See Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/design-patterns.rst) - gpiochip_irqchip_add_nested(): adds a nested cascaded irqchip to a gpiochip, as discussed above regarding different types of cascaded irqchips. The diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/index.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/index.rst index 6cd750a03ea0..d12a80f386a6 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/index.rst @@ -14,8 +14,10 @@ available subsections can be seen below. .. toctree:: :maxdepth: 2 + driver-model/index basics infrastructure + early-userspace/index pm/index clk device-io @@ -36,6 +38,7 @@ available subsections can be seen below. i2c ipmb i3c/index + interconnect hsi edac scsi @@ -44,8 +47,11 @@ available subsections can be seen below. mtdnand miscellaneous mei/index + mtd/index + mmc/index + nvdimm/index w1 - rapidio + rapidio/index s390-drivers vme 80211/index @@ -53,13 +59,48 @@ available subsections can be seen below. firmware/index pinctl gpio/index + md/index misc_devices + nfc/index dmaengine/index slimbus soundwire/index fpga/index acpi/index + backlight/lp855x-driver.rst + bt8xxgpio + connector + console + dcdbas + dell_rbu + edid + eisa + isa + isapnp generic-counter + lightnvm-pblk + memory-devices/index + men-chameleon-bus + ntb + nvmem + parport-lowlevel + pps + ptp + phy/index + pti_intel_mid + pwm + rfkill + serial/index + sgi-ioc4 + sm501 + smsc_ece1099 + switchtec + sync_file + vfio-mediated-device + vfio + xilinx/index + xillybus + zorro .. only:: subproject and html diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/interconnect.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/interconnect.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c3e004893796 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/interconnect.rst @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +===================================== +GENERIC SYSTEM INTERCONNECT SUBSYSTEM +===================================== + +Introduction +------------ + +This framework is designed to provide a standard kernel interface to control +the settings of the interconnects on an SoC. These settings can be throughput, +latency and priority between multiple interconnected devices or functional +blocks. This can be controlled dynamically in order to save power or provide +maximum performance. + +The interconnect bus is hardware with configurable parameters, which can be +set on a data path according to the requests received from various drivers. +An example of interconnect buses are the interconnects between various +components or functional blocks in chipsets. There can be multiple interconnects +on an SoC that can be multi-tiered. + +Below is a simplified diagram of a real-world SoC interconnect bus topology. + +:: + + +----------------+ +----------------+ + | HW Accelerator |--->| M NoC |<---------------+ + +----------------+ +----------------+ | + | | +------------+ + +-----+ +-------------+ V +------+ | | + | DDR | | +--------+ | PCIe | | | + +-----+ | | Slaves | +------+ | | + ^ ^ | +--------+ | | C NoC | + | | V V | | + +------------------+ +------------------------+ | | +-----+ + | |-->| |-->| |-->| CPU | + | |-->| |<--| | +-----+ + | Mem NoC | | S NoC | +------------+ + | |<--| |---------+ | + | |<--| |<------+ | | +--------+ + +------------------+ +------------------------+ | | +-->| Slaves | + ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ | | +--------+ + | | | | | | V + +------+ | +-----+ +-----+ +---------+ +----------------+ +--------+ + | CPUs | | | GPU | | DSP | | Masters |-->| P NoC |-->| Slaves | + +------+ | +-----+ +-----+ +---------+ +----------------+ +--------+ + | + +-------+ + | Modem | + +-------+ + +Terminology +----------- + +Interconnect provider is the software definition of the interconnect hardware. +The interconnect providers on the above diagram are M NoC, S NoC, C NoC, P NoC +and Mem NoC. + +Interconnect node is the software definition of the interconnect hardware +port. Each interconnect provider consists of multiple interconnect nodes, +which are connected to other SoC components including other interconnect +providers. The point on the diagram where the CPUs connect to the memory is +called an interconnect node, which belongs to the Mem NoC interconnect provider. + +Interconnect endpoints are the first or the last element of the path. Every +endpoint is a node, but not every node is an endpoint. + +Interconnect path is everything between two endpoints including all the nodes +that have to be traversed to reach from a source to destination node. It may +include multiple master-slave pairs across several interconnect providers. + +Interconnect consumers are the entities which make use of the data paths exposed +by the providers. The consumers send requests to providers requesting various +throughput, latency and priority. Usually the consumers are device drivers, that +send request based on their needs. An example for a consumer is a video decoder +that supports various formats and image sizes. + +Interconnect providers +---------------------- + +Interconnect provider is an entity that implements methods to initialize and +configure interconnect bus hardware. The interconnect provider drivers should +be registered with the interconnect provider core. + +.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/interconnect-provider.h + +Interconnect consumers +---------------------- + +Interconnect consumers are the clients which use the interconnect APIs to +get paths between endpoints and set their bandwidth/latency/QoS requirements +for these interconnect paths. These interfaces are not currently +documented. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/isa.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/isa.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..def4a7b690b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/isa.rst @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ +=========== +ISA Drivers +=========== + +The following text is adapted from the commit message of the initial +commit of the ISA bus driver authored by Rene Herman. + +During the recent "isa drivers using platform devices" discussion it was +pointed out that (ALSA) ISA drivers ran into the problem of not having +the option to fail driver load (device registration rather) upon not +finding their hardware due to a probe() error not being passed up +through the driver model. In the course of that, I suggested a separate +ISA bus might be best; Russell King agreed and suggested this bus could +use the .match() method for the actual device discovery. + +The attached does this. For this old non (generically) discoverable ISA +hardware only the driver itself can do discovery so as a difference with +the platform_bus, this isa_bus also distributes match() up to the +driver. + +As another difference: these devices only exist in the driver model due +to the driver creating them because it might want to drive them, meaning +that all device creation has been made internal as well. + +The usage model this provides is nice, and has been acked from the ALSA +side by Takashi Iwai and Jaroslav Kysela. The ALSA driver module_init's +now (for oldisa-only drivers) become:: + + static int __init alsa_card_foo_init(void) + { + return isa_register_driver(&snd_foo_isa_driver, SNDRV_CARDS); + } + + static void __exit alsa_card_foo_exit(void) + { + isa_unregister_driver(&snd_foo_isa_driver); + } + +Quite like the other bus models therefore. This removes a lot of +duplicated init code from the ALSA ISA drivers. + +The passed in isa_driver struct is the regular driver struct embedding a +struct device_driver, the normal probe/remove/shutdown/suspend/resume +callbacks, and as indicated that .match callback. + +The "SNDRV_CARDS" you see being passed in is a "unsigned int ndev" +parameter, indicating how many devices to create and call our methods +with. + +The platform_driver callbacks are called with a platform_device param; +the isa_driver callbacks are being called with a ``struct device *dev, +unsigned int id`` pair directly -- with the device creation completely +internal to the bus it's much cleaner to not leak isa_dev's by passing +them in at all. The id is the only thing we ever want other then the +struct device anyways, and it makes for nicer code in the callbacks as +well. + +With this additional .match() callback ISA drivers have all options. If +ALSA would want to keep the old non-load behaviour, it could stick all +of the old .probe in .match, which would only keep them registered after +everything was found to be present and accounted for. If it wanted the +behaviour of always loading as it inadvertently did for a bit after the +changeover to platform devices, it could just not provide a .match() and +do everything in .probe() as before. + +If it, as Takashi Iwai already suggested earlier as a way of following +the model from saner buses more closely, wants to load when a later bind +could conceivably succeed, it could use .match() for the prerequisites +(such as checking the user wants the card enabled and that port/irq/dma +values have been passed in) and .probe() for everything else. This is +the nicest model. + +To the code... + +This exports only two functions; isa_{,un}register_driver(). + +isa_register_driver() register's the struct device_driver, and then +loops over the passed in ndev creating devices and registering them. +This causes the bus match method to be called for them, which is:: + + int isa_bus_match(struct device *dev, struct device_driver *driver) + { + struct isa_driver *isa_driver = to_isa_driver(driver); + + if (dev->platform_data == isa_driver) { + if (!isa_driver->match || + isa_driver->match(dev, to_isa_dev(dev)->id)) + return 1; + dev->platform_data = NULL; + } + return 0; + } + +The first thing this does is check if this device is in fact one of this +driver's devices by seeing if the device's platform_data pointer is set +to this driver. Platform devices compare strings, but we don't need to +do that with everything being internal, so isa_register_driver() abuses +dev->platform_data as a isa_driver pointer which we can then check here. +I believe platform_data is available for this, but if rather not, moving +the isa_driver pointer to the private struct isa_dev is ofcourse fine as +well. + +Then, if the the driver did not provide a .match, it matches. If it did, +the driver match() method is called to determine a match. + +If it did **not** match, dev->platform_data is reset to indicate this to +isa_register_driver which can then unregister the device again. + +If during all this, there's any error, or no devices matched at all +everything is backed out again and the error, or -ENODEV, is returned. + +isa_unregister_driver() just unregisters the matched devices and the +driver itself. + +module_isa_driver is a helper macro for ISA drivers which do not do +anything special in module init/exit. This eliminates a lot of +boilerplate code. Each module may only use this macro once, and calling +it replaces module_init and module_exit. + +max_num_isa_dev is a macro to determine the maximum possible number of +ISA devices which may be registered in the I/O port address space given +the address extent of the ISA devices. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/isapnp.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/isapnp.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8d0840ac847b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/isapnp.rst @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +========================================================== +ISA Plug & Play support by Jaroslav Kysela <perex@suse.cz> +========================================================== + +Interface /proc/isapnp +====================== + +The interface has been removed. See pnp.txt for more details. + +Interface /proc/bus/isapnp +========================== + +This directory allows access to ISA PnP cards and logical devices. +The regular files contain the contents of ISA PnP registers for +a logical device. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/lightnvm-pblk.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/lightnvm-pblk.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1040ed1cec81 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/lightnvm-pblk.rst @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +pblk: Physical Block Device Target +================================== + +pblk implements a fully associative, host-based FTL that exposes a traditional +block I/O interface. Its primary responsibilities are: + + - Map logical addresses onto physical addresses (4KB granularity) in a + logical-to-physical (L2P) table. + - Maintain the integrity and consistency of the L2P table as well as its + recovery from normal tear down and power outage. + - Deal with controller- and media-specific constrains. + - Handle I/O errors. + - Implement garbage collection. + - Maintain consistency across the I/O stack during synchronization points. + +For more information please refer to: + + http://lightnvm.io + +which maintains updated FAQs, manual pages, technical documentation, tools, +contacts, etc. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/md/index.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/md/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..18f54a7d7d6e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/md/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +==== +RAID +==== + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 1 + + md-cluster + raid5-cache + raid5-ppl diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/md/md-cluster.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/md/md-cluster.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..96eb52cec7eb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/md/md-cluster.rst @@ -0,0 +1,385 @@ +========== +MD Cluster +========== + +The cluster MD is a shared-device RAID for a cluster, it supports +two levels: raid1 and raid10 (limited support). + + +1. On-disk format +================= + +Separate write-intent-bitmaps are used for each cluster node. +The bitmaps record all writes that may have been started on that node, +and may not yet have finished. The on-disk layout is:: + + 0 4k 8k 12k + ------------------------------------------------------------------- + | idle | md super | bm super [0] + bits | + | bm bits[0, contd] | bm super[1] + bits | bm bits[1, contd] | + | bm super[2] + bits | bm bits [2, contd] | bm super[3] + bits | + | bm bits [3, contd] | | | + +During "normal" functioning we assume the filesystem ensures that only +one node writes to any given block at a time, so a write request will + + - set the appropriate bit (if not already set) + - commit the write to all mirrors + - schedule the bit to be cleared after a timeout. + +Reads are just handled normally. It is up to the filesystem to ensure +one node doesn't read from a location where another node (or the same +node) is writing. + + +2. DLM Locks for management +=========================== + +There are three groups of locks for managing the device: + +2.1 Bitmap lock resource (bm_lockres) +------------------------------------- + + The bm_lockres protects individual node bitmaps. They are named in + the form bitmap000 for node 1, bitmap001 for node 2 and so on. When a + node joins the cluster, it acquires the lock in PW mode and it stays + so during the lifetime the node is part of the cluster. The lock + resource number is based on the slot number returned by the DLM + subsystem. Since DLM starts node count from one and bitmap slots + start from zero, one is subtracted from the DLM slot number to arrive + at the bitmap slot number. + + The LVB of the bitmap lock for a particular node records the range + of sectors that are being re-synced by that node. No other + node may write to those sectors. This is used when a new nodes + joins the cluster. + +2.2 Message passing locks +------------------------- + + Each node has to communicate with other nodes when starting or ending + resync, and for metadata superblock updates. This communication is + managed through three locks: "token", "message", and "ack", together + with the Lock Value Block (LVB) of one of the "message" lock. + +2.3 new-device management +------------------------- + + A single lock: "no-new-dev" is used to co-ordinate the addition of + new devices - this must be synchronized across the array. + Normally all nodes hold a concurrent-read lock on this device. + +3. Communication +================ + + Messages can be broadcast to all nodes, and the sender waits for all + other nodes to acknowledge the message before proceeding. Only one + message can be processed at a time. + +3.1 Message Types +----------------- + + There are six types of messages which are passed: + +3.1.1 METADATA_UPDATED +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + + informs other nodes that the metadata has + been updated, and the node must re-read the md superblock. This is + performed synchronously. It is primarily used to signal device + failure. + +3.1.2 RESYNCING +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + informs other nodes that a resync is initiated or + ended so that each node may suspend or resume the region. Each + RESYNCING message identifies a range of the devices that the + sending node is about to resync. This overrides any previous + notification from that node: only one ranged can be resynced at a + time per-node. + +3.1.3 NEWDISK +^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + + informs other nodes that a device is being added to + the array. Message contains an identifier for that device. See + below for further details. + +3.1.4 REMOVE +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + + A failed or spare device is being removed from the + array. The slot-number of the device is included in the message. + + 3.1.5 RE_ADD: + + A failed device is being re-activated - the assumption + is that it has been determined to be working again. + + 3.1.6 BITMAP_NEEDS_SYNC: + + If a node is stopped locally but the bitmap + isn't clean, then another node is informed to take the ownership of + resync. + +3.2 Communication mechanism +--------------------------- + + The DLM LVB is used to communicate within nodes of the cluster. There + are three resources used for the purpose: + +3.2.1 token +^^^^^^^^^^^ + The resource which protects the entire communication + system. The node having the token resource is allowed to + communicate. + +3.2.2 message +^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + The lock resource which carries the data to communicate. + +3.2.3 ack +^^^^^^^^^ + + The resource, acquiring which means the message has been + acknowledged by all nodes in the cluster. The BAST of the resource + is used to inform the receiving node that a node wants to + communicate. + +The algorithm is: + + 1. receive status - all nodes have concurrent-reader lock on "ack":: + + sender receiver receiver + "ack":CR "ack":CR "ack":CR + + 2. sender get EX on "token", + sender get EX on "message":: + + sender receiver receiver + "token":EX "ack":CR "ack":CR + "message":EX + "ack":CR + + Sender checks that it still needs to send a message. Messages + received or other events that happened while waiting for the + "token" may have made this message inappropriate or redundant. + + 3. sender writes LVB + + sender down-convert "message" from EX to CW + + sender try to get EX of "ack" + + :: + + [ wait until all receivers have *processed* the "message" ] + + [ triggered by bast of "ack" ] + receiver get CR on "message" + receiver read LVB + receiver processes the message + [ wait finish ] + receiver releases "ack" + receiver tries to get PR on "message" + + sender receiver receiver + "token":EX "message":CR "message":CR + "message":CW + "ack":EX + + 4. triggered by grant of EX on "ack" (indicating all receivers + have processed message) + + sender down-converts "ack" from EX to CR + + sender releases "message" + + sender releases "token" + + :: + + receiver upconvert to PR on "message" + receiver get CR of "ack" + receiver release "message" + + sender receiver receiver + "ack":CR "ack":CR "ack":CR + + +4. Handling Failures +==================== + +4.1 Node Failure +---------------- + + When a node fails, the DLM informs the cluster with the slot + number. The node starts a cluster recovery thread. The cluster + recovery thread: + + - acquires the bitmap<number> lock of the failed node + - opens the bitmap + - reads the bitmap of the failed node + - copies the set bitmap to local node + - cleans the bitmap of the failed node + - releases bitmap<number> lock of the failed node + - initiates resync of the bitmap on the current node + md_check_recovery is invoked within recover_bitmaps, + then md_check_recovery -> metadata_update_start/finish, + it will lock the communication by lock_comm. + Which means when one node is resyncing it blocks all + other nodes from writing anywhere on the array. + + The resync process is the regular md resync. However, in a clustered + environment when a resync is performed, it needs to tell other nodes + of the areas which are suspended. Before a resync starts, the node + send out RESYNCING with the (lo,hi) range of the area which needs to + be suspended. Each node maintains a suspend_list, which contains the + list of ranges which are currently suspended. On receiving RESYNCING, + the node adds the range to the suspend_list. Similarly, when the node + performing resync finishes, it sends RESYNCING with an empty range to + other nodes and other nodes remove the corresponding entry from the + suspend_list. + + A helper function, ->area_resyncing() can be used to check if a + particular I/O range should be suspended or not. + +4.2 Device Failure +================== + + Device failures are handled and communicated with the metadata update + routine. When a node detects a device failure it does not allow + any further writes to that device until the failure has been + acknowledged by all other nodes. + +5. Adding a new Device +---------------------- + + For adding a new device, it is necessary that all nodes "see" the new + device to be added. For this, the following algorithm is used: + + 1. Node 1 issues mdadm --manage /dev/mdX --add /dev/sdYY which issues + ioctl(ADD_NEW_DISK with disc.state set to MD_DISK_CLUSTER_ADD) + 2. Node 1 sends a NEWDISK message with uuid and slot number + 3. Other nodes issue kobject_uevent_env with uuid and slot number + (Steps 4,5 could be a udev rule) + 4. In userspace, the node searches for the disk, perhaps + using blkid -t SUB_UUID="" + 5. Other nodes issue either of the following depending on whether + the disk was found: + ioctl(ADD_NEW_DISK with disc.state set to MD_DISK_CANDIDATE and + disc.number set to slot number) + ioctl(CLUSTERED_DISK_NACK) + 6. Other nodes drop lock on "no-new-devs" (CR) if device is found + 7. Node 1 attempts EX lock on "no-new-dev" + 8. If node 1 gets the lock, it sends METADATA_UPDATED after + unmarking the disk as SpareLocal + 9. If not (get "no-new-dev" lock), it fails the operation and sends + METADATA_UPDATED. + 10. Other nodes get the information whether a disk is added or not + by the following METADATA_UPDATED. + +6. Module interface +=================== + + There are 17 call-backs which the md core can make to the cluster + module. Understanding these can give a good overview of the whole + process. + +6.1 join(nodes) and leave() +--------------------------- + + These are called when an array is started with a clustered bitmap, + and when the array is stopped. join() ensures the cluster is + available and initializes the various resources. + Only the first 'nodes' nodes in the cluster can use the array. + +6.2 slot_number() +----------------- + + Reports the slot number advised by the cluster infrastructure. + Range is from 0 to nodes-1. + +6.3 resync_info_update() +------------------------ + + This updates the resync range that is stored in the bitmap lock. + The starting point is updated as the resync progresses. The + end point is always the end of the array. + It does *not* send a RESYNCING message. + +6.4 resync_start(), resync_finish() +----------------------------------- + + These are called when resync/recovery/reshape starts or stops. + They update the resyncing range in the bitmap lock and also + send a RESYNCING message. resync_start reports the whole + array as resyncing, resync_finish reports none of it. + + resync_finish() also sends a BITMAP_NEEDS_SYNC message which + allows some other node to take over. + +6.5 metadata_update_start(), metadata_update_finish(), metadata_update_cancel() +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + metadata_update_start is used to get exclusive access to + the metadata. If a change is still needed once that access is + gained, metadata_update_finish() will send a METADATA_UPDATE + message to all other nodes, otherwise metadata_update_cancel() + can be used to release the lock. + +6.6 area_resyncing() +-------------------- + + This combines two elements of functionality. + + Firstly, it will check if any node is currently resyncing + anything in a given range of sectors. If any resync is found, + then the caller will avoid writing or read-balancing in that + range. + + Secondly, while node recovery is happening it reports that + all areas are resyncing for READ requests. This avoids races + between the cluster-filesystem and the cluster-RAID handling + a node failure. + +6.7 add_new_disk_start(), add_new_disk_finish(), new_disk_ack() +--------------------------------------------------------------- + + These are used to manage the new-disk protocol described above. + When a new device is added, add_new_disk_start() is called before + it is bound to the array and, if that succeeds, add_new_disk_finish() + is called the device is fully added. + + When a device is added in acknowledgement to a previous + request, or when the device is declared "unavailable", + new_disk_ack() is called. + +6.8 remove_disk() +----------------- + + This is called when a spare or failed device is removed from + the array. It causes a REMOVE message to be send to other nodes. + +6.9 gather_bitmaps() +-------------------- + + This sends a RE_ADD message to all other nodes and then + gathers bitmap information from all bitmaps. This combined + bitmap is then used to recovery the re-added device. + +6.10 lock_all_bitmaps() and unlock_all_bitmaps() +------------------------------------------------ + + These are called when change bitmap to none. If a node plans + to clear the cluster raid's bitmap, it need to make sure no other + nodes are using the raid which is achieved by lock all bitmap + locks within the cluster, and also those locks are unlocked + accordingly. + +7. Unsupported features +======================= + +There are somethings which are not supported by cluster MD yet. + +- change array_sectors. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/md/raid5-cache.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/md/raid5-cache.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d7a15f44a7c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/md/raid5-cache.rst @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +================ +RAID 4/5/6 cache +================ + +Raid 4/5/6 could include an extra disk for data cache besides normal RAID +disks. The role of RAID disks isn't changed with the cache disk. The cache disk +caches data to the RAID disks. The cache can be in write-through (supported +since 4.4) or write-back mode (supported since 4.10). mdadm (supported since +3.4) has a new option '--write-journal' to create array with cache. Please +refer to mdadm manual for details. By default (RAID array starts), the cache is +in write-through mode. A user can switch it to write-back mode by:: + + echo "write-back" > /sys/block/md0/md/journal_mode + +And switch it back to write-through mode by:: + + echo "write-through" > /sys/block/md0/md/journal_mode + +In both modes, all writes to the array will hit cache disk first. This means +the cache disk must be fast and sustainable. + +write-through mode +================== + +This mode mainly fixes the 'write hole' issue. For RAID 4/5/6 array, an unclean +shutdown can cause data in some stripes to not be in consistent state, eg, data +and parity don't match. The reason is that a stripe write involves several RAID +disks and it's possible the writes don't hit all RAID disks yet before the +unclean shutdown. We call an array degraded if it has inconsistent data. MD +tries to resync the array to bring it back to normal state. But before the +resync completes, any system crash will expose the chance of real data +corruption in the RAID array. This problem is called 'write hole'. + +The write-through cache will cache all data on cache disk first. After the data +is safe on the cache disk, the data will be flushed onto RAID disks. The +two-step write will guarantee MD can recover correct data after unclean +shutdown even the array is degraded. Thus the cache can close the 'write hole'. + +In write-through mode, MD reports IO completion to upper layer (usually +filesystems) after the data is safe on RAID disks, so cache disk failure +doesn't cause data loss. Of course cache disk failure means the array is +exposed to 'write hole' again. + +In write-through mode, the cache disk isn't required to be big. Several +hundreds megabytes are enough. + +write-back mode +=============== + +write-back mode fixes the 'write hole' issue too, since all write data is +cached on cache disk. But the main goal of 'write-back' cache is to speed up +write. If a write crosses all RAID disks of a stripe, we call it full-stripe +write. For non-full-stripe writes, MD must read old data before the new parity +can be calculated. These synchronous reads hurt write throughput. Some writes +which are sequential but not dispatched in the same time will suffer from this +overhead too. Write-back cache will aggregate the data and flush the data to +RAID disks only after the data becomes a full stripe write. This will +completely avoid the overhead, so it's very helpful for some workloads. A +typical workload which does sequential write followed by fsync is an example. + +In write-back mode, MD reports IO completion to upper layer (usually +filesystems) right after the data hits cache disk. The data is flushed to raid +disks later after specific conditions met. So cache disk failure will cause +data loss. + +In write-back mode, MD also caches data in memory. The memory cache includes +the same data stored on cache disk, so a power loss doesn't cause data loss. +The memory cache size has performance impact for the array. It's recommended +the size is big. A user can configure the size by:: + + echo "2048" > /sys/block/md0/md/stripe_cache_size + +Too small cache disk will make the write aggregation less efficient in this +mode depending on the workloads. It's recommended to use a cache disk with at +least several gigabytes size in write-back mode. + +The implementation +================== + +The write-through and write-back cache use the same disk format. The cache disk +is organized as a simple write log. The log consists of 'meta data' and 'data' +pairs. The meta data describes the data. It also includes checksum and sequence +ID for recovery identification. Data can be IO data and parity data. Data is +checksumed too. The checksum is stored in the meta data ahead of the data. The +checksum is an optimization because MD can write meta and data freely without +worry about the order. MD superblock has a field pointed to the valid meta data +of log head. + +The log implementation is pretty straightforward. The difficult part is the +order in which MD writes data to cache disk and RAID disks. Specifically, in +write-through mode, MD calculates parity for IO data, writes both IO data and +parity to the log, writes the data and parity to RAID disks after the data and +parity is settled down in log and finally the IO is finished. Read just reads +from raid disks as usual. + +In write-back mode, MD writes IO data to the log and reports IO completion. The +data is also fully cached in memory at that time, which means read must query +memory cache. If some conditions are met, MD will flush the data to RAID disks. +MD will calculate parity for the data and write parity into the log. After this +is finished, MD will write both data and parity into RAID disks, then MD can +release the memory cache. The flush conditions could be stripe becomes a full +stripe write, free cache disk space is low or free in-kernel memory cache space +is low. + +After an unclean shutdown, MD does recovery. MD reads all meta data and data +from the log. The sequence ID and checksum will help us detect corrupted meta +data and data. If MD finds a stripe with data and valid parities (1 parity for +raid4/5 and 2 for raid6), MD will write the data and parities to RAID disks. If +parities are incompleted, they are discarded. If part of data is corrupted, +they are discarded too. MD then loads valid data and writes them to RAID disks +in normal way. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/md/raid5-ppl.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/md/raid5-ppl.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..357e5515bc55 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/md/raid5-ppl.rst @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +================== +Partial Parity Log +================== + +Partial Parity Log (PPL) is a feature available for RAID5 arrays. The issue +addressed by PPL is that after a dirty shutdown, parity of a particular stripe +may become inconsistent with data on other member disks. If the array is also +in degraded state, there is no way to recalculate parity, because one of the +disks is missing. This can lead to silent data corruption when rebuilding the +array or using it is as degraded - data calculated from parity for array blocks +that have not been touched by a write request during the unclean shutdown can +be incorrect. Such condition is known as the RAID5 Write Hole. Because of +this, md by default does not allow starting a dirty degraded array. + +Partial parity for a write operation is the XOR of stripe data chunks not +modified by this write. It is just enough data needed for recovering from the +write hole. XORing partial parity with the modified chunks produces parity for +the stripe, consistent with its state before the write operation, regardless of +which chunk writes have completed. If one of the not modified data disks of +this stripe is missing, this updated parity can be used to recover its +contents. PPL recovery is also performed when starting an array after an +unclean shutdown and all disks are available, eliminating the need to resync +the array. Because of this, using write-intent bitmap and PPL together is not +supported. + +When handling a write request PPL writes partial parity before new data and +parity are dispatched to disks. PPL is a distributed log - it is stored on +array member drives in the metadata area, on the parity drive of a particular +stripe. It does not require a dedicated journaling drive. Write performance is +reduced by up to 30%-40% but it scales with the number of drives in the array +and the journaling drive does not become a bottleneck or a single point of +failure. + +Unlike raid5-cache, the other solution in md for closing the write hole, PPL is +not a true journal. It does not protect from losing in-flight data, only from +silent data corruption. If a dirty disk of a stripe is lost, no PPL recovery is +performed for this stripe (parity is not updated). So it is possible to have +arbitrary data in the written part of a stripe if that disk is lost. In such +case the behavior is the same as in plain raid5. + +PPL is available for md version-1 metadata and external (specifically IMSM) +metadata arrays. It can be enabled using mdadm option --consistency-policy=ppl. + +There is a limitation of maximum 64 disks in the array for PPL. It allows to +keep data structures and implementation simple. RAID5 arrays with so many disks +are not likely due to high risk of multiple disks failure. Such restriction +should not be a real life limitation. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/memory-devices/index.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/memory-devices/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..28101458cda5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/memory-devices/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +========================= +Memory Controller drivers +========================= + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 1 + + ti-emif + ti-gpmc + +.. only:: subproject and html + + Indices + ======= + + * :ref:`genindex` diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/memory-devices/ti-emif.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/memory-devices/ti-emif.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..dea2ad9bcd7e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/memory-devices/ti-emif.rst @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +=============================== +TI EMIF SDRAM Controller Driver +=============================== + +Author +====== +Aneesh V <aneesh@ti.com> + +Location +======== +driver/memory/emif.c + +Supported SoCs: +=============== +TI OMAP44xx +TI OMAP54xx + +Menuconfig option: +================== +Device Drivers + Memory devices + Texas Instruments EMIF driver + +Description +=========== +This driver is for the EMIF module available in Texas Instruments +SoCs. EMIF is an SDRAM controller that, based on its revision, +supports one or more of DDR2, DDR3, and LPDDR2 SDRAM protocols. +This driver takes care of only LPDDR2 memories presently. The +functions of the driver includes re-configuring AC timing +parameters and other settings during frequency, voltage and +temperature changes + +Platform Data (see include/linux/platform_data/emif_plat.h) +=========================================================== +DDR device details and other board dependent and SoC dependent +information can be passed through platform data (struct emif_platform_data) + +- DDR device details: 'struct ddr_device_info' +- Device AC timings: 'struct lpddr2_timings' and 'struct lpddr2_min_tck' +- Custom configurations: customizable policy options through + 'struct emif_custom_configs' +- IP revision +- PHY type + +Interface to the external world +=============================== +EMIF driver registers notifiers for voltage and frequency changes +affecting EMIF and takes appropriate actions when these are invoked. + +- freq_pre_notify_handling() +- freq_post_notify_handling() +- volt_notify_handling() + +Debugfs +======= +The driver creates two debugfs entries per device. + +- regcache_dump : dump of register values calculated and saved for all + frequencies used so far. +- mr4 : last polled value of MR4 register in the LPDDR2 device. MR4 + indicates the current temperature level of the device. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/memory-devices/ti-gpmc.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/memory-devices/ti-gpmc.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..33efcb81f080 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/memory-devices/ti-gpmc.rst @@ -0,0 +1,179 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +======================================== +GPMC (General Purpose Memory Controller) +======================================== + +GPMC is an unified memory controller dedicated to interfacing external +memory devices like + + * Asynchronous SRAM like memories and application specific integrated + circuit devices. + * Asynchronous, synchronous, and page mode burst NOR flash devices + NAND flash + * Pseudo-SRAM devices + +GPMC is found on Texas Instruments SoC's (OMAP based) +IP details: http://www.ti.com/lit/pdf/spruh73 section 7.1 + + +GPMC generic timing calculation: +================================ + +GPMC has certain timings that has to be programmed for proper +functioning of the peripheral, while peripheral has another set of +timings. To have peripheral work with gpmc, peripheral timings has to +be translated to the form gpmc can understand. The way it has to be +translated depends on the connected peripheral. Also there is a +dependency for certain gpmc timings on gpmc clock frequency. Hence a +generic timing routine was developed to achieve above requirements. + +Generic routine provides a generic method to calculate gpmc timings +from gpmc peripheral timings. struct gpmc_device_timings fields has to +be updated with timings from the datasheet of the peripheral that is +connected to gpmc. A few of the peripheral timings can be fed either +in time or in cycles, provision to handle this scenario has been +provided (refer struct gpmc_device_timings definition). It may so +happen that timing as specified by peripheral datasheet is not present +in timing structure, in this scenario, try to correlate peripheral +timing to the one available. If that doesn't work, try to add a new +field as required by peripheral, educate generic timing routine to +handle it, make sure that it does not break any of the existing. +Then there may be cases where peripheral datasheet doesn't mention +certain fields of struct gpmc_device_timings, zero those entries. + +Generic timing routine has been verified to work properly on +multiple onenand's and tusb6010 peripherals. + +A word of caution: generic timing routine has been developed based +on understanding of gpmc timings, peripheral timings, available +custom timing routines, a kind of reverse engineering without +most of the datasheets & hardware (to be exact none of those supported +in mainline having custom timing routine) and by simulation. + +gpmc timing dependency on peripheral timings: + +[<gpmc_timing>: <peripheral timing1>, <peripheral timing2> ...] + +1. common + +cs_on: + t_ceasu +adv_on: + t_avdasu, t_ceavd + +2. sync common + +sync_clk: + clk +page_burst_access: + t_bacc +clk_activation: + t_ces, t_avds + +3. read async muxed + +adv_rd_off: + t_avdp_r +oe_on: + t_oeasu, t_aavdh +access: + t_iaa, t_oe, t_ce, t_aa +rd_cycle: + t_rd_cycle, t_cez_r, t_oez + +4. read async non-muxed + +adv_rd_off: + t_avdp_r +oe_on: + t_oeasu +access: + t_iaa, t_oe, t_ce, t_aa +rd_cycle: + t_rd_cycle, t_cez_r, t_oez + +5. read sync muxed + +adv_rd_off: + t_avdp_r, t_avdh +oe_on: + t_oeasu, t_ach, cyc_aavdh_oe +access: + t_iaa, cyc_iaa, cyc_oe +rd_cycle: + t_cez_r, t_oez, t_ce_rdyz + +6. read sync non-muxed + +adv_rd_off: + t_avdp_r +oe_on: + t_oeasu +access: + t_iaa, cyc_iaa, cyc_oe +rd_cycle: + t_cez_r, t_oez, t_ce_rdyz + +7. write async muxed + +adv_wr_off: + t_avdp_w +we_on, wr_data_mux_bus: + t_weasu, t_aavdh, cyc_aavhd_we +we_off: + t_wpl +cs_wr_off: + t_wph +wr_cycle: + t_cez_w, t_wr_cycle + +8. write async non-muxed + +adv_wr_off: + t_avdp_w +we_on, wr_data_mux_bus: + t_weasu +we_off: + t_wpl +cs_wr_off: + t_wph +wr_cycle: + t_cez_w, t_wr_cycle + +9. write sync muxed + +adv_wr_off: + t_avdp_w, t_avdh +we_on, wr_data_mux_bus: + t_weasu, t_rdyo, t_aavdh, cyc_aavhd_we +we_off: + t_wpl, cyc_wpl +cs_wr_off: + t_wph +wr_cycle: + t_cez_w, t_ce_rdyz + +10. write sync non-muxed + +adv_wr_off: + t_avdp_w +we_on, wr_data_mux_bus: + t_weasu, t_rdyo +we_off: + t_wpl, cyc_wpl +cs_wr_off: + t_wph +wr_cycle: + t_cez_w, t_ce_rdyz + + +Note: + Many of gpmc timings are dependent on other gpmc timings (a few + gpmc timings purely dependent on other gpmc timings, a reason that + some of the gpmc timings are missing above), and it will result in + indirect dependency of peripheral timings to gpmc timings other than + mentioned above, refer timing routine for more details. To know what + these peripheral timings correspond to, please see explanations in + struct gpmc_device_timings definition. And for gpmc timings refer + IP details (link above). diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/men-chameleon-bus.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/men-chameleon-bus.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1b1f048aa748 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/men-chameleon-bus.rst @@ -0,0 +1,175 @@ +================= +MEN Chameleon Bus +================= + +.. Table of Contents + ================= + 1 Introduction + 1.1 Scope of this Document + 1.2 Limitations of the current implementation + 2 Architecture + 2.1 MEN Chameleon Bus + 2.2 Carrier Devices + 2.3 Parser + 3 Resource handling + 3.1 Memory Resources + 3.2 IRQs + 4 Writing an MCB driver + 4.1 The driver structure + 4.2 Probing and attaching + 4.3 Initializing the driver + + +Introduction +============ + +This document describes the architecture and implementation of the MEN +Chameleon Bus (called MCB throughout this document). + +Scope of this Document +---------------------- + +This document is intended to be a short overview of the current +implementation and does by no means describe the complete possibilities of MCB +based devices. + +Limitations of the current implementation +----------------------------------------- + +The current implementation is limited to PCI and PCIe based carrier devices +that only use a single memory resource and share the PCI legacy IRQ. Not +implemented are: + +- Multi-resource MCB devices like the VME Controller or M-Module carrier. +- MCB devices that need another MCB device, like SRAM for a DMA Controller's + buffer descriptors or a video controller's video memory. +- A per-carrier IRQ domain for carrier devices that have one (or more) IRQs + per MCB device like PCIe based carriers with MSI or MSI-X support. + +Architecture +============ + +MCB is divided into 3 functional blocks: + +- The MEN Chameleon Bus itself, +- drivers for MCB Carrier Devices and +- the parser for the Chameleon table. + +MEN Chameleon Bus +----------------- + +The MEN Chameleon Bus is an artificial bus system that attaches to a so +called Chameleon FPGA device found on some hardware produced my MEN Mikro +Elektronik GmbH. These devices are multi-function devices implemented in a +single FPGA and usually attached via some sort of PCI or PCIe link. Each +FPGA contains a header section describing the content of the FPGA. The +header lists the device id, PCI BAR, offset from the beginning of the PCI +BAR, size in the FPGA, interrupt number and some other properties currently +not handled by the MCB implementation. + +Carrier Devices +--------------- + +A carrier device is just an abstraction for the real world physical bus the +Chameleon FPGA is attached to. Some IP Core drivers may need to interact with +properties of the carrier device (like querying the IRQ number of a PCI +device). To provide abstraction from the real hardware bus, an MCB carrier +device provides callback methods to translate the driver's MCB function calls +to hardware related function calls. For example a carrier device may +implement the get_irq() method which can be translated into a hardware bus +query for the IRQ number the device should use. + +Parser +------ + +The parser reads the first 512 bytes of a Chameleon device and parses the +Chameleon table. Currently the parser only supports the Chameleon v2 variant +of the Chameleon table but can easily be adopted to support an older or +possible future variant. While parsing the table's entries new MCB devices +are allocated and their resources are assigned according to the resource +assignment in the Chameleon table. After resource assignment is finished, the +MCB devices are registered at the MCB and thus at the driver core of the +Linux kernel. + +Resource handling +================= + +The current implementation assigns exactly one memory and one IRQ resource +per MCB device. But this is likely going to change in the future. + +Memory Resources +---------------- + +Each MCB device has exactly one memory resource, which can be requested from +the MCB bus. This memory resource is the physical address of the MCB device +inside the carrier and is intended to be passed to ioremap() and friends. It +is already requested from the kernel by calling request_mem_region(). + +IRQs +---- + +Each MCB device has exactly one IRQ resource, which can be requested from the +MCB bus. If a carrier device driver implements the ->get_irq() callback +method, the IRQ number assigned by the carrier device will be returned, +otherwise the IRQ number inside the Chameleon table will be returned. This +number is suitable to be passed to request_irq(). + +Writing an MCB driver +===================== + +The driver structure +-------------------- + +Each MCB driver has a structure to identify the device driver as well as +device ids which identify the IP Core inside the FPGA. The driver structure +also contains callback methods which get executed on driver probe and +removal from the system:: + + static const struct mcb_device_id foo_ids[] = { + { .device = 0x123 }, + { } + }; + MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(mcb, foo_ids); + + static struct mcb_driver foo_driver = { + driver = { + .name = "foo-bar", + .owner = THIS_MODULE, + }, + .probe = foo_probe, + .remove = foo_remove, + .id_table = foo_ids, + }; + +Probing and attaching +--------------------- + +When a driver is loaded and the MCB devices it services are found, the MCB +core will call the driver's probe callback method. When the driver is removed +from the system, the MCB core will call the driver's remove callback method:: + + static init foo_probe(struct mcb_device *mdev, const struct mcb_device_id *id); + static void foo_remove(struct mcb_device *mdev); + +Initializing the driver +----------------------- + +When the kernel is booted or your foo driver module is inserted, you have to +perform driver initialization. Usually it is enough to register your driver +module at the MCB core:: + + static int __init foo_init(void) + { + return mcb_register_driver(&foo_driver); + } + module_init(foo_init); + + static void __exit foo_exit(void) + { + mcb_unregister_driver(&foo_driver); + } + module_exit(foo_exit); + +The module_mcb_driver() macro can be used to reduce the above code:: + + module_mcb_driver(foo_driver); diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/mmc/index.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/mmc/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7339736ac774 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/mmc/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +======================== +MMC/SD/SDIO card support +======================== + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 1 + + mmc-dev-attrs + mmc-dev-parts + mmc-async-req + mmc-tools diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/mmc/mmc-async-req.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/mmc/mmc-async-req.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0f7197c9c3b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/mmc/mmc-async-req.rst @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +======================== +MMC Asynchronous Request +======================== + +Rationale +========= + +How significant is the cache maintenance overhead? + +It depends. Fast eMMC and multiple cache levels with speculative cache +pre-fetch makes the cache overhead relatively significant. If the DMA +preparations for the next request are done in parallel with the current +transfer, the DMA preparation overhead would not affect the MMC performance. + +The intention of non-blocking (asynchronous) MMC requests is to minimize the +time between when an MMC request ends and another MMC request begins. + +Using mmc_wait_for_req(), the MMC controller is idle while dma_map_sg and +dma_unmap_sg are processing. Using non-blocking MMC requests makes it +possible to prepare the caches for next job in parallel with an active +MMC request. + +MMC block driver +================ + +The mmc_blk_issue_rw_rq() in the MMC block driver is made non-blocking. + +The increase in throughput is proportional to the time it takes to +prepare (major part of preparations are dma_map_sg() and dma_unmap_sg()) +a request and how fast the memory is. The faster the MMC/SD is the +more significant the prepare request time becomes. Roughly the expected +performance gain is 5% for large writes and 10% on large reads on a L2 cache +platform. In power save mode, when clocks run on a lower frequency, the DMA +preparation may cost even more. As long as these slower preparations are run +in parallel with the transfer performance won't be affected. + +Details on measurements from IOZone and mmc_test +================================================ + +https://wiki.linaro.org/WorkingGroups/Kernel/Specs/StoragePerfMMC-async-req + +MMC core API extension +====================== + +There is one new public function mmc_start_req(). + +It starts a new MMC command request for a host. The function isn't +truly non-blocking. If there is an ongoing async request it waits +for completion of that request and starts the new one and returns. It +doesn't wait for the new request to complete. If there is no ongoing +request it starts the new request and returns immediately. + +MMC host extensions +=================== + +There are two optional members in the mmc_host_ops -- pre_req() and +post_req() -- that the host driver may implement in order to move work +to before and after the actual mmc_host_ops.request() function is called. + +In the DMA case pre_req() may do dma_map_sg() and prepare the DMA +descriptor, and post_req() runs the dma_unmap_sg(). + +Optimize for the first request +============================== + +The first request in a series of requests can't be prepared in parallel +with the previous transfer, since there is no previous request. + +The argument is_first_req in pre_req() indicates that there is no previous +request. The host driver may optimize for this scenario to minimize +the performance loss. A way to optimize for this is to split the current +request in two chunks, prepare the first chunk and start the request, +and finally prepare the second chunk and start the transfer. + +Pseudocode to handle is_first_req scenario with minimal prepare overhead:: + + if (is_first_req && req->size > threshold) + /* start MMC transfer for the complete transfer size */ + mmc_start_command(MMC_CMD_TRANSFER_FULL_SIZE); + + /* + * Begin to prepare DMA while cmd is being processed by MMC. + * The first chunk of the request should take the same time + * to prepare as the "MMC process command time". + * If prepare time exceeds MMC cmd time + * the transfer is delayed, guesstimate max 4k as first chunk size. + */ + prepare_1st_chunk_for_dma(req); + /* flush pending desc to the DMAC (dmaengine.h) */ + dma_issue_pending(req->dma_desc); + + prepare_2nd_chunk_for_dma(req); + /* + * The second issue_pending should be called before MMC runs out + * of the first chunk. If the MMC runs out of the first data chunk + * before this call, the transfer is delayed. + */ + dma_issue_pending(req->dma_desc); diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/mmc/mmc-dev-attrs.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/mmc/mmc-dev-attrs.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4f44b1b730d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/mmc/mmc-dev-attrs.rst @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ +================================== +SD and MMC Block Device Attributes +================================== + +These attributes are defined for the block devices associated with the +SD or MMC device. + +The following attributes are read/write. + + ======== =============================================== + force_ro Enforce read-only access even if write protect switch is off. + ======== =============================================== + +SD and MMC Device Attributes +============================ + +All attributes are read-only. + + ====================== =============================================== + cid Card Identification Register + csd Card Specific Data Register + scr SD Card Configuration Register (SD only) + date Manufacturing Date (from CID Register) + fwrev Firmware/Product Revision (from CID Register) + (SD and MMCv1 only) + hwrev Hardware/Product Revision (from CID Register) + (SD and MMCv1 only) + manfid Manufacturer ID (from CID Register) + name Product Name (from CID Register) + oemid OEM/Application ID (from CID Register) + prv Product Revision (from CID Register) + (SD and MMCv4 only) + serial Product Serial Number (from CID Register) + erase_size Erase group size + preferred_erase_size Preferred erase size + raw_rpmb_size_mult RPMB partition size + rel_sectors Reliable write sector count + ocr Operation Conditions Register + dsr Driver Stage Register + cmdq_en Command Queue enabled: + + 1 => enabled, 0 => not enabled + ====================== =============================================== + +Note on Erase Size and Preferred Erase Size: + + "erase_size" is the minimum size, in bytes, of an erase + operation. For MMC, "erase_size" is the erase group size + reported by the card. Note that "erase_size" does not apply + to trim or secure trim operations where the minimum size is + always one 512 byte sector. For SD, "erase_size" is 512 + if the card is block-addressed, 0 otherwise. + + SD/MMC cards can erase an arbitrarily large area up to and + including the whole card. When erasing a large area it may + be desirable to do it in smaller chunks for three reasons: + + 1. A single erase command will make all other I/O on + the card wait. This is not a problem if the whole card + is being erased, but erasing one partition will make + I/O for another partition on the same card wait for the + duration of the erase - which could be a several + minutes. + 2. To be able to inform the user of erase progress. + 3. The erase timeout becomes too large to be very + useful. Because the erase timeout contains a margin + which is multiplied by the size of the erase area, + the value can end up being several minutes for large + areas. + + "erase_size" is not the most efficient unit to erase + (especially for SD where it is just one sector), + hence "preferred_erase_size" provides a good chunk + size for erasing large areas. + + For MMC, "preferred_erase_size" is the high-capacity + erase size if a card specifies one, otherwise it is + based on the capacity of the card. + + For SD, "preferred_erase_size" is the allocation unit + size specified by the card. + + "preferred_erase_size" is in bytes. + +Note on raw_rpmb_size_mult: + + "raw_rpmb_size_mult" is a multiple of 128kB block. + + RPMB size in byte is calculated by using the following equation: + + RPMB partition size = 128kB x raw_rpmb_size_mult diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/mmc/mmc-dev-parts.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/mmc/mmc-dev-parts.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..995922f1f744 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/mmc/mmc-dev-parts.rst @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +============================ +SD and MMC Device Partitions +============================ + +Device partitions are additional logical block devices present on the +SD/MMC device. + +As of this writing, MMC boot partitions as supported and exposed as +/dev/mmcblkXboot0 and /dev/mmcblkXboot1, where X is the index of the +parent /dev/mmcblkX. + +MMC Boot Partitions +=================== + +Read and write access is provided to the two MMC boot partitions. Due to +the sensitive nature of the boot partition contents, which often store +a bootloader or bootloader configuration tables crucial to booting the +platform, write access is disabled by default to reduce the chance of +accidental bricking. + +To enable write access to /dev/mmcblkXbootY, disable the forced read-only +access with:: + + echo 0 > /sys/block/mmcblkXbootY/force_ro + +To re-enable read-only access:: + + echo 1 > /sys/block/mmcblkXbootY/force_ro + +The boot partitions can also be locked read only until the next power on, +with:: + + echo 1 > /sys/block/mmcblkXbootY/ro_lock_until_next_power_on + +This is a feature of the card and not of the kernel. If the card does +not support boot partition locking, the file will not exist. If the +feature has been disabled on the card, the file will be read-only. + +The boot partitions can also be locked permanently, but this feature is +not accessible through sysfs in order to avoid accidental or malicious +bricking. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/mmc/mmc-tools.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/mmc/mmc-tools.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..54406093768b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/mmc/mmc-tools.rst @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +====================== +MMC tools introduction +====================== + +There is one MMC test tools called mmc-utils, which is maintained by Chris Ball, +you can find it at the below public git repository: + + http://git.kernel.org/cgit/linux/kernel/git/cjb/mmc-utils.git/ + +Functions +========= + +The mmc-utils tools can do the following: + + - Print and parse extcsd data. + - Determine the eMMC writeprotect status. + - Set the eMMC writeprotect status. + - Set the eMMC data sector size to 4KB by disabling emulation. + - Create general purpose partition. + - Enable the enhanced user area. + - Enable write reliability per partition. + - Print the response to STATUS_SEND (CMD13). + - Enable the boot partition. + - Set Boot Bus Conditions. + - Enable the eMMC BKOPS feature. + - Permanently enable the eMMC H/W Reset feature. + - Permanently disable the eMMC H/W Reset feature. + - Send Sanitize command. + - Program authentication key for the device. + - Counter value for the rpmb device will be read to stdout. + - Read from rpmb device to output. + - Write to rpmb device from data file. + - Enable the eMMC cache feature. + - Disable the eMMC cache feature. + - Print and parse CID data. + - Print and parse CSD data. + - Print and parse SCR data. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/mtd/index.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/mtd/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..436ba5a851d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/mtd/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +============================== +Memory Technology Device (MTD) +============================== + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 1 + + intel-spi + nand_ecc + spi-nor diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/mtd/intel-spi.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/mtd/intel-spi.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0e6d9cd5388d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/mtd/intel-spi.rst @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +============================== +Upgrading BIOS using intel-spi +============================== + +Many Intel CPUs like Baytrail and Braswell include SPI serial flash host +controller which is used to hold BIOS and other platform specific data. +Since contents of the SPI serial flash is crucial for machine to function, +it is typically protected by different hardware protection mechanisms to +avoid accidental (or on purpose) overwrite of the content. + +Not all manufacturers protect the SPI serial flash, mainly because it +allows upgrading the BIOS image directly from an OS. + +The intel-spi driver makes it possible to read and write the SPI serial +flash, if certain protection bits are not set and locked. If it finds +any of them set, the whole MTD device is made read-only to prevent +partial overwrites. By default the driver exposes SPI serial flash +contents as read-only but it can be changed from kernel command line, +passing "intel-spi.writeable=1". + +Please keep in mind that overwriting the BIOS image on SPI serial flash +might render the machine unbootable and requires special equipment like +Dediprog to revive. You have been warned! + +Below are the steps how to upgrade MinnowBoard MAX BIOS directly from +Linux. + + 1) Download and extract the latest Minnowboard MAX BIOS SPI image + [1]. At the time writing this the latest image is v92. + + 2) Install mtd-utils package [2]. We need this in order to erase the SPI + serial flash. Distros like Debian and Fedora have this prepackaged with + name "mtd-utils". + + 3) Add "intel-spi.writeable=1" to the kernel command line and reboot + the board (you can also reload the driver passing "writeable=1" as + module parameter to modprobe). + + 4) Once the board is up and running again, find the right MTD partition + (it is named as "BIOS"):: + + # cat /proc/mtd + dev: size erasesize name + mtd0: 00800000 00001000 "BIOS" + + So here it will be /dev/mtd0 but it may vary. + + 5) Make backup of the existing image first:: + + # dd if=/dev/mtd0ro of=bios.bak + 16384+0 records in + 16384+0 records out + 8388608 bytes (8.4 MB) copied, 10.0269 s, 837 kB/s + + 6) Verify the backup: + + # sha1sum /dev/mtd0ro bios.bak + fdbb011920572ca6c991377c4b418a0502668b73 /dev/mtd0ro + fdbb011920572ca6c991377c4b418a0502668b73 bios.bak + + The SHA1 sums must match. Otherwise do not continue any further! + + 7) Erase the SPI serial flash. After this step, do not reboot the + board! Otherwise it will not start anymore:: + + # flash_erase /dev/mtd0 0 0 + Erasing 4 Kibyte @ 7ff000 -- 100 % complete + + 8) Once completed without errors you can write the new BIOS image: + + # dd if=MNW2MAX1.X64.0092.R01.1605221712.bin of=/dev/mtd0 + + 9) Verify that the new content of the SPI serial flash matches the new + BIOS image:: + + # sha1sum /dev/mtd0ro MNW2MAX1.X64.0092.R01.1605221712.bin + 9b4df9e4be2057fceec3a5529ec3d950836c87a2 /dev/mtd0ro + 9b4df9e4be2057fceec3a5529ec3d950836c87a2 MNW2MAX1.X64.0092.R01.1605221712.bin + + The SHA1 sums should match. + + 10) Now you can reboot your board and observe the new BIOS starting up + properly. + +References +---------- + +[1] https://firmware.intel.com/sites/default/files/MinnowBoard%2EMAX_%2EX64%2E92%2ER01%2Ezip + +[2] http://www.linux-mtd.infradead.org/ diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/mtd/nand_ecc.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/mtd/nand_ecc.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e8d3c53a5056 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/mtd/nand_ecc.rst @@ -0,0 +1,763 @@ +========================== +NAND Error-correction Code +========================== + +Introduction +============ + +Having looked at the linux mtd/nand driver and more specific at nand_ecc.c +I felt there was room for optimisation. I bashed the code for a few hours +performing tricks like table lookup removing superfluous code etc. +After that the speed was increased by 35-40%. +Still I was not too happy as I felt there was additional room for improvement. + +Bad! I was hooked. +I decided to annotate my steps in this file. Perhaps it is useful to someone +or someone learns something from it. + + +The problem +=========== + +NAND flash (at least SLC one) typically has sectors of 256 bytes. +However NAND flash is not extremely reliable so some error detection +(and sometimes correction) is needed. + +This is done by means of a Hamming code. I'll try to explain it in +laymans terms (and apologies to all the pro's in the field in case I do +not use the right terminology, my coding theory class was almost 30 +years ago, and I must admit it was not one of my favourites). + +As I said before the ecc calculation is performed on sectors of 256 +bytes. This is done by calculating several parity bits over the rows and +columns. The parity used is even parity which means that the parity bit = 1 +if the data over which the parity is calculated is 1 and the parity bit = 0 +if the data over which the parity is calculated is 0. So the total +number of bits over the data over which the parity is calculated + the +parity bit is even. (see wikipedia if you can't follow this). +Parity is often calculated by means of an exclusive or operation, +sometimes also referred to as xor. In C the operator for xor is ^ + +Back to ecc. +Let's give a small figure: + +========= ==== ==== ==== ==== ==== ==== ==== ==== === === === === ==== +byte 0: bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 rp0 rp2 rp4 ... rp14 +byte 1: bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 rp1 rp2 rp4 ... rp14 +byte 2: bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 rp0 rp3 rp4 ... rp14 +byte 3: bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 rp1 rp3 rp4 ... rp14 +byte 4: bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 rp0 rp2 rp5 ... rp14 +... +byte 254: bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 rp0 rp3 rp5 ... rp15 +byte 255: bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 rp1 rp3 rp5 ... rp15 + cp1 cp0 cp1 cp0 cp1 cp0 cp1 cp0 + cp3 cp3 cp2 cp2 cp3 cp3 cp2 cp2 + cp5 cp5 cp5 cp5 cp4 cp4 cp4 cp4 +========= ==== ==== ==== ==== ==== ==== ==== ==== === === === === ==== + +This figure represents a sector of 256 bytes. +cp is my abbreviation for column parity, rp for row parity. + +Let's start to explain column parity. + +- cp0 is the parity that belongs to all bit0, bit2, bit4, bit6. + + so the sum of all bit0, bit2, bit4 and bit6 values + cp0 itself is even. + +Similarly cp1 is the sum of all bit1, bit3, bit5 and bit7. + +- cp2 is the parity over bit0, bit1, bit4 and bit5 +- cp3 is the parity over bit2, bit3, bit6 and bit7. +- cp4 is the parity over bit0, bit1, bit2 and bit3. +- cp5 is the parity over bit4, bit5, bit6 and bit7. + +Note that each of cp0 .. cp5 is exactly one bit. + +Row parity actually works almost the same. + +- rp0 is the parity of all even bytes (0, 2, 4, 6, ... 252, 254) +- rp1 is the parity of all odd bytes (1, 3, 5, 7, ..., 253, 255) +- rp2 is the parity of all bytes 0, 1, 4, 5, 8, 9, ... + (so handle two bytes, then skip 2 bytes). +- rp3 is covers the half rp2 does not cover (bytes 2, 3, 6, 7, 10, 11, ...) +- for rp4 the rule is cover 4 bytes, skip 4 bytes, cover 4 bytes, skip 4 etc. + + so rp4 calculates parity over bytes 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 11, 16, ...) +- and rp5 covers the other half, so bytes 4, 5, 6, 7, 12, 13, 14, 15, 20, .. + +The story now becomes quite boring. I guess you get the idea. + +- rp6 covers 8 bytes then skips 8 etc +- rp7 skips 8 bytes then covers 8 etc +- rp8 covers 16 bytes then skips 16 etc +- rp9 skips 16 bytes then covers 16 etc +- rp10 covers 32 bytes then skips 32 etc +- rp11 skips 32 bytes then covers 32 etc +- rp12 covers 64 bytes then skips 64 etc +- rp13 skips 64 bytes then covers 64 etc +- rp14 covers 128 bytes then skips 128 +- rp15 skips 128 bytes then covers 128 + +In the end the parity bits are grouped together in three bytes as +follows: + +===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== +ECC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 +===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== +ECC 0 rp07 rp06 rp05 rp04 rp03 rp02 rp01 rp00 +ECC 1 rp15 rp14 rp13 rp12 rp11 rp10 rp09 rp08 +ECC 2 cp5 cp4 cp3 cp2 cp1 cp0 1 1 +===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== + +I detected after writing this that ST application note AN1823 +(http://www.st.com/stonline/) gives a much +nicer picture.(but they use line parity as term where I use row parity) +Oh well, I'm graphically challenged, so suffer with me for a moment :-) + +And I could not reuse the ST picture anyway for copyright reasons. + + +Attempt 0 +========= + +Implementing the parity calculation is pretty simple. +In C pseudocode:: + + for (i = 0; i < 256; i++) + { + if (i & 0x01) + rp1 = bit7 ^ bit6 ^ bit5 ^ bit4 ^ bit3 ^ bit2 ^ bit1 ^ bit0 ^ rp1; + else + rp0 = bit7 ^ bit6 ^ bit5 ^ bit4 ^ bit3 ^ bit2 ^ bit1 ^ bit0 ^ rp0; + if (i & 0x02) + rp3 = bit7 ^ bit6 ^ bit5 ^ bit4 ^ bit3 ^ bit2 ^ bit1 ^ bit0 ^ rp3; + else + rp2 = bit7 ^ bit6 ^ bit5 ^ bit4 ^ bit3 ^ bit2 ^ bit1 ^ bit0 ^ rp2; + if (i & 0x04) + rp5 = bit7 ^ bit6 ^ bit5 ^ bit4 ^ bit3 ^ bit2 ^ bit1 ^ bit0 ^ rp5; + else + rp4 = bit7 ^ bit6 ^ bit5 ^ bit4 ^ bit3 ^ bit2 ^ bit1 ^ bit0 ^ rp4; + if (i & 0x08) + rp7 = bit7 ^ bit6 ^ bit5 ^ bit4 ^ bit3 ^ bit2 ^ bit1 ^ bit0 ^ rp7; + else + rp6 = bit7 ^ bit6 ^ bit5 ^ bit4 ^ bit3 ^ bit2 ^ bit1 ^ bit0 ^ rp6; + if (i & 0x10) + rp9 = bit7 ^ bit6 ^ bit5 ^ bit4 ^ bit3 ^ bit2 ^ bit1 ^ bit0 ^ rp9; + else + rp8 = bit7 ^ bit6 ^ bit5 ^ bit4 ^ bit3 ^ bit2 ^ bit1 ^ bit0 ^ rp8; + if (i & 0x20) + rp11 = bit7 ^ bit6 ^ bit5 ^ bit4 ^ bit3 ^ bit2 ^ bit1 ^ bit0 ^ rp11; + else + rp10 = bit7 ^ bit6 ^ bit5 ^ bit4 ^ bit3 ^ bit2 ^ bit1 ^ bit0 ^ rp10; + if (i & 0x40) + rp13 = bit7 ^ bit6 ^ bit5 ^ bit4 ^ bit3 ^ bit2 ^ bit1 ^ bit0 ^ rp13; + else + rp12 = bit7 ^ bit6 ^ bit5 ^ bit4 ^ bit3 ^ bit2 ^ bit1 ^ bit0 ^ rp12; + if (i & 0x80) + rp15 = bit7 ^ bit6 ^ bit5 ^ bit4 ^ bit3 ^ bit2 ^ bit1 ^ bit0 ^ rp15; + else + rp14 = bit7 ^ bit6 ^ bit5 ^ bit4 ^ bit3 ^ bit2 ^ bit1 ^ bit0 ^ rp14; + cp0 = bit6 ^ bit4 ^ bit2 ^ bit0 ^ cp0; + cp1 = bit7 ^ bit5 ^ bit3 ^ bit1 ^ cp1; + cp2 = bit5 ^ bit4 ^ bit1 ^ bit0 ^ cp2; + cp3 = bit7 ^ bit6 ^ bit3 ^ bit2 ^ cp3 + cp4 = bit3 ^ bit2 ^ bit1 ^ bit0 ^ cp4 + cp5 = bit7 ^ bit6 ^ bit5 ^ bit4 ^ cp5 + } + + +Analysis 0 +========== + +C does have bitwise operators but not really operators to do the above +efficiently (and most hardware has no such instructions either). +Therefore without implementing this it was clear that the code above was +not going to bring me a Nobel prize :-) + +Fortunately the exclusive or operation is commutative, so we can combine +the values in any order. So instead of calculating all the bits +individually, let us try to rearrange things. +For the column parity this is easy. We can just xor the bytes and in the +end filter out the relevant bits. This is pretty nice as it will bring +all cp calculation out of the for loop. + +Similarly we can first xor the bytes for the various rows. +This leads to: + + +Attempt 1 +========= + +:: + + const char parity[256] = { + 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, + 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, + 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, + 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, + 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, + 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, + 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, + 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, + 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, + 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, + 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, + 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, + 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, + 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, + 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, + 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0 + }; + + void ecc1(const unsigned char *buf, unsigned char *code) + { + int i; + const unsigned char *bp = buf; + unsigned char cur; + unsigned char rp0, rp1, rp2, rp3, rp4, rp5, rp6, rp7; + unsigned char rp8, rp9, rp10, rp11, rp12, rp13, rp14, rp15; + unsigned char par; + + par = 0; + rp0 = 0; rp1 = 0; rp2 = 0; rp3 = 0; + rp4 = 0; rp5 = 0; rp6 = 0; rp7 = 0; + rp8 = 0; rp9 = 0; rp10 = 0; rp11 = 0; + rp12 = 0; rp13 = 0; rp14 = 0; rp15 = 0; + + for (i = 0; i < 256; i++) + { + cur = *bp++; + par ^= cur; + if (i & 0x01) rp1 ^= cur; else rp0 ^= cur; + if (i & 0x02) rp3 ^= cur; else rp2 ^= cur; + if (i & 0x04) rp5 ^= cur; else rp4 ^= cur; + if (i & 0x08) rp7 ^= cur; else rp6 ^= cur; + if (i & 0x10) rp9 ^= cur; else rp8 ^= cur; + if (i & 0x20) rp11 ^= cur; else rp10 ^= cur; + if (i & 0x40) rp13 ^= cur; else rp12 ^= cur; + if (i & 0x80) rp15 ^= cur; else rp14 ^= cur; + } + code[0] = + (parity[rp7] << 7) | + (parity[rp6] << 6) | + (parity[rp5] << 5) | + (parity[rp4] << 4) | + (parity[rp3] << 3) | + (parity[rp2] << 2) | + (parity[rp1] << 1) | + (parity[rp0]); + code[1] = + (parity[rp15] << 7) | + (parity[rp14] << 6) | + (parity[rp13] << 5) | + (parity[rp12] << 4) | + (parity[rp11] << 3) | + (parity[rp10] << 2) | + (parity[rp9] << 1) | + (parity[rp8]); + code[2] = + (parity[par & 0xf0] << 7) | + (parity[par & 0x0f] << 6) | + (parity[par & 0xcc] << 5) | + (parity[par & 0x33] << 4) | + (parity[par & 0xaa] << 3) | + (parity[par & 0x55] << 2); + code[0] = ~code[0]; + code[1] = ~code[1]; + code[2] = ~code[2]; + } + +Still pretty straightforward. The last three invert statements are there to +give a checksum of 0xff 0xff 0xff for an empty flash. In an empty flash +all data is 0xff, so the checksum then matches. + +I also introduced the parity lookup. I expected this to be the fastest +way to calculate the parity, but I will investigate alternatives later +on. + + +Analysis 1 +========== + +The code works, but is not terribly efficient. On my system it took +almost 4 times as much time as the linux driver code. But hey, if it was +*that* easy this would have been done long before. +No pain. no gain. + +Fortunately there is plenty of room for improvement. + +In step 1 we moved from bit-wise calculation to byte-wise calculation. +However in C we can also use the unsigned long data type and virtually +every modern microprocessor supports 32 bit operations, so why not try +to write our code in such a way that we process data in 32 bit chunks. + +Of course this means some modification as the row parity is byte by +byte. A quick analysis: +for the column parity we use the par variable. When extending to 32 bits +we can in the end easily calculate rp0 and rp1 from it. +(because par now consists of 4 bytes, contributing to rp1, rp0, rp1, rp0 +respectively, from MSB to LSB) +also rp2 and rp3 can be easily retrieved from par as rp3 covers the +first two MSBs and rp2 covers the last two LSBs. + +Note that of course now the loop is executed only 64 times (256/4). +And note that care must taken wrt byte ordering. The way bytes are +ordered in a long is machine dependent, and might affect us. +Anyway, if there is an issue: this code is developed on x86 (to be +precise: a DELL PC with a D920 Intel CPU) + +And of course the performance might depend on alignment, but I expect +that the I/O buffers in the nand driver are aligned properly (and +otherwise that should be fixed to get maximum performance). + +Let's give it a try... + + +Attempt 2 +========= + +:: + + extern const char parity[256]; + + void ecc2(const unsigned char *buf, unsigned char *code) + { + int i; + const unsigned long *bp = (unsigned long *)buf; + unsigned long cur; + unsigned long rp0, rp1, rp2, rp3, rp4, rp5, rp6, rp7; + unsigned long rp8, rp9, rp10, rp11, rp12, rp13, rp14, rp15; + unsigned long par; + + par = 0; + rp0 = 0; rp1 = 0; rp2 = 0; rp3 = 0; + rp4 = 0; rp5 = 0; rp6 = 0; rp7 = 0; + rp8 = 0; rp9 = 0; rp10 = 0; rp11 = 0; + rp12 = 0; rp13 = 0; rp14 = 0; rp15 = 0; + + for (i = 0; i < 64; i++) + { + cur = *bp++; + par ^= cur; + if (i & 0x01) rp5 ^= cur; else rp4 ^= cur; + if (i & 0x02) rp7 ^= cur; else rp6 ^= cur; + if (i & 0x04) rp9 ^= cur; else rp8 ^= cur; + if (i & 0x08) rp11 ^= cur; else rp10 ^= cur; + if (i & 0x10) rp13 ^= cur; else rp12 ^= cur; + if (i & 0x20) rp15 ^= cur; else rp14 ^= cur; + } + /* + we need to adapt the code generation for the fact that rp vars are now + long; also the column parity calculation needs to be changed. + we'll bring rp4 to 15 back to single byte entities by shifting and + xoring + */ + rp4 ^= (rp4 >> 16); rp4 ^= (rp4 >> 8); rp4 &= 0xff; + rp5 ^= (rp5 >> 16); rp5 ^= (rp5 >> 8); rp5 &= 0xff; + rp6 ^= (rp6 >> 16); rp6 ^= (rp6 >> 8); rp6 &= 0xff; + rp7 ^= (rp7 >> 16); rp7 ^= (rp7 >> 8); rp7 &= 0xff; + rp8 ^= (rp8 >> 16); rp8 ^= (rp8 >> 8); rp8 &= 0xff; + rp9 ^= (rp9 >> 16); rp9 ^= (rp9 >> 8); rp9 &= 0xff; + rp10 ^= (rp10 >> 16); rp10 ^= (rp10 >> 8); rp10 &= 0xff; + rp11 ^= (rp11 >> 16); rp11 ^= (rp11 >> 8); rp11 &= 0xff; + rp12 ^= (rp12 >> 16); rp12 ^= (rp12 >> 8); rp12 &= 0xff; + rp13 ^= (rp13 >> 16); rp13 ^= (rp13 >> 8); rp13 &= 0xff; + rp14 ^= (rp14 >> 16); rp14 ^= (rp14 >> 8); rp14 &= 0xff; + rp15 ^= (rp15 >> 16); rp15 ^= (rp15 >> 8); rp15 &= 0xff; + rp3 = (par >> 16); rp3 ^= (rp3 >> 8); rp3 &= 0xff; + rp2 = par & 0xffff; rp2 ^= (rp2 >> 8); rp2 &= 0xff; + par ^= (par >> 16); + rp1 = (par >> 8); rp1 &= 0xff; + rp0 = (par & 0xff); + par ^= (par >> 8); par &= 0xff; + + code[0] = + (parity[rp7] << 7) | + (parity[rp6] << 6) | + (parity[rp5] << 5) | + (parity[rp4] << 4) | + (parity[rp3] << 3) | + (parity[rp2] << 2) | + (parity[rp1] << 1) | + (parity[rp0]); + code[1] = + (parity[rp15] << 7) | + (parity[rp14] << 6) | + (parity[rp13] << 5) | + (parity[rp12] << 4) | + (parity[rp11] << 3) | + (parity[rp10] << 2) | + (parity[rp9] << 1) | + (parity[rp8]); + code[2] = + (parity[par & 0xf0] << 7) | + (parity[par & 0x0f] << 6) | + (parity[par & 0xcc] << 5) | + (parity[par & 0x33] << 4) | + (parity[par & 0xaa] << 3) | + (parity[par & 0x55] << 2); + code[0] = ~code[0]; + code[1] = ~code[1]; + code[2] = ~code[2]; + } + +The parity array is not shown any more. Note also that for these +examples I kinda deviated from my regular programming style by allowing +multiple statements on a line, not using { } in then and else blocks +with only a single statement and by using operators like ^= + + +Analysis 2 +========== + +The code (of course) works, and hurray: we are a little bit faster than +the linux driver code (about 15%). But wait, don't cheer too quickly. +There is more to be gained. +If we look at e.g. rp14 and rp15 we see that we either xor our data with +rp14 or with rp15. However we also have par which goes over all data. +This means there is no need to calculate rp14 as it can be calculated from +rp15 through rp14 = par ^ rp15, because par = rp14 ^ rp15; +(or if desired we can avoid calculating rp15 and calculate it from +rp14). That is why some places refer to inverse parity. +Of course the same thing holds for rp4/5, rp6/7, rp8/9, rp10/11 and rp12/13. +Effectively this means we can eliminate the else clause from the if +statements. Also we can optimise the calculation in the end a little bit +by going from long to byte first. Actually we can even avoid the table +lookups + +Attempt 3 +========= + +Odd replaced:: + + if (i & 0x01) rp5 ^= cur; else rp4 ^= cur; + if (i & 0x02) rp7 ^= cur; else rp6 ^= cur; + if (i & 0x04) rp9 ^= cur; else rp8 ^= cur; + if (i & 0x08) rp11 ^= cur; else rp10 ^= cur; + if (i & 0x10) rp13 ^= cur; else rp12 ^= cur; + if (i & 0x20) rp15 ^= cur; else rp14 ^= cur; + +with:: + + if (i & 0x01) rp5 ^= cur; + if (i & 0x02) rp7 ^= cur; + if (i & 0x04) rp9 ^= cur; + if (i & 0x08) rp11 ^= cur; + if (i & 0x10) rp13 ^= cur; + if (i & 0x20) rp15 ^= cur; + +and outside the loop added:: + + rp4 = par ^ rp5; + rp6 = par ^ rp7; + rp8 = par ^ rp9; + rp10 = par ^ rp11; + rp12 = par ^ rp13; + rp14 = par ^ rp15; + +And after that the code takes about 30% more time, although the number of +statements is reduced. This is also reflected in the assembly code. + + +Analysis 3 +========== + +Very weird. Guess it has to do with caching or instruction parallellism +or so. I also tried on an eeePC (Celeron, clocked at 900 Mhz). Interesting +observation was that this one is only 30% slower (according to time) +executing the code as my 3Ghz D920 processor. + +Well, it was expected not to be easy so maybe instead move to a +different track: let's move back to the code from attempt2 and do some +loop unrolling. This will eliminate a few if statements. I'll try +different amounts of unrolling to see what works best. + + +Attempt 4 +========= + +Unrolled the loop 1, 2, 3 and 4 times. +For 4 the code starts with:: + + for (i = 0; i < 4; i++) + { + cur = *bp++; + par ^= cur; + rp4 ^= cur; + rp6 ^= cur; + rp8 ^= cur; + rp10 ^= cur; + if (i & 0x1) rp13 ^= cur; else rp12 ^= cur; + if (i & 0x2) rp15 ^= cur; else rp14 ^= cur; + cur = *bp++; + par ^= cur; + rp5 ^= cur; + rp6 ^= cur; + ... + + +Analysis 4 +========== + +Unrolling once gains about 15% + +Unrolling twice keeps the gain at about 15% + +Unrolling three times gives a gain of 30% compared to attempt 2. + +Unrolling four times gives a marginal improvement compared to unrolling +three times. + +I decided to proceed with a four time unrolled loop anyway. It was my gut +feeling that in the next steps I would obtain additional gain from it. + +The next step was triggered by the fact that par contains the xor of all +bytes and rp4 and rp5 each contain the xor of half of the bytes. +So in effect par = rp4 ^ rp5. But as xor is commutative we can also say +that rp5 = par ^ rp4. So no need to keep both rp4 and rp5 around. We can +eliminate rp5 (or rp4, but I already foresaw another optimisation). +The same holds for rp6/7, rp8/9, rp10/11 rp12/13 and rp14/15. + + +Attempt 5 +========= + +Effectively so all odd digit rp assignments in the loop were removed. +This included the else clause of the if statements. +Of course after the loop we need to correct things by adding code like:: + + rp5 = par ^ rp4; + +Also the initial assignments (rp5 = 0; etc) could be removed. +Along the line I also removed the initialisation of rp0/1/2/3. + + +Analysis 5 +========== + +Measurements showed this was a good move. The run-time roughly halved +compared with attempt 4 with 4 times unrolled, and we only require 1/3rd +of the processor time compared to the current code in the linux kernel. + +However, still I thought there was more. I didn't like all the if +statements. Why not keep a running parity and only keep the last if +statement. Time for yet another version! + + +Attempt 6 +========= + +THe code within the for loop was changed to:: + + for (i = 0; i < 4; i++) + { + cur = *bp++; tmppar = cur; rp4 ^= cur; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp6 ^= tmppar; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp4 ^= cur; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp8 ^= tmppar; + + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp4 ^= cur; rp6 ^= cur; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp6 ^= cur; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp4 ^= cur; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp10 ^= tmppar; + + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp4 ^= cur; rp6 ^= cur; rp8 ^= cur; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp6 ^= cur; rp8 ^= cur; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp4 ^= cur; rp8 ^= cur; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp8 ^= cur; + + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp4 ^= cur; rp6 ^= cur; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp6 ^= cur; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp4 ^= cur; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; + + par ^= tmppar; + if ((i & 0x1) == 0) rp12 ^= tmppar; + if ((i & 0x2) == 0) rp14 ^= tmppar; + } + +As you can see tmppar is used to accumulate the parity within a for +iteration. In the last 3 statements is added to par and, if needed, +to rp12 and rp14. + +While making the changes I also found that I could exploit that tmppar +contains the running parity for this iteration. So instead of having: +rp4 ^= cur; rp6 ^= cur; +I removed the rp6 ^= cur; statement and did rp6 ^= tmppar; on next +statement. A similar change was done for rp8 and rp10 + + +Analysis 6 +========== + +Measuring this code again showed big gain. When executing the original +linux code 1 million times, this took about 1 second on my system. +(using time to measure the performance). After this iteration I was back +to 0.075 sec. Actually I had to decide to start measuring over 10 +million iterations in order not to lose too much accuracy. This one +definitely seemed to be the jackpot! + +There is a little bit more room for improvement though. There are three +places with statements:: + + rp4 ^= cur; rp6 ^= cur; + +It seems more efficient to also maintain a variable rp4_6 in the while +loop; This eliminates 3 statements per loop. Of course after the loop we +need to correct by adding:: + + rp4 ^= rp4_6; + rp6 ^= rp4_6 + +Furthermore there are 4 sequential assignments to rp8. This can be +encoded slightly more efficiently by saving tmppar before those 4 lines +and later do rp8 = rp8 ^ tmppar ^ notrp8; +(where notrp8 is the value of rp8 before those 4 lines). +Again a use of the commutative property of xor. +Time for a new test! + + +Attempt 7 +========= + +The new code now looks like:: + + for (i = 0; i < 4; i++) + { + cur = *bp++; tmppar = cur; rp4 ^= cur; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp6 ^= tmppar; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp4 ^= cur; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp8 ^= tmppar; + + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp4_6 ^= cur; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp6 ^= cur; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp4 ^= cur; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp10 ^= tmppar; + + notrp8 = tmppar; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp4_6 ^= cur; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp6 ^= cur; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp4 ^= cur; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; + rp8 = rp8 ^ tmppar ^ notrp8; + + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp4_6 ^= cur; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp6 ^= cur; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; rp4 ^= cur; + cur = *bp++; tmppar ^= cur; + + par ^= tmppar; + if ((i & 0x1) == 0) rp12 ^= tmppar; + if ((i & 0x2) == 0) rp14 ^= tmppar; + } + rp4 ^= rp4_6; + rp6 ^= rp4_6; + + +Not a big change, but every penny counts :-) + + +Analysis 7 +========== + +Actually this made things worse. Not very much, but I don't want to move +into the wrong direction. Maybe something to investigate later. Could +have to do with caching again. + +Guess that is what there is to win within the loop. Maybe unrolling one +more time will help. I'll keep the optimisations from 7 for now. + + +Attempt 8 +========= + +Unrolled the loop one more time. + + +Analysis 8 +========== + +This makes things worse. Let's stick with attempt 6 and continue from there. +Although it seems that the code within the loop cannot be optimised +further there is still room to optimize the generation of the ecc codes. +We can simply calculate the total parity. If this is 0 then rp4 = rp5 +etc. If the parity is 1, then rp4 = !rp5; + +But if rp4 = rp5 we do not need rp5 etc. We can just write the even bits +in the result byte and then do something like:: + + code[0] |= (code[0] << 1); + +Lets test this. + + +Attempt 9 +========= + +Changed the code but again this slightly degrades performance. Tried all +kind of other things, like having dedicated parity arrays to avoid the +shift after parity[rp7] << 7; No gain. +Change the lookup using the parity array by using shift operators (e.g. +replace parity[rp7] << 7 with:: + + rp7 ^= (rp7 << 4); + rp7 ^= (rp7 << 2); + rp7 ^= (rp7 << 1); + rp7 &= 0x80; + +No gain. + +The only marginal change was inverting the parity bits, so we can remove +the last three invert statements. + +Ah well, pity this does not deliver more. Then again 10 million +iterations using the linux driver code takes between 13 and 13.5 +seconds, whereas my code now takes about 0.73 seconds for those 10 +million iterations. So basically I've improved the performance by a +factor 18 on my system. Not that bad. Of course on different hardware +you will get different results. No warranties! + +But of course there is no such thing as a free lunch. The codesize almost +tripled (from 562 bytes to 1434 bytes). Then again, it is not that much. + + +Correcting errors +================= + +For correcting errors I again used the ST application note as a starter, +but I also peeked at the existing code. + +The algorithm itself is pretty straightforward. Just xor the given and +the calculated ecc. If all bytes are 0 there is no problem. If 11 bits +are 1 we have one correctable bit error. If there is 1 bit 1, we have an +error in the given ecc code. + +It proved to be fastest to do some table lookups. Performance gain +introduced by this is about a factor 2 on my system when a repair had to +be done, and 1% or so if no repair had to be done. + +Code size increased from 330 bytes to 686 bytes for this function. +(gcc 4.2, -O3) + + +Conclusion +========== + +The gain when calculating the ecc is tremendous. Om my development hardware +a speedup of a factor of 18 for ecc calculation was achieved. On a test on an +embedded system with a MIPS core a factor 7 was obtained. + +On a test with a Linksys NSLU2 (ARMv5TE processor) the speedup was a factor +5 (big endian mode, gcc 4.1.2, -O3) + +For correction not much gain could be obtained (as bitflips are rare). Then +again there are also much less cycles spent there. + +It seems there is not much more gain possible in this, at least when +programmed in C. Of course it might be possible to squeeze something more +out of it with an assembler program, but due to pipeline behaviour etc +this is very tricky (at least for intel hw). + +Author: Frans Meulenbroeks + +Copyright (C) 2008 Koninklijke Philips Electronics NV. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/mtd/spi-nor.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/mtd/spi-nor.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f5333e3bf486 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/mtd/spi-nor.rst @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +================= +SPI NOR framework +================= + +Part I - Why do we need this framework? +--------------------------------------- + +SPI bus controllers (drivers/spi/) only deal with streams of bytes; the bus +controller operates agnostic of the specific device attached. However, some +controllers (such as Freescale's QuadSPI controller) cannot easily handle +arbitrary streams of bytes, but rather are designed specifically for SPI NOR. + +In particular, Freescale's QuadSPI controller must know the NOR commands to +find the right LUT sequence. Unfortunately, the SPI subsystem has no notion of +opcodes, addresses, or data payloads; a SPI controller simply knows to send or +receive bytes (Tx and Rx). Therefore, we must define a new layering scheme under +which the controller driver is aware of the opcodes, addressing, and other +details of the SPI NOR protocol. + +Part II - How does the framework work? +-------------------------------------- + +This framework just adds a new layer between the MTD and the SPI bus driver. +With this new layer, the SPI NOR controller driver does not depend on the +m25p80 code anymore. + +Before this framework, the layer is like:: + + MTD + ------------------------ + m25p80 + ------------------------ + SPI bus driver + ------------------------ + SPI NOR chip + + After this framework, the layer is like: + MTD + ------------------------ + SPI NOR framework + ------------------------ + m25p80 + ------------------------ + SPI bus driver + ------------------------ + SPI NOR chip + + With the SPI NOR controller driver (Freescale QuadSPI), it looks like: + MTD + ------------------------ + SPI NOR framework + ------------------------ + fsl-quadSPI + ------------------------ + SPI NOR chip + +Part III - How can drivers use the framework? +--------------------------------------------- + +The main API is spi_nor_scan(). Before you call the hook, a driver should +initialize the necessary fields for spi_nor{}. Please see +drivers/mtd/spi-nor/spi-nor.c for detail. Please also refer to fsl-quadspi.c +when you want to write a new driver for a SPI NOR controller. +Another API is spi_nor_restore(), this is used to restore the status of SPI +flash chip such as addressing mode. Call it whenever detach the driver from +device or reboot the system. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/nfc/index.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/nfc/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b6e9eedbff29 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/nfc/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +======================== +Near Field Communication +======================== + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 1 + + nfc-hci + nfc-pn544 diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/nfc/nfc-hci.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/nfc/nfc-hci.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..eb8a1a14e919 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/nfc/nfc-hci.rst @@ -0,0 +1,311 @@ +======================== +HCI backend for NFC Core +======================== + +- Author: Eric Lapuyade, Samuel Ortiz +- Contact: eric.lapuyade@intel.com, samuel.ortiz@intel.com + +General +------- + +The HCI layer implements much of the ETSI TS 102 622 V10.2.0 specification. It +enables easy writing of HCI-based NFC drivers. The HCI layer runs as an NFC Core +backend, implementing an abstract nfc device and translating NFC Core API +to HCI commands and events. + +HCI +--- + +HCI registers as an nfc device with NFC Core. Requests coming from userspace are +routed through netlink sockets to NFC Core and then to HCI. From this point, +they are translated in a sequence of HCI commands sent to the HCI layer in the +host controller (the chip). Commands can be executed synchronously (the sending +context blocks waiting for response) or asynchronously (the response is returned +from HCI Rx context). +HCI events can also be received from the host controller. They will be handled +and a translation will be forwarded to NFC Core as needed. There are hooks to +let the HCI driver handle proprietary events or override standard behavior. +HCI uses 2 execution contexts: + +- one for executing commands : nfc_hci_msg_tx_work(). Only one command + can be executing at any given moment. +- one for dispatching received events and commands : nfc_hci_msg_rx_work(). + +HCI Session initialization +-------------------------- + +The Session initialization is an HCI standard which must unfortunately +support proprietary gates. This is the reason why the driver will pass a list +of proprietary gates that must be part of the session. HCI will ensure all +those gates have pipes connected when the hci device is set up. +In case the chip supports pre-opened gates and pseudo-static pipes, the driver +can pass that information to HCI core. + +HCI Gates and Pipes +------------------- + +A gate defines the 'port' where some service can be found. In order to access +a service, one must create a pipe to that gate and open it. In this +implementation, pipes are totally hidden. The public API only knows gates. +This is consistent with the driver need to send commands to proprietary gates +without knowing the pipe connected to it. + +Driver interface +---------------- + +A driver is generally written in two parts : the physical link management and +the HCI management. This makes it easier to maintain a driver for a chip that +can be connected using various phy (i2c, spi, ...) + +HCI Management +-------------- + +A driver would normally register itself with HCI and provide the following +entry points:: + + struct nfc_hci_ops { + int (*open)(struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev); + void (*close)(struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev); + int (*hci_ready) (struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev); + int (*xmit) (struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, struct sk_buff *skb); + int (*start_poll) (struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, + u32 im_protocols, u32 tm_protocols); + int (*dep_link_up)(struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, struct nfc_target *target, + u8 comm_mode, u8 *gb, size_t gb_len); + int (*dep_link_down)(struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev); + int (*target_from_gate) (struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, u8 gate, + struct nfc_target *target); + int (*complete_target_discovered) (struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, u8 gate, + struct nfc_target *target); + int (*im_transceive) (struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, + struct nfc_target *target, struct sk_buff *skb, + data_exchange_cb_t cb, void *cb_context); + int (*tm_send)(struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, struct sk_buff *skb); + int (*check_presence)(struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, + struct nfc_target *target); + int (*event_received)(struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, u8 gate, u8 event, + struct sk_buff *skb); + }; + +- open() and close() shall turn the hardware on and off. +- hci_ready() is an optional entry point that is called right after the hci + session has been set up. The driver can use it to do additional initialization + that must be performed using HCI commands. +- xmit() shall simply write a frame to the physical link. +- start_poll() is an optional entrypoint that shall set the hardware in polling + mode. This must be implemented only if the hardware uses proprietary gates or a + mechanism slightly different from the HCI standard. +- dep_link_up() is called after a p2p target has been detected, to finish + the p2p connection setup with hardware parameters that need to be passed back + to nfc core. +- dep_link_down() is called to bring the p2p link down. +- target_from_gate() is an optional entrypoint to return the nfc protocols + corresponding to a proprietary gate. +- complete_target_discovered() is an optional entry point to let the driver + perform additional proprietary processing necessary to auto activate the + discovered target. +- im_transceive() must be implemented by the driver if proprietary HCI commands + are required to send data to the tag. Some tag types will require custom + commands, others can be written to using the standard HCI commands. The driver + can check the tag type and either do proprietary processing, or return 1 to ask + for standard processing. The data exchange command itself must be sent + asynchronously. +- tm_send() is called to send data in the case of a p2p connection +- check_presence() is an optional entry point that will be called regularly + by the core to check that an activated tag is still in the field. If this is + not implemented, the core will not be able to push tag_lost events to the user + space +- event_received() is called to handle an event coming from the chip. Driver + can handle the event or return 1 to let HCI attempt standard processing. + +On the rx path, the driver is responsible to push incoming HCP frames to HCI +using nfc_hci_recv_frame(). HCI will take care of re-aggregation and handling +This must be done from a context that can sleep. + +PHY Management +-------------- + +The physical link (i2c, ...) management is defined by the following structure:: + + struct nfc_phy_ops { + int (*write)(void *dev_id, struct sk_buff *skb); + int (*enable)(void *dev_id); + void (*disable)(void *dev_id); + }; + +enable(): + turn the phy on (power on), make it ready to transfer data +disable(): + turn the phy off +write(): + Send a data frame to the chip. Note that to enable higher + layers such as an llc to store the frame for re-emission, this + function must not alter the skb. It must also not return a positive + result (return 0 for success, negative for failure). + +Data coming from the chip shall be sent directly to nfc_hci_recv_frame(). + +LLC +--- + +Communication between the CPU and the chip often requires some link layer +protocol. Those are isolated as modules managed by the HCI layer. There are +currently two modules : nop (raw transfert) and shdlc. +A new llc must implement the following functions:: + + struct nfc_llc_ops { + void *(*init) (struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, xmit_to_drv_t xmit_to_drv, + rcv_to_hci_t rcv_to_hci, int tx_headroom, + int tx_tailroom, int *rx_headroom, int *rx_tailroom, + llc_failure_t llc_failure); + void (*deinit) (struct nfc_llc *llc); + int (*start) (struct nfc_llc *llc); + int (*stop) (struct nfc_llc *llc); + void (*rcv_from_drv) (struct nfc_llc *llc, struct sk_buff *skb); + int (*xmit_from_hci) (struct nfc_llc *llc, struct sk_buff *skb); + }; + +init(): + allocate and init your private storage +deinit(): + cleanup +start(): + establish the logical connection +stop (): + terminate the logical connection +rcv_from_drv(): + handle data coming from the chip, going to HCI +xmit_from_hci(): + handle data sent by HCI, going to the chip + +The llc must be registered with nfc before it can be used. Do that by +calling:: + + nfc_llc_register(const char *name, struct nfc_llc_ops *ops); + +Again, note that the llc does not handle the physical link. It is thus very +easy to mix any physical link with any llc for a given chip driver. + +Included Drivers +---------------- + +An HCI based driver for an NXP PN544, connected through I2C bus, and using +shdlc is included. + +Execution Contexts +------------------ + +The execution contexts are the following: +- IRQ handler (IRQH): +fast, cannot sleep. sends incoming frames to HCI where they are passed to +the current llc. In case of shdlc, the frame is queued in shdlc rx queue. + +- SHDLC State Machine worker (SMW) + + Only when llc_shdlc is used: handles shdlc rx & tx queues. + + Dispatches HCI cmd responses. + +- HCI Tx Cmd worker (MSGTXWQ) + + Serializes execution of HCI commands. + + Completes execution in case of response timeout. + +- HCI Rx worker (MSGRXWQ) + + Dispatches incoming HCI commands or events. + +- Syscall context from a userspace call (SYSCALL) + + Any entrypoint in HCI called from NFC Core + +Workflow executing an HCI command (using shdlc) +----------------------------------------------- + +Executing an HCI command can easily be performed synchronously using the +following API:: + + int nfc_hci_send_cmd (struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, u8 gate, u8 cmd, + const u8 *param, size_t param_len, struct sk_buff **skb) + +The API must be invoked from a context that can sleep. Most of the time, this +will be the syscall context. skb will return the result that was received in +the response. + +Internally, execution is asynchronous. So all this API does is to enqueue the +HCI command, setup a local wait queue on stack, and wait_event() for completion. +The wait is not interruptible because it is guaranteed that the command will +complete after some short timeout anyway. + +MSGTXWQ context will then be scheduled and invoke nfc_hci_msg_tx_work(). +This function will dequeue the next pending command and send its HCP fragments +to the lower layer which happens to be shdlc. It will then start a timer to be +able to complete the command with a timeout error if no response arrive. + +SMW context gets scheduled and invokes nfc_shdlc_sm_work(). This function +handles shdlc framing in and out. It uses the driver xmit to send frames and +receives incoming frames in an skb queue filled from the driver IRQ handler. +SHDLC I(nformation) frames payload are HCP fragments. They are aggregated to +form complete HCI frames, which can be a response, command, or event. + +HCI Responses are dispatched immediately from this context to unblock +waiting command execution. Response processing involves invoking the completion +callback that was provided by nfc_hci_msg_tx_work() when it sent the command. +The completion callback will then wake the syscall context. + +It is also possible to execute the command asynchronously using this API:: + + static int nfc_hci_execute_cmd_async(struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, u8 pipe, u8 cmd, + const u8 *param, size_t param_len, + data_exchange_cb_t cb, void *cb_context) + +The workflow is the same, except that the API call returns immediately, and +the callback will be called with the result from the SMW context. + +Workflow receiving an HCI event or command +------------------------------------------ + +HCI commands or events are not dispatched from SMW context. Instead, they are +queued to HCI rx_queue and will be dispatched from HCI rx worker +context (MSGRXWQ). This is done this way to allow a cmd or event handler +to also execute other commands (for example, handling the +NFC_HCI_EVT_TARGET_DISCOVERED event from PN544 requires to issue an +ANY_GET_PARAMETER to the reader A gate to get information on the target +that was discovered). + +Typically, such an event will be propagated to NFC Core from MSGRXWQ context. + +Error management +---------------- + +Errors that occur synchronously with the execution of an NFC Core request are +simply returned as the execution result of the request. These are easy. + +Errors that occur asynchronously (e.g. in a background protocol handling thread) +must be reported such that upper layers don't stay ignorant that something +went wrong below and know that expected events will probably never happen. +Handling of these errors is done as follows: + +- driver (pn544) fails to deliver an incoming frame: it stores the error such + that any subsequent call to the driver will result in this error. Then it + calls the standard nfc_shdlc_recv_frame() with a NULL argument to report the + problem above. shdlc stores a EREMOTEIO sticky status, which will trigger + SMW to report above in turn. + +- SMW is basically a background thread to handle incoming and outgoing shdlc + frames. This thread will also check the shdlc sticky status and report to HCI + when it discovers it is not able to run anymore because of an unrecoverable + error that happened within shdlc or below. If the problem occurs during shdlc + connection, the error is reported through the connect completion. + +- HCI: if an internal HCI error happens (frame is lost), or HCI is reported an + error from a lower layer, HCI will either complete the currently executing + command with that error, or notify NFC Core directly if no command is + executing. + +- NFC Core: when NFC Core is notified of an error from below and polling is + active, it will send a tag discovered event with an empty tag list to the user + space to let it know that the poll operation will never be able to detect a + tag. If polling is not active and the error was sticky, lower levels will + return it at next invocation. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/nfc/nfc-pn544.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/nfc/nfc-pn544.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6b2d8aae0c4e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/nfc/nfc-pn544.rst @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +============================================================================ +Kernel driver for the NXP Semiconductors PN544 Near Field Communication chip +============================================================================ + + +General +------- + +The PN544 is an integrated transmission module for contactless +communication. The driver goes under drives/nfc/ and is compiled as a +module named "pn544". + +Host Interfaces: I2C, SPI and HSU, this driver supports currently only I2C. + +Protocols +--------- + +In the normal (HCI) mode and in the firmware update mode read and +write functions behave a bit differently because the message formats +or the protocols are different. + +In the normal (HCI) mode the protocol used is derived from the ETSI +HCI specification. The firmware is updated using a specific protocol, +which is different from HCI. + +HCI messages consist of an eight bit header and the message body. The +header contains the message length. Maximum size for an HCI message is +33. In HCI mode sent messages are tested for a correct +checksum. Firmware update messages have the length in the second (MSB) +and third (LSB) bytes of the message. The maximum FW message length is +1024 bytes. + +For the ETSI HCI specification see +http://www.etsi.org/WebSite/Technologies/ProtocolSpecification.aspx diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/ntb.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/ntb.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..074a423c853c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/ntb.rst @@ -0,0 +1,236 @@ +=========== +NTB Drivers +=========== + +NTB (Non-Transparent Bridge) is a type of PCI-Express bridge chip that connects +the separate memory systems of two or more computers to the same PCI-Express +fabric. Existing NTB hardware supports a common feature set: doorbell +registers and memory translation windows, as well as non common features like +scratchpad and message registers. Scratchpad registers are read-and-writable +registers that are accessible from either side of the device, so that peers can +exchange a small amount of information at a fixed address. Message registers can +be utilized for the same purpose. Additionally they are provided with with +special status bits to make sure the information isn't rewritten by another +peer. Doorbell registers provide a way for peers to send interrupt events. +Memory windows allow translated read and write access to the peer memory. + +NTB Core Driver (ntb) +===================== + +The NTB core driver defines an api wrapping the common feature set, and allows +clients interested in NTB features to discover NTB the devices supported by +hardware drivers. The term "client" is used here to mean an upper layer +component making use of the NTB api. The term "driver," or "hardware driver," +is used here to mean a driver for a specific vendor and model of NTB hardware. + +NTB Client Drivers +================== + +NTB client drivers should register with the NTB core driver. After +registering, the client probe and remove functions will be called appropriately +as ntb hardware, or hardware drivers, are inserted and removed. The +registration uses the Linux Device framework, so it should feel familiar to +anyone who has written a pci driver. + +NTB Typical client driver implementation +---------------------------------------- + +Primary purpose of NTB is to share some peace of memory between at least two +systems. So the NTB device features like Scratchpad/Message registers are +mainly used to perform the proper memory window initialization. Typically +there are two types of memory window interfaces supported by the NTB API: +inbound translation configured on the local ntb port and outbound translation +configured by the peer, on the peer ntb port. The first type is +depicted on the next figure:: + + Inbound translation: + + Memory: Local NTB Port: Peer NTB Port: Peer MMIO: + ____________ + | dma-mapped |-ntb_mw_set_trans(addr) | + | memory | _v____________ | ______________ + | (addr) |<======| MW xlat addr |<====| MW base addr |<== memory-mapped IO + |------------| |--------------| | |--------------| + +So typical scenario of the first type memory window initialization looks: +1) allocate a memory region, 2) put translated address to NTB config, +3) somehow notify a peer device of performed initialization, 4) peer device +maps corresponding outbound memory window so to have access to the shared +memory region. + +The second type of interface, that implies the shared windows being +initialized by a peer device, is depicted on the figure:: + + Outbound translation: + + Memory: Local NTB Port: Peer NTB Port: Peer MMIO: + ____________ ______________ + | dma-mapped | | | MW base addr |<== memory-mapped IO + | memory | | |--------------| + | (addr) |<===================| MW xlat addr |<-ntb_peer_mw_set_trans(addr) + |------------| | |--------------| + +Typical scenario of the second type interface initialization would be: +1) allocate a memory region, 2) somehow deliver a translated address to a peer +device, 3) peer puts the translated address to NTB config, 4) peer device maps +outbound memory window so to have access to the shared memory region. + +As one can see the described scenarios can be combined in one portable +algorithm. + + Local device: + 1) Allocate memory for a shared window + 2) Initialize memory window by translated address of the allocated region + (it may fail if local memory window initialization is unsupported) + 3) Send the translated address and memory window index to a peer device + + Peer device: + 1) Initialize memory window with retrieved address of the allocated + by another device memory region (it may fail if peer memory window + initialization is unsupported) + 2) Map outbound memory window + +In accordance with this scenario, the NTB Memory Window API can be used as +follows: + + Local device: + 1) ntb_mw_count(pidx) - retrieve number of memory ranges, which can + be allocated for memory windows between local device and peer device + of port with specified index. + 2) ntb_get_align(pidx, midx) - retrieve parameters restricting the + shared memory region alignment and size. Then memory can be properly + allocated. + 3) Allocate physically contiguous memory region in compliance with + restrictions retrieved in 2). + 4) ntb_mw_set_trans(pidx, midx) - try to set translation address of + the memory window with specified index for the defined peer device + (it may fail if local translated address setting is not supported) + 5) Send translated base address (usually together with memory window + number) to the peer device using, for instance, scratchpad or message + registers. + + Peer device: + 1) ntb_peer_mw_set_trans(pidx, midx) - try to set received from other + device (related to pidx) translated address for specified memory + window. It may fail if retrieved address, for instance, exceeds + maximum possible address or isn't properly aligned. + 2) ntb_peer_mw_get_addr(widx) - retrieve MMIO address to map the memory + window so to have an access to the shared memory. + +Also it is worth to note, that method ntb_mw_count(pidx) should return the +same value as ntb_peer_mw_count() on the peer with port index - pidx. + +NTB Transport Client (ntb\_transport) and NTB Netdev (ntb\_netdev) +------------------------------------------------------------------ + +The primary client for NTB is the Transport client, used in tandem with NTB +Netdev. These drivers function together to create a logical link to the peer, +across the ntb, to exchange packets of network data. The Transport client +establishes a logical link to the peer, and creates queue pairs to exchange +messages and data. The NTB Netdev then creates an ethernet device using a +Transport queue pair. Network data is copied between socket buffers and the +Transport queue pair buffer. The Transport client may be used for other things +besides Netdev, however no other applications have yet been written. + +NTB Ping Pong Test Client (ntb\_pingpong) +----------------------------------------- + +The Ping Pong test client serves as a demonstration to exercise the doorbell +and scratchpad registers of NTB hardware, and as an example simple NTB client. +Ping Pong enables the link when started, waits for the NTB link to come up, and +then proceeds to read and write the doorbell scratchpad registers of the NTB. +The peers interrupt each other using a bit mask of doorbell bits, which is +shifted by one in each round, to test the behavior of multiple doorbell bits +and interrupt vectors. The Ping Pong driver also reads the first local +scratchpad, and writes the value plus one to the first peer scratchpad, each +round before writing the peer doorbell register. + +Module Parameters: + +* unsafe - Some hardware has known issues with scratchpad and doorbell + registers. By default, Ping Pong will not attempt to exercise such + hardware. You may override this behavior at your own risk by setting + unsafe=1. +* delay\_ms - Specify the delay between receiving a doorbell + interrupt event and setting the peer doorbell register for the next + round. +* init\_db - Specify the doorbell bits to start new series of rounds. A new + series begins once all the doorbell bits have been shifted out of + range. +* dyndbg - It is suggested to specify dyndbg=+p when loading this module, and + then to observe debugging output on the console. + +NTB Tool Test Client (ntb\_tool) +-------------------------------- + +The Tool test client serves for debugging, primarily, ntb hardware and drivers. +The Tool provides access through debugfs for reading, setting, and clearing the +NTB doorbell, and reading and writing scratchpads. + +The Tool does not currently have any module parameters. + +Debugfs Files: + +* *debugfs*/ntb\_tool/*hw*/ + A directory in debugfs will be created for each + NTB device probed by the tool. This directory is shortened to *hw* + below. +* *hw*/db + This file is used to read, set, and clear the local doorbell. Not + all operations may be supported by all hardware. To read the doorbell, + read the file. To set the doorbell, write `s` followed by the bits to + set (eg: `echo 's 0x0101' > db`). To clear the doorbell, write `c` + followed by the bits to clear. +* *hw*/mask + This file is used to read, set, and clear the local doorbell mask. + See *db* for details. +* *hw*/peer\_db + This file is used to read, set, and clear the peer doorbell. + See *db* for details. +* *hw*/peer\_mask + This file is used to read, set, and clear the peer doorbell + mask. See *db* for details. +* *hw*/spad + This file is used to read and write local scratchpads. To read + the values of all scratchpads, read the file. To write values, write a + series of pairs of scratchpad number and value + (eg: `echo '4 0x123 7 0xabc' > spad` + # to set scratchpads `4` and `7` to `0x123` and `0xabc`, respectively). +* *hw*/peer\_spad + This file is used to read and write peer scratchpads. See + *spad* for details. + +NTB Hardware Drivers +==================== + +NTB hardware drivers should register devices with the NTB core driver. After +registering, clients probe and remove functions will be called. + +NTB Intel Hardware Driver (ntb\_hw\_intel) +------------------------------------------ + +The Intel hardware driver supports NTB on Xeon and Atom CPUs. + +Module Parameters: + +* b2b\_mw\_idx + If the peer ntb is to be accessed via a memory window, then use + this memory window to access the peer ntb. A value of zero or positive + starts from the first mw idx, and a negative value starts from the last + mw idx. Both sides MUST set the same value here! The default value is + `-1`. +* b2b\_mw\_share + If the peer ntb is to be accessed via a memory window, and if + the memory window is large enough, still allow the client to use the + second half of the memory window for address translation to the peer. +* xeon\_b2b\_usd\_bar2\_addr64 + If using B2B topology on Xeon hardware, use + this 64 bit address on the bus between the NTB devices for the window + at BAR2, on the upstream side of the link. +* xeon\_b2b\_usd\_bar4\_addr64 - See *xeon\_b2b\_bar2\_addr64*. +* xeon\_b2b\_usd\_bar4\_addr32 - See *xeon\_b2b\_bar2\_addr64*. +* xeon\_b2b\_usd\_bar5\_addr32 - See *xeon\_b2b\_bar2\_addr64*. +* xeon\_b2b\_dsd\_bar2\_addr64 - See *xeon\_b2b\_bar2\_addr64*. +* xeon\_b2b\_dsd\_bar4\_addr64 - See *xeon\_b2b\_bar2\_addr64*. +* xeon\_b2b\_dsd\_bar4\_addr32 - See *xeon\_b2b\_bar2\_addr64*. +* xeon\_b2b\_dsd\_bar5\_addr32 - See *xeon\_b2b\_bar2\_addr64*. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/nvdimm/btt.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/nvdimm/btt.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..107395c042ae --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/nvdimm/btt.rst @@ -0,0 +1,285 @@ +============================= +BTT - Block Translation Table +============================= + + +1. Introduction +=============== + +Persistent memory based storage is able to perform IO at byte (or more +accurately, cache line) granularity. However, we often want to expose such +storage as traditional block devices. The block drivers for persistent memory +will do exactly this. However, they do not provide any atomicity guarantees. +Traditional SSDs typically provide protection against torn sectors in hardware, +using stored energy in capacitors to complete in-flight block writes, or perhaps +in firmware. We don't have this luxury with persistent memory - if a write is in +progress, and we experience a power failure, the block will contain a mix of old +and new data. Applications may not be prepared to handle such a scenario. + +The Block Translation Table (BTT) provides atomic sector update semantics for +persistent memory devices, so that applications that rely on sector writes not +being torn can continue to do so. The BTT manifests itself as a stacked block +device, and reserves a portion of the underlying storage for its metadata. At +the heart of it, is an indirection table that re-maps all the blocks on the +volume. It can be thought of as an extremely simple file system that only +provides atomic sector updates. + + +2. Static Layout +================ + +The underlying storage on which a BTT can be laid out is not limited in any way. +The BTT, however, splits the available space into chunks of up to 512 GiB, +called "Arenas". + +Each arena follows the same layout for its metadata, and all references in an +arena are internal to it (with the exception of one field that points to the +next arena). The following depicts the "On-disk" metadata layout:: + + + Backing Store +-------> Arena + +---------------+ | +------------------+ + | | | | Arena info block | + | Arena 0 +---+ | 4K | + | 512G | +------------------+ + | | | | + +---------------+ | | + | | | | + | Arena 1 | | Data Blocks | + | 512G | | | + | | | | + +---------------+ | | + | . | | | + | . | | | + | . | | | + | | | | + | | | | + +---------------+ +------------------+ + | | + | BTT Map | + | | + | | + +------------------+ + | | + | BTT Flog | + | | + +------------------+ + | Info block copy | + | 4K | + +------------------+ + + +3. Theory of Operation +====================== + + +a. The BTT Map +-------------- + +The map is a simple lookup/indirection table that maps an LBA to an internal +block. Each map entry is 32 bits. The two most significant bits are special +flags, and the remaining form the internal block number. + +======== ============================================================= +Bit Description +======== ============================================================= +31 - 30 Error and Zero flags - Used in the following way:: + + == == ==================================================== + 31 30 Description + == == ==================================================== + 0 0 Initial state. Reads return zeroes; Premap = Postmap + 0 1 Zero state: Reads return zeroes + 1 0 Error state: Reads fail; Writes clear 'E' bit + 1 1 Normal Block – has valid postmap + == == ==================================================== + +29 - 0 Mappings to internal 'postmap' blocks +======== ============================================================= + + +Some of the terminology that will be subsequently used: + +============ ================================================================ +External LBA LBA as made visible to upper layers. +ABA Arena Block Address - Block offset/number within an arena +Premap ABA The block offset into an arena, which was decided upon by range + checking the External LBA +Postmap ABA The block number in the "Data Blocks" area obtained after + indirection from the map +nfree The number of free blocks that are maintained at any given time. + This is the number of concurrent writes that can happen to the + arena. +============ ================================================================ + + +For example, after adding a BTT, we surface a disk of 1024G. We get a read for +the external LBA at 768G. This falls into the second arena, and of the 512G +worth of blocks that this arena contributes, this block is at 256G. Thus, the +premap ABA is 256G. We now refer to the map, and find out the mapping for block +'X' (256G) points to block 'Y', say '64'. Thus the postmap ABA is 64. + + +b. The BTT Flog +--------------- + +The BTT provides sector atomicity by making every write an "allocating write", +i.e. Every write goes to a "free" block. A running list of free blocks is +maintained in the form of the BTT flog. 'Flog' is a combination of the words +"free list" and "log". The flog contains 'nfree' entries, and an entry contains: + +======== ===================================================================== +lba The premap ABA that is being written to +old_map The old postmap ABA - after 'this' write completes, this will be a + free block. +new_map The new postmap ABA. The map will up updated to reflect this + lba->postmap_aba mapping, but we log it here in case we have to + recover. +seq Sequence number to mark which of the 2 sections of this flog entry is + valid/newest. It cycles between 01->10->11->01 (binary) under normal + operation, with 00 indicating an uninitialized state. +lba' alternate lba entry +old_map' alternate old postmap entry +new_map' alternate new postmap entry +seq' alternate sequence number. +======== ===================================================================== + +Each of the above fields is 32-bit, making one entry 32 bytes. Entries are also +padded to 64 bytes to avoid cache line sharing or aliasing. Flog updates are +done such that for any entry being written, it: +a. overwrites the 'old' section in the entry based on sequence numbers +b. writes the 'new' section such that the sequence number is written last. + + +c. The concept of lanes +----------------------- + +While 'nfree' describes the number of concurrent IOs an arena can process +concurrently, 'nlanes' is the number of IOs the BTT device as a whole can +process:: + + nlanes = min(nfree, num_cpus) + +A lane number is obtained at the start of any IO, and is used for indexing into +all the on-disk and in-memory data structures for the duration of the IO. If +there are more CPUs than the max number of available lanes, than lanes are +protected by spinlocks. + + +d. In-memory data structure: Read Tracking Table (RTT) +------------------------------------------------------ + +Consider a case where we have two threads, one doing reads and the other, +writes. We can hit a condition where the writer thread grabs a free block to do +a new IO, but the (slow) reader thread is still reading from it. In other words, +the reader consulted a map entry, and started reading the corresponding block. A +writer started writing to the same external LBA, and finished the write updating +the map for that external LBA to point to its new postmap ABA. At this point the +internal, postmap block that the reader is (still) reading has been inserted +into the list of free blocks. If another write comes in for the same LBA, it can +grab this free block, and start writing to it, causing the reader to read +incorrect data. To prevent this, we introduce the RTT. + +The RTT is a simple, per arena table with 'nfree' entries. Every reader inserts +into rtt[lane_number], the postmap ABA it is reading, and clears it after the +read is complete. Every writer thread, after grabbing a free block, checks the +RTT for its presence. If the postmap free block is in the RTT, it waits till the +reader clears the RTT entry, and only then starts writing to it. + + +e. In-memory data structure: map locks +-------------------------------------- + +Consider a case where two writer threads are writing to the same LBA. There can +be a race in the following sequence of steps:: + + free[lane] = map[premap_aba] + map[premap_aba] = postmap_aba + +Both threads can update their respective free[lane] with the same old, freed +postmap_aba. This has made the layout inconsistent by losing a free entry, and +at the same time, duplicating another free entry for two lanes. + +To solve this, we could have a single map lock (per arena) that has to be taken +before performing the above sequence, but we feel that could be too contentious. +Instead we use an array of (nfree) map_locks that is indexed by +(premap_aba modulo nfree). + + +f. Reconstruction from the Flog +------------------------------- + +On startup, we analyze the BTT flog to create our list of free blocks. We walk +through all the entries, and for each lane, of the set of two possible +'sections', we always look at the most recent one only (based on the sequence +number). The reconstruction rules/steps are simple: + +- Read map[log_entry.lba]. +- If log_entry.new matches the map entry, then log_entry.old is free. +- If log_entry.new does not match the map entry, then log_entry.new is free. + (This case can only be caused by power-fails/unsafe shutdowns) + + +g. Summarizing - Read and Write flows +------------------------------------- + +Read: + +1. Convert external LBA to arena number + pre-map ABA +2. Get a lane (and take lane_lock) +3. Read map to get the entry for this pre-map ABA +4. Enter post-map ABA into RTT[lane] +5. If TRIM flag set in map, return zeroes, and end IO (go to step 8) +6. If ERROR flag set in map, end IO with EIO (go to step 8) +7. Read data from this block +8. Remove post-map ABA entry from RTT[lane] +9. Release lane (and lane_lock) + +Write: + +1. Convert external LBA to Arena number + pre-map ABA +2. Get a lane (and take lane_lock) +3. Use lane to index into in-memory free list and obtain a new block, next flog + index, next sequence number +4. Scan the RTT to check if free block is present, and spin/wait if it is. +5. Write data to this free block +6. Read map to get the existing post-map ABA entry for this pre-map ABA +7. Write flog entry: [premap_aba / old postmap_aba / new postmap_aba / seq_num] +8. Write new post-map ABA into map. +9. Write old post-map entry into the free list +10. Calculate next sequence number and write into the free list entry +11. Release lane (and lane_lock) + + +4. Error Handling +================= + +An arena would be in an error state if any of the metadata is corrupted +irrecoverably, either due to a bug or a media error. The following conditions +indicate an error: + +- Info block checksum does not match (and recovering from the copy also fails) +- All internal available blocks are not uniquely and entirely addressed by the + sum of mapped blocks and free blocks (from the BTT flog). +- Rebuilding free list from the flog reveals missing/duplicate/impossible + entries +- A map entry is out of bounds + +If any of these error conditions are encountered, the arena is put into a read +only state using a flag in the info block. + + +5. Usage +======== + +The BTT can be set up on any disk (namespace) exposed by the libnvdimm subsystem +(pmem, or blk mode). The easiest way to set up such a namespace is using the +'ndctl' utility [1]: + +For example, the ndctl command line to setup a btt with a 4k sector size is:: + + ndctl create-namespace -f -e namespace0.0 -m sector -l 4k + +See ndctl create-namespace --help for more options. + +[1]: https://github.com/pmem/ndctl diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/nvdimm/index.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/nvdimm/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a4f8f98aeb94 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/nvdimm/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +=================================== +Non-Volatile Memory Device (NVDIMM) +=================================== + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 1 + + nvdimm + btt + security diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/nvdimm/nvdimm.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/nvdimm/nvdimm.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..08f855cbb4e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/nvdimm/nvdimm.rst @@ -0,0 +1,887 @@ +=============================== +LIBNVDIMM: Non-Volatile Devices +=============================== + +libnvdimm - kernel / libndctl - userspace helper library + +linux-nvdimm@lists.01.org + +Version 13 + +.. contents: + + Glossary + Overview + Supporting Documents + Git Trees + LIBNVDIMM PMEM and BLK + Why BLK? + PMEM vs BLK + BLK-REGIONs, PMEM-REGIONs, Atomic Sectors, and DAX + Example NVDIMM Platform + LIBNVDIMM Kernel Device Model and LIBNDCTL Userspace API + LIBNDCTL: Context + libndctl: instantiate a new library context example + LIBNVDIMM/LIBNDCTL: Bus + libnvdimm: control class device in /sys/class + libnvdimm: bus + libndctl: bus enumeration example + LIBNVDIMM/LIBNDCTL: DIMM (NMEM) + libnvdimm: DIMM (NMEM) + libndctl: DIMM enumeration example + LIBNVDIMM/LIBNDCTL: Region + libnvdimm: region + libndctl: region enumeration example + Why Not Encode the Region Type into the Region Name? + How Do I Determine the Major Type of a Region? + LIBNVDIMM/LIBNDCTL: Namespace + libnvdimm: namespace + libndctl: namespace enumeration example + libndctl: namespace creation example + Why the Term "namespace"? + LIBNVDIMM/LIBNDCTL: Block Translation Table "btt" + libnvdimm: btt layout + libndctl: btt creation example + Summary LIBNDCTL Diagram + + +Glossary +======== + +PMEM: + A system-physical-address range where writes are persistent. A + block device composed of PMEM is capable of DAX. A PMEM address range + may span an interleave of several DIMMs. + +BLK: + A set of one or more programmable memory mapped apertures provided + by a DIMM to access its media. This indirection precludes the + performance benefit of interleaving, but enables DIMM-bounded failure + modes. + +DPA: + DIMM Physical Address, is a DIMM-relative offset. With one DIMM in + the system there would be a 1:1 system-physical-address:DPA association. + Once more DIMMs are added a memory controller interleave must be + decoded to determine the DPA associated with a given + system-physical-address. BLK capacity always has a 1:1 relationship + with a single-DIMM's DPA range. + +DAX: + File system extensions to bypass the page cache and block layer to + mmap persistent memory, from a PMEM block device, directly into a + process address space. + +DSM: + Device Specific Method: ACPI method to to control specific + device - in this case the firmware. + +DCR: + NVDIMM Control Region Structure defined in ACPI 6 Section 5.2.25.5. + It defines a vendor-id, device-id, and interface format for a given DIMM. + +BTT: + Block Translation Table: Persistent memory is byte addressable. + Existing software may have an expectation that the power-fail-atomicity + of writes is at least one sector, 512 bytes. The BTT is an indirection + table with atomic update semantics to front a PMEM/BLK block device + driver and present arbitrary atomic sector sizes. + +LABEL: + Metadata stored on a DIMM device that partitions and identifies + (persistently names) storage between PMEM and BLK. It also partitions + BLK storage to host BTTs with different parameters per BLK-partition. + Note that traditional partition tables, GPT/MBR, are layered on top of a + BLK or PMEM device. + + +Overview +======== + +The LIBNVDIMM subsystem provides support for three types of NVDIMMs, namely, +PMEM, BLK, and NVDIMM devices that can simultaneously support both PMEM +and BLK mode access. These three modes of operation are described by +the "NVDIMM Firmware Interface Table" (NFIT) in ACPI 6. While the LIBNVDIMM +implementation is generic and supports pre-NFIT platforms, it was guided +by the superset of capabilities need to support this ACPI 6 definition +for NVDIMM resources. The bulk of the kernel implementation is in place +to handle the case where DPA accessible via PMEM is aliased with DPA +accessible via BLK. When that occurs a LABEL is needed to reserve DPA +for exclusive access via one mode a time. + +Supporting Documents +-------------------- + +ACPI 6: + http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/ACPI_6.0.pdf +NVDIMM Namespace: + http://pmem.io/documents/NVDIMM_Namespace_Spec.pdf +DSM Interface Example: + http://pmem.io/documents/NVDIMM_DSM_Interface_Example.pdf +Driver Writer's Guide: + http://pmem.io/documents/NVDIMM_Driver_Writers_Guide.pdf + +Git Trees +--------- + +LIBNVDIMM: + https://git.kernel.org/cgit/linux/kernel/git/djbw/nvdimm.git +LIBNDCTL: + https://github.com/pmem/ndctl.git +PMEM: + https://github.com/01org/prd + + +LIBNVDIMM PMEM and BLK +====================== + +Prior to the arrival of the NFIT, non-volatile memory was described to a +system in various ad-hoc ways. Usually only the bare minimum was +provided, namely, a single system-physical-address range where writes +are expected to be durable after a system power loss. Now, the NFIT +specification standardizes not only the description of PMEM, but also +BLK and platform message-passing entry points for control and +configuration. + +For each NVDIMM access method (PMEM, BLK), LIBNVDIMM provides a block +device driver: + + 1. PMEM (nd_pmem.ko): Drives a system-physical-address range. This + range is contiguous in system memory and may be interleaved (hardware + memory controller striped) across multiple DIMMs. When interleaved the + platform may optionally provide details of which DIMMs are participating + in the interleave. + + Note that while LIBNVDIMM describes system-physical-address ranges that may + alias with BLK access as ND_NAMESPACE_PMEM ranges and those without + alias as ND_NAMESPACE_IO ranges, to the nd_pmem driver there is no + distinction. The different device-types are an implementation detail + that userspace can exploit to implement policies like "only interface + with address ranges from certain DIMMs". It is worth noting that when + aliasing is present and a DIMM lacks a label, then no block device can + be created by default as userspace needs to do at least one allocation + of DPA to the PMEM range. In contrast ND_NAMESPACE_IO ranges, once + registered, can be immediately attached to nd_pmem. + + 2. BLK (nd_blk.ko): This driver performs I/O using a set of platform + defined apertures. A set of apertures will access just one DIMM. + Multiple windows (apertures) allow multiple concurrent accesses, much like + tagged-command-queuing, and would likely be used by different threads or + different CPUs. + + The NFIT specification defines a standard format for a BLK-aperture, but + the spec also allows for vendor specific layouts, and non-NFIT BLK + implementations may have other designs for BLK I/O. For this reason + "nd_blk" calls back into platform-specific code to perform the I/O. + + One such implementation is defined in the "Driver Writer's Guide" and "DSM + Interface Example". + + +Why BLK? +======== + +While PMEM provides direct byte-addressable CPU-load/store access to +NVDIMM storage, it does not provide the best system RAS (recovery, +availability, and serviceability) model. An access to a corrupted +system-physical-address address causes a CPU exception while an access +to a corrupted address through an BLK-aperture causes that block window +to raise an error status in a register. The latter is more aligned with +the standard error model that host-bus-adapter attached disks present. + +Also, if an administrator ever wants to replace a memory it is easier to +service a system at DIMM module boundaries. Compare this to PMEM where +data could be interleaved in an opaque hardware specific manner across +several DIMMs. + +PMEM vs BLK +----------- + +BLK-apertures solve these RAS problems, but their presence is also the +major contributing factor to the complexity of the ND subsystem. They +complicate the implementation because PMEM and BLK alias in DPA space. +Any given DIMM's DPA-range may contribute to one or more +system-physical-address sets of interleaved DIMMs, *and* may also be +accessed in its entirety through its BLK-aperture. Accessing a DPA +through a system-physical-address while simultaneously accessing the +same DPA through a BLK-aperture has undefined results. For this reason, +DIMMs with this dual interface configuration include a DSM function to +store/retrieve a LABEL. The LABEL effectively partitions the DPA-space +into exclusive system-physical-address and BLK-aperture accessible +regions. For simplicity a DIMM is allowed a PMEM "region" per each +interleave set in which it is a member. The remaining DPA space can be +carved into an arbitrary number of BLK devices with discontiguous +extents. + +BLK-REGIONs, PMEM-REGIONs, Atomic Sectors, and DAX +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +One of the few +reasons to allow multiple BLK namespaces per REGION is so that each +BLK-namespace can be configured with a BTT with unique atomic sector +sizes. While a PMEM device can host a BTT the LABEL specification does +not provide for a sector size to be specified for a PMEM namespace. + +This is due to the expectation that the primary usage model for PMEM is +via DAX, and the BTT is incompatible with DAX. However, for the cases +where an application or filesystem still needs atomic sector update +guarantees it can register a BTT on a PMEM device or partition. See +LIBNVDIMM/NDCTL: Block Translation Table "btt" + + +Example NVDIMM Platform +======================= + +For the remainder of this document the following diagram will be +referenced for any example sysfs layouts:: + + + (a) (b) DIMM BLK-REGION + +-------------------+--------+--------+--------+ + +------+ | pm0.0 | blk2.0 | pm1.0 | blk2.1 | 0 region2 + | imc0 +--+- - - region0- - - +--------+ +--------+ + +--+---+ | pm0.0 | blk3.0 | pm1.0 | blk3.1 | 1 region3 + | +-------------------+--------v v--------+ + +--+---+ | | + | cpu0 | region1 + +--+---+ | | + | +----------------------------^ ^--------+ + +--+---+ | blk4.0 | pm1.0 | blk4.0 | 2 region4 + | imc1 +--+----------------------------| +--------+ + +------+ | blk5.0 | pm1.0 | blk5.0 | 3 region5 + +----------------------------+--------+--------+ + +In this platform we have four DIMMs and two memory controllers in one +socket. Each unique interface (BLK or PMEM) to DPA space is identified +by a region device with a dynamically assigned id (REGION0 - REGION5). + + 1. The first portion of DIMM0 and DIMM1 are interleaved as REGION0. A + single PMEM namespace is created in the REGION0-SPA-range that spans most + of DIMM0 and DIMM1 with a user-specified name of "pm0.0". Some of that + interleaved system-physical-address range is reclaimed as BLK-aperture + accessed space starting at DPA-offset (a) into each DIMM. In that + reclaimed space we create two BLK-aperture "namespaces" from REGION2 and + REGION3 where "blk2.0" and "blk3.0" are just human readable names that + could be set to any user-desired name in the LABEL. + + 2. In the last portion of DIMM0 and DIMM1 we have an interleaved + system-physical-address range, REGION1, that spans those two DIMMs as + well as DIMM2 and DIMM3. Some of REGION1 is allocated to a PMEM namespace + named "pm1.0", the rest is reclaimed in 4 BLK-aperture namespaces (for + each DIMM in the interleave set), "blk2.1", "blk3.1", "blk4.0", and + "blk5.0". + + 3. The portion of DIMM2 and DIMM3 that do not participate in the REGION1 + interleaved system-physical-address range (i.e. the DPA address past + offset (b) are also included in the "blk4.0" and "blk5.0" namespaces. + Note, that this example shows that BLK-aperture namespaces don't need to + be contiguous in DPA-space. + + This bus is provided by the kernel under the device + /sys/devices/platform/nfit_test.0 when CONFIG_NFIT_TEST is enabled and + the nfit_test.ko module is loaded. This not only test LIBNVDIMM but the + acpi_nfit.ko driver as well. + + +LIBNVDIMM Kernel Device Model and LIBNDCTL Userspace API +======================================================== + +What follows is a description of the LIBNVDIMM sysfs layout and a +corresponding object hierarchy diagram as viewed through the LIBNDCTL +API. The example sysfs paths and diagrams are relative to the Example +NVDIMM Platform which is also the LIBNVDIMM bus used in the LIBNDCTL unit +test. + +LIBNDCTL: Context +----------------- + +Every API call in the LIBNDCTL library requires a context that holds the +logging parameters and other library instance state. The library is +based on the libabc template: + + https://git.kernel.org/cgit/linux/kernel/git/kay/libabc.git + +LIBNDCTL: instantiate a new library context example +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + struct ndctl_ctx *ctx; + + if (ndctl_new(&ctx) == 0) + return ctx; + else + return NULL; + +LIBNVDIMM/LIBNDCTL: Bus +----------------------- + +A bus has a 1:1 relationship with an NFIT. The current expectation for +ACPI based systems is that there is only ever one platform-global NFIT. +That said, it is trivial to register multiple NFITs, the specification +does not preclude it. The infrastructure supports multiple busses and +we use this capability to test multiple NFIT configurations in the unit +test. + +LIBNVDIMM: control class device in /sys/class +--------------------------------------------- + +This character device accepts DSM messages to be passed to DIMM +identified by its NFIT handle:: + + /sys/class/nd/ndctl0 + |-- dev + |-- device -> ../../../ndbus0 + |-- subsystem -> ../../../../../../../class/nd + + + +LIBNVDIMM: bus +-------------- + +:: + + struct nvdimm_bus *nvdimm_bus_register(struct device *parent, + struct nvdimm_bus_descriptor *nfit_desc); + +:: + + /sys/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0 + |-- commands + |-- nd + |-- nfit + |-- nmem0 + |-- nmem1 + |-- nmem2 + |-- nmem3 + |-- power + |-- provider + |-- region0 + |-- region1 + |-- region2 + |-- region3 + |-- region4 + |-- region5 + |-- uevent + `-- wait_probe + +LIBNDCTL: bus enumeration example +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Find the bus handle that describes the bus from Example NVDIMM Platform:: + + static struct ndctl_bus *get_bus_by_provider(struct ndctl_ctx *ctx, + const char *provider) + { + struct ndctl_bus *bus; + + ndctl_bus_foreach(ctx, bus) + if (strcmp(provider, ndctl_bus_get_provider(bus)) == 0) + return bus; + + return NULL; + } + + bus = get_bus_by_provider(ctx, "nfit_test.0"); + + +LIBNVDIMM/LIBNDCTL: DIMM (NMEM) +------------------------------- + +The DIMM device provides a character device for sending commands to +hardware, and it is a container for LABELs. If the DIMM is defined by +NFIT then an optional 'nfit' attribute sub-directory is available to add +NFIT-specifics. + +Note that the kernel device name for "DIMMs" is "nmemX". The NFIT +describes these devices via "Memory Device to System Physical Address +Range Mapping Structure", and there is no requirement that they actually +be physical DIMMs, so we use a more generic name. + +LIBNVDIMM: DIMM (NMEM) +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + struct nvdimm *nvdimm_create(struct nvdimm_bus *nvdimm_bus, void *provider_data, + const struct attribute_group **groups, unsigned long flags, + unsigned long *dsm_mask); + +:: + + /sys/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0 + |-- nmem0 + | |-- available_slots + | |-- commands + | |-- dev + | |-- devtype + | |-- driver -> ../../../../../bus/nd/drivers/nvdimm + | |-- modalias + | |-- nfit + | | |-- device + | | |-- format + | | |-- handle + | | |-- phys_id + | | |-- rev_id + | | |-- serial + | | `-- vendor + | |-- state + | |-- subsystem -> ../../../../../bus/nd + | `-- uevent + |-- nmem1 + [..] + + +LIBNDCTL: DIMM enumeration example +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Note, in this example we are assuming NFIT-defined DIMMs which are +identified by an "nfit_handle" a 32-bit value where: + + - Bit 3:0 DIMM number within the memory channel + - Bit 7:4 memory channel number + - Bit 11:8 memory controller ID + - Bit 15:12 socket ID (within scope of a Node controller if node + controller is present) + - Bit 27:16 Node Controller ID + - Bit 31:28 Reserved + +:: + + static struct ndctl_dimm *get_dimm_by_handle(struct ndctl_bus *bus, + unsigned int handle) + { + struct ndctl_dimm *dimm; + + ndctl_dimm_foreach(bus, dimm) + if (ndctl_dimm_get_handle(dimm) == handle) + return dimm; + + return NULL; + } + + #define DIMM_HANDLE(n, s, i, c, d) \ + (((n & 0xfff) << 16) | ((s & 0xf) << 12) | ((i & 0xf) << 8) \ + | ((c & 0xf) << 4) | (d & 0xf)) + + dimm = get_dimm_by_handle(bus, DIMM_HANDLE(0, 0, 0, 0, 0)); + +LIBNVDIMM/LIBNDCTL: Region +-------------------------- + +A generic REGION device is registered for each PMEM range or BLK-aperture +set. Per the example there are 6 regions: 2 PMEM and 4 BLK-aperture +sets on the "nfit_test.0" bus. The primary role of regions are to be a +container of "mappings". A mapping is a tuple of <DIMM, +DPA-start-offset, length>. + +LIBNVDIMM provides a built-in driver for these REGION devices. This driver +is responsible for reconciling the aliased DPA mappings across all +regions, parsing the LABEL, if present, and then emitting NAMESPACE +devices with the resolved/exclusive DPA-boundaries for the nd_pmem or +nd_blk device driver to consume. + +In addition to the generic attributes of "mapping"s, "interleave_ways" +and "size" the REGION device also exports some convenience attributes. +"nstype" indicates the integer type of namespace-device this region +emits, "devtype" duplicates the DEVTYPE variable stored by udev at the +'add' event, "modalias" duplicates the MODALIAS variable stored by udev +at the 'add' event, and finally, the optional "spa_index" is provided in +the case where the region is defined by a SPA. + +LIBNVDIMM: region:: + + struct nd_region *nvdimm_pmem_region_create(struct nvdimm_bus *nvdimm_bus, + struct nd_region_desc *ndr_desc); + struct nd_region *nvdimm_blk_region_create(struct nvdimm_bus *nvdimm_bus, + struct nd_region_desc *ndr_desc); + +:: + + /sys/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0 + |-- region0 + | |-- available_size + | |-- btt0 + | |-- btt_seed + | |-- devtype + | |-- driver -> ../../../../../bus/nd/drivers/nd_region + | |-- init_namespaces + | |-- mapping0 + | |-- mapping1 + | |-- mappings + | |-- modalias + | |-- namespace0.0 + | |-- namespace_seed + | |-- numa_node + | |-- nfit + | | `-- spa_index + | |-- nstype + | |-- set_cookie + | |-- size + | |-- subsystem -> ../../../../../bus/nd + | `-- uevent + |-- region1 + [..] + +LIBNDCTL: region enumeration example +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Sample region retrieval routines based on NFIT-unique data like +"spa_index" (interleave set id) for PMEM and "nfit_handle" (dimm id) for +BLK:: + + static struct ndctl_region *get_pmem_region_by_spa_index(struct ndctl_bus *bus, + unsigned int spa_index) + { + struct ndctl_region *region; + + ndctl_region_foreach(bus, region) { + if (ndctl_region_get_type(region) != ND_DEVICE_REGION_PMEM) + continue; + if (ndctl_region_get_spa_index(region) == spa_index) + return region; + } + return NULL; + } + + static struct ndctl_region *get_blk_region_by_dimm_handle(struct ndctl_bus *bus, + unsigned int handle) + { + struct ndctl_region *region; + + ndctl_region_foreach(bus, region) { + struct ndctl_mapping *map; + + if (ndctl_region_get_type(region) != ND_DEVICE_REGION_BLOCK) + continue; + ndctl_mapping_foreach(region, map) { + struct ndctl_dimm *dimm = ndctl_mapping_get_dimm(map); + + if (ndctl_dimm_get_handle(dimm) == handle) + return region; + } + } + return NULL; + } + + +Why Not Encode the Region Type into the Region Name? +---------------------------------------------------- + +At first glance it seems since NFIT defines just PMEM and BLK interface +types that we should simply name REGION devices with something derived +from those type names. However, the ND subsystem explicitly keeps the +REGION name generic and expects userspace to always consider the +region-attributes for four reasons: + + 1. There are already more than two REGION and "namespace" types. For + PMEM there are two subtypes. As mentioned previously we have PMEM where + the constituent DIMM devices are known and anonymous PMEM. For BLK + regions the NFIT specification already anticipates vendor specific + implementations. The exact distinction of what a region contains is in + the region-attributes not the region-name or the region-devtype. + + 2. A region with zero child-namespaces is a possible configuration. For + example, the NFIT allows for a DCR to be published without a + corresponding BLK-aperture. This equates to a DIMM that can only accept + control/configuration messages, but no i/o through a descendant block + device. Again, this "type" is advertised in the attributes ('mappings' + == 0) and the name does not tell you much. + + 3. What if a third major interface type arises in the future? Outside + of vendor specific implementations, it's not difficult to envision a + third class of interface type beyond BLK and PMEM. With a generic name + for the REGION level of the device-hierarchy old userspace + implementations can still make sense of new kernel advertised + region-types. Userspace can always rely on the generic region + attributes like "mappings", "size", etc and the expected child devices + named "namespace". This generic format of the device-model hierarchy + allows the LIBNVDIMM and LIBNDCTL implementations to be more uniform and + future-proof. + + 4. There are more robust mechanisms for determining the major type of a + region than a device name. See the next section, How Do I Determine the + Major Type of a Region? + +How Do I Determine the Major Type of a Region? +---------------------------------------------- + +Outside of the blanket recommendation of "use libndctl", or simply +looking at the kernel header (/usr/include/linux/ndctl.h) to decode the +"nstype" integer attribute, here are some other options. + +1. module alias lookup +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + + The whole point of region/namespace device type differentiation is to + decide which block-device driver will attach to a given LIBNVDIMM namespace. + One can simply use the modalias to lookup the resulting module. It's + important to note that this method is robust in the presence of a + vendor-specific driver down the road. If a vendor-specific + implementation wants to supplant the standard nd_blk driver it can with + minimal impact to the rest of LIBNVDIMM. + + In fact, a vendor may also want to have a vendor-specific region-driver + (outside of nd_region). For example, if a vendor defined its own LABEL + format it would need its own region driver to parse that LABEL and emit + the resulting namespaces. The output from module resolution is more + accurate than a region-name or region-devtype. + +2. udev +^^^^^^^ + + The kernel "devtype" is registered in the udev database:: + + # udevadm info --path=/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region0 + P: /devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region0 + E: DEVPATH=/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region0 + E: DEVTYPE=nd_pmem + E: MODALIAS=nd:t2 + E: SUBSYSTEM=nd + + # udevadm info --path=/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region4 + P: /devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region4 + E: DEVPATH=/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region4 + E: DEVTYPE=nd_blk + E: MODALIAS=nd:t3 + E: SUBSYSTEM=nd + + ...and is available as a region attribute, but keep in mind that the + "devtype" does not indicate sub-type variations and scripts should + really be understanding the other attributes. + +3. type specific attributes +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + + As it currently stands a BLK-aperture region will never have a + "nfit/spa_index" attribute, but neither will a non-NFIT PMEM region. A + BLK region with a "mappings" value of 0 is, as mentioned above, a DIMM + that does not allow I/O. A PMEM region with a "mappings" value of zero + is a simple system-physical-address range. + + +LIBNVDIMM/LIBNDCTL: Namespace +----------------------------- + +A REGION, after resolving DPA aliasing and LABEL specified boundaries, +surfaces one or more "namespace" devices. The arrival of a "namespace" +device currently triggers either the nd_blk or nd_pmem driver to load +and register a disk/block device. + +LIBNVDIMM: namespace +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Here is a sample layout from the three major types of NAMESPACE where +namespace0.0 represents DIMM-info-backed PMEM (note that it has a 'uuid' +attribute), namespace2.0 represents a BLK namespace (note it has a +'sector_size' attribute) that, and namespace6.0 represents an anonymous +PMEM namespace (note that has no 'uuid' attribute due to not support a +LABEL):: + + /sys/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region0/namespace0.0 + |-- alt_name + |-- devtype + |-- dpa_extents + |-- force_raw + |-- modalias + |-- numa_node + |-- resource + |-- size + |-- subsystem -> ../../../../../../bus/nd + |-- type + |-- uevent + `-- uuid + /sys/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region2/namespace2.0 + |-- alt_name + |-- devtype + |-- dpa_extents + |-- force_raw + |-- modalias + |-- numa_node + |-- sector_size + |-- size + |-- subsystem -> ../../../../../../bus/nd + |-- type + |-- uevent + `-- uuid + /sys/devices/platform/nfit_test.1/ndbus1/region6/namespace6.0 + |-- block + | `-- pmem0 + |-- devtype + |-- driver -> ../../../../../../bus/nd/drivers/pmem + |-- force_raw + |-- modalias + |-- numa_node + |-- resource + |-- size + |-- subsystem -> ../../../../../../bus/nd + |-- type + `-- uevent + +LIBNDCTL: namespace enumeration example +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ +Namespaces are indexed relative to their parent region, example below. +These indexes are mostly static from boot to boot, but subsystem makes +no guarantees in this regard. For a static namespace identifier use its +'uuid' attribute. + +:: + + static struct ndctl_namespace + *get_namespace_by_id(struct ndctl_region *region, unsigned int id) + { + struct ndctl_namespace *ndns; + + ndctl_namespace_foreach(region, ndns) + if (ndctl_namespace_get_id(ndns) == id) + return ndns; + + return NULL; + } + +LIBNDCTL: namespace creation example +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Idle namespaces are automatically created by the kernel if a given +region has enough available capacity to create a new namespace. +Namespace instantiation involves finding an idle namespace and +configuring it. For the most part the setting of namespace attributes +can occur in any order, the only constraint is that 'uuid' must be set +before 'size'. This enables the kernel to track DPA allocations +internally with a static identifier:: + + static int configure_namespace(struct ndctl_region *region, + struct ndctl_namespace *ndns, + struct namespace_parameters *parameters) + { + char devname[50]; + + snprintf(devname, sizeof(devname), "namespace%d.%d", + ndctl_region_get_id(region), paramaters->id); + + ndctl_namespace_set_alt_name(ndns, devname); + /* 'uuid' must be set prior to setting size! */ + ndctl_namespace_set_uuid(ndns, paramaters->uuid); + ndctl_namespace_set_size(ndns, paramaters->size); + /* unlike pmem namespaces, blk namespaces have a sector size */ + if (parameters->lbasize) + ndctl_namespace_set_sector_size(ndns, parameters->lbasize); + ndctl_namespace_enable(ndns); + } + + +Why the Term "namespace"? +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + + 1. Why not "volume" for instance? "volume" ran the risk of confusing + ND (libnvdimm subsystem) to a volume manager like device-mapper. + + 2. The term originated to describe the sub-devices that can be created + within a NVME controller (see the nvme specification: + http://www.nvmexpress.org/specifications/), and NFIT namespaces are + meant to parallel the capabilities and configurability of + NVME-namespaces. + + +LIBNVDIMM/LIBNDCTL: Block Translation Table "btt" +------------------------------------------------- + +A BTT (design document: http://pmem.io/2014/09/23/btt.html) is a stacked +block device driver that fronts either the whole block device or a +partition of a block device emitted by either a PMEM or BLK NAMESPACE. + +LIBNVDIMM: btt layout +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Every region will start out with at least one BTT device which is the +seed device. To activate it set the "namespace", "uuid", and +"sector_size" attributes and then bind the device to the nd_pmem or +nd_blk driver depending on the region type:: + + /sys/devices/platform/nfit_test.1/ndbus0/region0/btt0/ + |-- namespace + |-- delete + |-- devtype + |-- modalias + |-- numa_node + |-- sector_size + |-- subsystem -> ../../../../../bus/nd + |-- uevent + `-- uuid + +LIBNDCTL: btt creation example +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Similar to namespaces an idle BTT device is automatically created per +region. Each time this "seed" btt device is configured and enabled a new +seed is created. Creating a BTT configuration involves two steps of +finding and idle BTT and assigning it to consume a PMEM or BLK namespace:: + + static struct ndctl_btt *get_idle_btt(struct ndctl_region *region) + { + struct ndctl_btt *btt; + + ndctl_btt_foreach(region, btt) + if (!ndctl_btt_is_enabled(btt) + && !ndctl_btt_is_configured(btt)) + return btt; + + return NULL; + } + + static int configure_btt(struct ndctl_region *region, + struct btt_parameters *parameters) + { + btt = get_idle_btt(region); + + ndctl_btt_set_uuid(btt, parameters->uuid); + ndctl_btt_set_sector_size(btt, parameters->sector_size); + ndctl_btt_set_namespace(btt, parameters->ndns); + /* turn off raw mode device */ + ndctl_namespace_disable(parameters->ndns); + /* turn on btt access */ + ndctl_btt_enable(btt); + } + +Once instantiated a new inactive btt seed device will appear underneath +the region. + +Once a "namespace" is removed from a BTT that instance of the BTT device +will be deleted or otherwise reset to default values. This deletion is +only at the device model level. In order to destroy a BTT the "info +block" needs to be destroyed. Note, that to destroy a BTT the media +needs to be written in raw mode. By default, the kernel will autodetect +the presence of a BTT and disable raw mode. This autodetect behavior +can be suppressed by enabling raw mode for the namespace via the +ndctl_namespace_set_raw_mode() API. + + +Summary LIBNDCTL Diagram +------------------------ + +For the given example above, here is the view of the objects as seen by the +LIBNDCTL API:: + + +---+ + |CTX| +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+ + +-+-+ +-> REGION0 +---> NAMESPACE0.0 +--> PMEM8 "pm0.0" | + | | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+ + +-------+ | | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+ + | DIMM0 <-+ | +-> REGION1 +---> NAMESPACE1.0 +--> PMEM6 "pm1.0" | + +-------+ | | | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+ + | DIMM1 <-+ +-v--+ | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+ + +-------+ +-+BUS0+---> REGION2 +-+-> NAMESPACE2.0 +--> ND6 "blk2.0" | + | DIMM2 <-+ +----+ | +---------+ | +--------------+ +----------------------+ + +-------+ | | +-> NAMESPACE2.1 +--> ND5 "blk2.1" | BTT2 | + | DIMM3 <-+ | +--------------+ +----------------------+ + +-------+ | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+ + +-> REGION3 +-+-> NAMESPACE3.0 +--> ND4 "blk3.0" | + | +---------+ | +--------------+ +----------------------+ + | +-> NAMESPACE3.1 +--> ND3 "blk3.1" | BTT1 | + | +--------------+ +----------------------+ + | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+ + +-> REGION4 +---> NAMESPACE4.0 +--> ND2 "blk4.0" | + | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+ + | +---------+ +--------------+ +----------------------+ + +-> REGION5 +---> NAMESPACE5.0 +--> ND1 "blk5.0" | BTT0 | + +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+------+ diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/nvdimm/security.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/nvdimm/security.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ad9dea099b34 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/nvdimm/security.rst @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ +=============== +NVDIMM Security +=============== + +1. Introduction +--------------- + +With the introduction of Intel Device Specific Methods (DSM) v1.8 +specification [1], security DSMs are introduced. The spec added the following +security DSMs: "get security state", "set passphrase", "disable passphrase", +"unlock unit", "freeze lock", "secure erase", and "overwrite". A security_ops +data structure has been added to struct dimm in order to support the security +operations and generic APIs are exposed to allow vendor neutral operations. + +2. Sysfs Interface +------------------ +The "security" sysfs attribute is provided in the nvdimm sysfs directory. For +example: +/sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/ACPI0012:00/ndbus0/nmem0/security + +The "show" attribute of that attribute will display the security state for +that DIMM. The following states are available: disabled, unlocked, locked, +frozen, and overwrite. If security is not supported, the sysfs attribute +will not be visible. + +The "store" attribute takes several commands when it is being written to +in order to support some of the security functionalities: +update <old_keyid> <new_keyid> - enable or update passphrase. +disable <keyid> - disable enabled security and remove key. +freeze - freeze changing of security states. +erase <keyid> - delete existing user encryption key. +overwrite <keyid> - wipe the entire nvdimm. +master_update <keyid> <new_keyid> - enable or update master passphrase. +master_erase <keyid> - delete existing user encryption key. + +3. Key Management +----------------- + +The key is associated to the payload by the DIMM id. For example: +# cat /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/ACPI0012:00/ndbus0/nmem0/nfit/id +8089-a2-1740-00000133 +The DIMM id would be provided along with the key payload (passphrase) to +the kernel. + +The security keys are managed on the basis of a single key per DIMM. The +key "passphrase" is expected to be 32bytes long. This is similar to the ATA +security specification [2]. A key is initially acquired via the request_key() +kernel API call during nvdimm unlock. It is up to the user to make sure that +all the keys are in the kernel user keyring for unlock. + +A nvdimm encrypted-key of format enc32 has the description format of: +nvdimm:<bus-provider-specific-unique-id> + +See file ``Documentation/security/keys/trusted-encrypted.rst`` for creating +encrypted-keys of enc32 format. TPM usage with a master trusted key is +preferred for sealing the encrypted-keys. + +4. Unlocking +------------ +When the DIMMs are being enumerated by the kernel, the kernel will attempt to +retrieve the key from the kernel user keyring. This is the only time +a locked DIMM can be unlocked. Once unlocked, the DIMM will remain unlocked +until reboot. Typically an entity (i.e. shell script) will inject all the +relevant encrypted-keys into the kernel user keyring during the initramfs phase. +This provides the unlock function access to all the related keys that contain +the passphrase for the respective nvdimms. It is also recommended that the +keys are injected before libnvdimm is loaded by modprobe. + +5. Update +--------- +When doing an update, it is expected that the existing key is removed from +the kernel user keyring and reinjected as different (old) key. It's irrelevant +what the key description is for the old key since we are only interested in the +keyid when doing the update operation. It is also expected that the new key +is injected with the description format described from earlier in this +document. The update command written to the sysfs attribute will be with +the format: +update <old keyid> <new keyid> + +If there is no old keyid due to a security enabling, then a 0 should be +passed in. + +6. Freeze +--------- +The freeze operation does not require any keys. The security config can be +frozen by a user with root privelege. + +7. Disable +---------- +The security disable command format is: +disable <keyid> + +An key with the current passphrase payload that is tied to the nvdimm should be +in the kernel user keyring. + +8. Secure Erase +--------------- +The command format for doing a secure erase is: +erase <keyid> + +An key with the current passphrase payload that is tied to the nvdimm should be +in the kernel user keyring. + +9. Overwrite +------------ +The command format for doing an overwrite is: +overwrite <keyid> + +Overwrite can be done without a key if security is not enabled. A key serial +of 0 can be passed in to indicate no key. + +The sysfs attribute "security" can be polled to wait on overwrite completion. +Overwrite can last tens of minutes or more depending on nvdimm size. + +An encrypted-key with the current user passphrase that is tied to the nvdimm +should be injected and its keyid should be passed in via sysfs. + +10. Master Update +----------------- +The command format for doing a master update is: +update <old keyid> <new keyid> + +The operating mechanism for master update is identical to update except the +master passphrase key is passed to the kernel. The master passphrase key +is just another encrypted-key. + +This command is only available when security is disabled. + +11. Master Erase +---------------- +The command format for doing a master erase is: +master_erase <current keyid> + +This command has the same operating mechanism as erase except the master +passphrase key is passed to the kernel. The master passphrase key is just +another encrypted-key. + +This command is only available when the master security is enabled, indicated +by the extended security status. + +[1]: http://pmem.io/documents/NVDIMM_DSM_Interface-V1.8.pdf + +[2]: http://www.t13.org/documents/UploadedDocuments/docs2006/e05179r4-ACS-SecurityClarifications.pdf diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/nvmem.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/nvmem.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d9d958d5c824 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/nvmem.rst @@ -0,0 +1,189 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +=============== +NVMEM Subsystem +=============== + + Srinivas Kandagatla <srinivas.kandagatla@linaro.org> + +This document explains the NVMEM Framework along with the APIs provided, +and how to use it. + +1. Introduction +=============== +*NVMEM* is the abbreviation for Non Volatile Memory layer. It is used to +retrieve configuration of SOC or Device specific data from non volatile +memories like eeprom, efuses and so on. + +Before this framework existed, NVMEM drivers like eeprom were stored in +drivers/misc, where they all had to duplicate pretty much the same code to +register a sysfs file, allow in-kernel users to access the content of the +devices they were driving, etc. + +This was also a problem as far as other in-kernel users were involved, since +the solutions used were pretty much different from one driver to another, there +was a rather big abstraction leak. + +This framework aims at solve these problems. It also introduces DT +representation for consumer devices to go get the data they require (MAC +Addresses, SoC/Revision ID, part numbers, and so on) from the NVMEMs. This +framework is based on regmap, so that most of the abstraction available in +regmap can be reused, across multiple types of buses. + +NVMEM Providers ++++++++++++++++ + +NVMEM provider refers to an entity that implements methods to initialize, read +and write the non-volatile memory. + +2. Registering/Unregistering the NVMEM provider +=============================================== + +A NVMEM provider can register with NVMEM core by supplying relevant +nvmem configuration to nvmem_register(), on success core would return a valid +nvmem_device pointer. + +nvmem_unregister(nvmem) is used to unregister a previously registered provider. + +For example, a simple qfprom case:: + + static struct nvmem_config econfig = { + .name = "qfprom", + .owner = THIS_MODULE, + }; + + static int qfprom_probe(struct platform_device *pdev) + { + ... + econfig.dev = &pdev->dev; + nvmem = nvmem_register(&econfig); + ... + } + +It is mandatory that the NVMEM provider has a regmap associated with its +struct device. Failure to do would return error code from nvmem_register(). + +Users of board files can define and register nvmem cells using the +nvmem_cell_table struct:: + + static struct nvmem_cell_info foo_nvmem_cells[] = { + { + .name = "macaddr", + .offset = 0x7f00, + .bytes = ETH_ALEN, + } + }; + + static struct nvmem_cell_table foo_nvmem_cell_table = { + .nvmem_name = "i2c-eeprom", + .cells = foo_nvmem_cells, + .ncells = ARRAY_SIZE(foo_nvmem_cells), + }; + + nvmem_add_cell_table(&foo_nvmem_cell_table); + +Additionally it is possible to create nvmem cell lookup entries and register +them with the nvmem framework from machine code as shown in the example below:: + + static struct nvmem_cell_lookup foo_nvmem_lookup = { + .nvmem_name = "i2c-eeprom", + .cell_name = "macaddr", + .dev_id = "foo_mac.0", + .con_id = "mac-address", + }; + + nvmem_add_cell_lookups(&foo_nvmem_lookup, 1); + +NVMEM Consumers ++++++++++++++++ + +NVMEM consumers are the entities which make use of the NVMEM provider to +read from and to NVMEM. + +3. NVMEM cell based consumer APIs +================================= + +NVMEM cells are the data entries/fields in the NVMEM. +The NVMEM framework provides 3 APIs to read/write NVMEM cells:: + + struct nvmem_cell *nvmem_cell_get(struct device *dev, const char *name); + struct nvmem_cell *devm_nvmem_cell_get(struct device *dev, const char *name); + + void nvmem_cell_put(struct nvmem_cell *cell); + void devm_nvmem_cell_put(struct device *dev, struct nvmem_cell *cell); + + void *nvmem_cell_read(struct nvmem_cell *cell, ssize_t *len); + int nvmem_cell_write(struct nvmem_cell *cell, void *buf, ssize_t len); + +`*nvmem_cell_get()` apis will get a reference to nvmem cell for a given id, +and nvmem_cell_read/write() can then read or write to the cell. +Once the usage of the cell is finished the consumer should call +`*nvmem_cell_put()` to free all the allocation memory for the cell. + +4. Direct NVMEM device based consumer APIs +========================================== + +In some instances it is necessary to directly read/write the NVMEM. +To facilitate such consumers NVMEM framework provides below apis:: + + struct nvmem_device *nvmem_device_get(struct device *dev, const char *name); + struct nvmem_device *devm_nvmem_device_get(struct device *dev, + const char *name); + void nvmem_device_put(struct nvmem_device *nvmem); + int nvmem_device_read(struct nvmem_device *nvmem, unsigned int offset, + size_t bytes, void *buf); + int nvmem_device_write(struct nvmem_device *nvmem, unsigned int offset, + size_t bytes, void *buf); + int nvmem_device_cell_read(struct nvmem_device *nvmem, + struct nvmem_cell_info *info, void *buf); + int nvmem_device_cell_write(struct nvmem_device *nvmem, + struct nvmem_cell_info *info, void *buf); + +Before the consumers can read/write NVMEM directly, it should get hold +of nvmem_controller from one of the `*nvmem_device_get()` api. + +The difference between these apis and cell based apis is that these apis always +take nvmem_device as parameter. + +5. Releasing a reference to the NVMEM +===================================== + +When a consumer no longer needs the NVMEM, it has to release the reference +to the NVMEM it has obtained using the APIs mentioned in the above section. +The NVMEM framework provides 2 APIs to release a reference to the NVMEM:: + + void nvmem_cell_put(struct nvmem_cell *cell); + void devm_nvmem_cell_put(struct device *dev, struct nvmem_cell *cell); + void nvmem_device_put(struct nvmem_device *nvmem); + void devm_nvmem_device_put(struct device *dev, struct nvmem_device *nvmem); + +Both these APIs are used to release a reference to the NVMEM and +devm_nvmem_cell_put and devm_nvmem_device_put destroys the devres associated +with this NVMEM. + +Userspace ++++++++++ + +6. Userspace binary interface +============================== + +Userspace can read/write the raw NVMEM file located at:: + + /sys/bus/nvmem/devices/*/nvmem + +ex:: + + hexdump /sys/bus/nvmem/devices/qfprom0/nvmem + + 0000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 + * + 00000a0 db10 2240 0000 e000 0c00 0c00 0000 0c00 + 0000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 + ... + * + 0001000 + +7. DeviceTree Binding +===================== + +See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/nvmem.txt diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/parport-lowlevel.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/parport-lowlevel.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0633d70ffda7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/parport-lowlevel.rst @@ -0,0 +1,1832 @@ +=============================== +PARPORT interface documentation +=============================== + +:Time-stamp: <2000-02-24 13:30:20 twaugh> + +Described here are the following functions: + +Global functions:: + parport_register_driver + parport_unregister_driver + parport_enumerate + parport_register_device + parport_unregister_device + parport_claim + parport_claim_or_block + parport_release + parport_yield + parport_yield_blocking + parport_wait_peripheral + parport_poll_peripheral + parport_wait_event + parport_negotiate + parport_read + parport_write + parport_open + parport_close + parport_device_id + parport_device_coords + parport_find_class + parport_find_device + parport_set_timeout + +Port functions (can be overridden by low-level drivers): + + SPP:: + port->ops->read_data + port->ops->write_data + port->ops->read_status + port->ops->read_control + port->ops->write_control + port->ops->frob_control + port->ops->enable_irq + port->ops->disable_irq + port->ops->data_forward + port->ops->data_reverse + + EPP:: + port->ops->epp_write_data + port->ops->epp_read_data + port->ops->epp_write_addr + port->ops->epp_read_addr + + ECP:: + port->ops->ecp_write_data + port->ops->ecp_read_data + port->ops->ecp_write_addr + + Other:: + port->ops->nibble_read_data + port->ops->byte_read_data + port->ops->compat_write_data + +The parport subsystem comprises ``parport`` (the core port-sharing +code), and a variety of low-level drivers that actually do the port +accesses. Each low-level driver handles a particular style of port +(PC, Amiga, and so on). + +The parport interface to the device driver author can be broken down +into global functions and port functions. + +The global functions are mostly for communicating between the device +driver and the parport subsystem: acquiring a list of available ports, +claiming a port for exclusive use, and so on. They also include +``generic`` functions for doing standard things that will work on any +IEEE 1284-capable architecture. + +The port functions are provided by the low-level drivers, although the +core parport module provides generic ``defaults`` for some routines. +The port functions can be split into three groups: SPP, EPP, and ECP. + +SPP (Standard Parallel Port) functions modify so-called ``SPP`` +registers: data, status, and control. The hardware may not actually +have registers exactly like that, but the PC does and this interface is +modelled after common PC implementations. Other low-level drivers may +be able to emulate most of the functionality. + +EPP (Enhanced Parallel Port) functions are provided for reading and +writing in IEEE 1284 EPP mode, and ECP (Extended Capabilities Port) +functions are used for IEEE 1284 ECP mode. (What about BECP? Does +anyone care?) + +Hardware assistance for EPP and/or ECP transfers may or may not be +available, and if it is available it may or may not be used. If +hardware is not used, the transfer will be software-driven. In order +to cope with peripherals that only tenuously support IEEE 1284, a +low-level driver specific function is provided, for altering 'fudge +factors'. + +Global functions +================ + +parport_register_driver - register a device driver with parport +--------------------------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + struct parport_driver { + const char *name; + void (*attach) (struct parport *); + void (*detach) (struct parport *); + struct parport_driver *next; + }; + int parport_register_driver (struct parport_driver *driver); + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +In order to be notified about parallel ports when they are detected, +parport_register_driver should be called. Your driver will +immediately be notified of all ports that have already been detected, +and of each new port as low-level drivers are loaded. + +A ``struct parport_driver`` contains the textual name of your driver, +a pointer to a function to handle new ports, and a pointer to a +function to handle ports going away due to a low-level driver +unloading. Ports will only be detached if they are not being used +(i.e. there are no devices registered on them). + +The visible parts of the ``struct parport *`` argument given to +attach/detach are:: + + struct parport + { + struct parport *next; /* next parport in list */ + const char *name; /* port's name */ + unsigned int modes; /* bitfield of hardware modes */ + struct parport_device_info probe_info; + /* IEEE1284 info */ + int number; /* parport index */ + struct parport_operations *ops; + ... + }; + +There are other members of the structure, but they should not be +touched. + +The ``modes`` member summarises the capabilities of the underlying +hardware. It consists of flags which may be bitwise-ored together: + + ============================= =============================================== + PARPORT_MODE_PCSPP IBM PC registers are available, + i.e. functions that act on data, + control and status registers are + probably writing directly to the + hardware. + PARPORT_MODE_TRISTATE The data drivers may be turned off. + This allows the data lines to be used + for reverse (peripheral to host) + transfers. + PARPORT_MODE_COMPAT The hardware can assist with + compatibility-mode (printer) + transfers, i.e. compat_write_block. + PARPORT_MODE_EPP The hardware can assist with EPP + transfers. + PARPORT_MODE_ECP The hardware can assist with ECP + transfers. + PARPORT_MODE_DMA The hardware can use DMA, so you might + want to pass ISA DMA-able memory + (i.e. memory allocated using the + GFP_DMA flag with kmalloc) to the + low-level driver in order to take + advantage of it. + ============================= =============================================== + +There may be other flags in ``modes`` as well. + +The contents of ``modes`` is advisory only. For example, if the +hardware is capable of DMA, and PARPORT_MODE_DMA is in ``modes``, it +doesn't necessarily mean that DMA will always be used when possible. +Similarly, hardware that is capable of assisting ECP transfers won't +necessarily be used. + +RETURN VALUE +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Zero on success, otherwise an error code. + +ERRORS +^^^^^^ + +None. (Can it fail? Why return int?) + +EXAMPLE +^^^^^^^ + +:: + + static void lp_attach (struct parport *port) + { + ... + private = kmalloc (...); + dev[count++] = parport_register_device (...); + ... + } + + static void lp_detach (struct parport *port) + { + ... + } + + static struct parport_driver lp_driver = { + "lp", + lp_attach, + lp_detach, + NULL /* always put NULL here */ + }; + + int lp_init (void) + { + ... + if (parport_register_driver (&lp_driver)) { + /* Failed; nothing we can do. */ + return -EIO; + } + ... + } + + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +parport_unregister_driver, parport_register_device, parport_enumerate + + + +parport_unregister_driver - tell parport to forget about this driver +-------------------------------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + struct parport_driver { + const char *name; + void (*attach) (struct parport *); + void (*detach) (struct parport *); + struct parport_driver *next; + }; + void parport_unregister_driver (struct parport_driver *driver); + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +This tells parport not to notify the device driver of new ports or of +ports going away. Registered devices belonging to that driver are NOT +unregistered: parport_unregister_device must be used for each one. + +EXAMPLE +^^^^^^^ + +:: + + void cleanup_module (void) + { + ... + /* Stop notifications. */ + parport_unregister_driver (&lp_driver); + + /* Unregister devices. */ + for (i = 0; i < NUM_DEVS; i++) + parport_unregister_device (dev[i]); + ... + } + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +parport_register_driver, parport_enumerate + + + +parport_enumerate - retrieve a list of parallel ports (DEPRECATED) +------------------------------------------------------------------ + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + struct parport *parport_enumerate (void); + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Retrieve the first of a list of valid parallel ports for this machine. +Successive parallel ports can be found using the ``struct parport +*next`` element of the ``struct parport *`` that is returned. If ``next`` +is NULL, there are no more parallel ports in the list. The number of +ports in the list will not exceed PARPORT_MAX. + +RETURN VALUE +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +A ``struct parport *`` describing a valid parallel port for the machine, +or NULL if there are none. + +ERRORS +^^^^^^ + +This function can return NULL to indicate that there are no parallel +ports to use. + +EXAMPLE +^^^^^^^ + +:: + + int detect_device (void) + { + struct parport *port; + + for (port = parport_enumerate (); + port != NULL; + port = port->next) { + /* Try to detect a device on the port... */ + ... + } + } + + ... + } + +NOTES +^^^^^ + +parport_enumerate is deprecated; parport_register_driver should be +used instead. + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +parport_register_driver, parport_unregister_driver + + + +parport_register_device - register to use a port +------------------------------------------------ + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + typedef int (*preempt_func) (void *handle); + typedef void (*wakeup_func) (void *handle); + typedef int (*irq_func) (int irq, void *handle, struct pt_regs *); + + struct pardevice *parport_register_device(struct parport *port, + const char *name, + preempt_func preempt, + wakeup_func wakeup, + irq_func irq, + int flags, + void *handle); + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Use this function to register your device driver on a parallel port +(``port``). Once you have done that, you will be able to use +parport_claim and parport_release in order to use the port. + +The (``name``) argument is the name of the device that appears in /proc +filesystem. The string must be valid for the whole lifetime of the +device (until parport_unregister_device is called). + +This function will register three callbacks into your driver: +``preempt``, ``wakeup`` and ``irq``. Each of these may be NULL in order to +indicate that you do not want a callback. + +When the ``preempt`` function is called, it is because another driver +wishes to use the parallel port. The ``preempt`` function should return +non-zero if the parallel port cannot be released yet -- if zero is +returned, the port is lost to another driver and the port must be +re-claimed before use. + +The ``wakeup`` function is called once another driver has released the +port and no other driver has yet claimed it. You can claim the +parallel port from within the ``wakeup`` function (in which case the +claim is guaranteed to succeed), or choose not to if you don't need it +now. + +If an interrupt occurs on the parallel port your driver has claimed, +the ``irq`` function will be called. (Write something about shared +interrupts here.) + +The ``handle`` is a pointer to driver-specific data, and is passed to +the callback functions. + +``flags`` may be a bitwise combination of the following flags: + + ===================== ================================================= + Flag Meaning + ===================== ================================================= + PARPORT_DEV_EXCL The device cannot share the parallel port at all. + Use this only when absolutely necessary. + ===================== ================================================= + +The typedefs are not actually defined -- they are only shown in order +to make the function prototype more readable. + +The visible parts of the returned ``struct pardevice`` are:: + + struct pardevice { + struct parport *port; /* Associated port */ + void *private; /* Device driver's 'handle' */ + ... + }; + +RETURN VALUE +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +A ``struct pardevice *``: a handle to the registered parallel port +device that can be used for parport_claim, parport_release, etc. + +ERRORS +^^^^^^ + +A return value of NULL indicates that there was a problem registering +a device on that port. + +EXAMPLE +^^^^^^^ + +:: + + static int preempt (void *handle) + { + if (busy_right_now) + return 1; + + must_reclaim_port = 1; + return 0; + } + + static void wakeup (void *handle) + { + struct toaster *private = handle; + struct pardevice *dev = private->dev; + if (!dev) return; /* avoid races */ + + if (want_port) + parport_claim (dev); + } + + static int toaster_detect (struct toaster *private, struct parport *port) + { + private->dev = parport_register_device (port, "toaster", preempt, + wakeup, NULL, 0, + private); + if (!private->dev) + /* Couldn't register with parport. */ + return -EIO; + + must_reclaim_port = 0; + busy_right_now = 1; + parport_claim_or_block (private->dev); + ... + /* Don't need the port while the toaster warms up. */ + busy_right_now = 0; + ... + busy_right_now = 1; + if (must_reclaim_port) { + parport_claim_or_block (private->dev); + must_reclaim_port = 0; + } + ... + } + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +parport_unregister_device, parport_claim + + + +parport_unregister_device - finish using a port +----------------------------------------------- + +SYNPOPSIS + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + void parport_unregister_device (struct pardevice *dev); + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +This function is the opposite of parport_register_device. After using +parport_unregister_device, ``dev`` is no longer a valid device handle. + +You should not unregister a device that is currently claimed, although +if you do it will be released automatically. + +EXAMPLE +^^^^^^^ + +:: + + ... + kfree (dev->private); /* before we lose the pointer */ + parport_unregister_device (dev); + ... + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + + +parport_unregister_driver + +parport_claim, parport_claim_or_block - claim the parallel port for a device +---------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + int parport_claim (struct pardevice *dev); + int parport_claim_or_block (struct pardevice *dev); + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +These functions attempt to gain control of the parallel port on which +``dev`` is registered. ``parport_claim`` does not block, but +``parport_claim_or_block`` may do. (Put something here about blocking +interruptibly or non-interruptibly.) + +You should not try to claim a port that you have already claimed. + +RETURN VALUE +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +A return value of zero indicates that the port was successfully +claimed, and the caller now has possession of the parallel port. + +If ``parport_claim_or_block`` blocks before returning successfully, the +return value is positive. + +ERRORS +^^^^^^ + +========== ========================================================== + -EAGAIN The port is unavailable at the moment, but another attempt + to claim it may succeed. +========== ========================================================== + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + + +parport_release + +parport_release - release the parallel port +------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + void parport_release (struct pardevice *dev); + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Once a parallel port device has been claimed, it can be released using +``parport_release``. It cannot fail, but you should not release a +device that you do not have possession of. + +EXAMPLE +^^^^^^^ + +:: + + static size_t write (struct pardevice *dev, const void *buf, + size_t len) + { + ... + written = dev->port->ops->write_ecp_data (dev->port, buf, + len); + parport_release (dev); + ... + } + + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +change_mode, parport_claim, parport_claim_or_block, parport_yield + + + +parport_yield, parport_yield_blocking - temporarily release a parallel port +--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + int parport_yield (struct pardevice *dev) + int parport_yield_blocking (struct pardevice *dev); + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +When a driver has control of a parallel port, it may allow another +driver to temporarily ``borrow`` it. ``parport_yield`` does not block; +``parport_yield_blocking`` may do. + +RETURN VALUE +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +A return value of zero indicates that the caller still owns the port +and the call did not block. + +A positive return value from ``parport_yield_blocking`` indicates that +the caller still owns the port and the call blocked. + +A return value of -EAGAIN indicates that the caller no longer owns the +port, and it must be re-claimed before use. + +ERRORS +^^^^^^ + +========= ========================================================== + -EAGAIN Ownership of the parallel port was given away. +========= ========================================================== + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +parport_release + + + +parport_wait_peripheral - wait for status lines, up to 35ms +----------------------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + int parport_wait_peripheral (struct parport *port, + unsigned char mask, + unsigned char val); + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Wait for the status lines in mask to match the values in val. + +RETURN VALUE +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +======== ========================================================== + -EINTR a signal is pending + 0 the status lines in mask have values in val + 1 timed out while waiting (35ms elapsed) +======== ========================================================== + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +parport_poll_peripheral + + + +parport_poll_peripheral - wait for status lines, in usec +-------------------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + int parport_poll_peripheral (struct parport *port, + unsigned char mask, + unsigned char val, + int usec); + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Wait for the status lines in mask to match the values in val. + +RETURN VALUE +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +======== ========================================================== + -EINTR a signal is pending + 0 the status lines in mask have values in val + 1 timed out while waiting (usec microseconds have elapsed) +======== ========================================================== + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +parport_wait_peripheral + + + +parport_wait_event - wait for an event on a port +------------------------------------------------ + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + int parport_wait_event (struct parport *port, signed long timeout) + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Wait for an event (e.g. interrupt) on a port. The timeout is in +jiffies. + +RETURN VALUE +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +======= ========================================================== + 0 success + <0 error (exit as soon as possible) + >0 timed out +======= ========================================================== + +parport_negotiate - perform IEEE 1284 negotiation +------------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + int parport_negotiate (struct parport *, int mode); + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Perform IEEE 1284 negotiation. + +RETURN VALUE +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +======= ========================================================== + 0 handshake OK; IEEE 1284 peripheral and mode available + -1 handshake failed; peripheral not compliant (or none present) + 1 handshake OK; IEEE 1284 peripheral present but mode not + available +======= ========================================================== + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +parport_read, parport_write + + + +parport_read - read data from device +------------------------------------ + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + ssize_t parport_read (struct parport *, void *buf, size_t len); + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Read data from device in current IEEE 1284 transfer mode. This only +works for modes that support reverse data transfer. + +RETURN VALUE +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +If negative, an error code; otherwise the number of bytes transferred. + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +parport_write, parport_negotiate + + + +parport_write - write data to device +------------------------------------ + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + ssize_t parport_write (struct parport *, const void *buf, size_t len); + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Write data to device in current IEEE 1284 transfer mode. This only +works for modes that support forward data transfer. + +RETURN VALUE +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +If negative, an error code; otherwise the number of bytes transferred. + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +parport_read, parport_negotiate + + + +parport_open - register device for particular device number +----------------------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + struct pardevice *parport_open (int devnum, const char *name, + int (*pf) (void *), + void (*kf) (void *), + void (*irqf) (int, void *, + struct pt_regs *), + int flags, void *handle); + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +This is like parport_register_device but takes a device number instead +of a pointer to a struct parport. + +RETURN VALUE +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +See parport_register_device. If no device is associated with devnum, +NULL is returned. + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +parport_register_device + + + +parport_close - unregister device for particular device number +-------------------------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + void parport_close (struct pardevice *dev); + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +This is the equivalent of parport_unregister_device for parport_open. + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +parport_unregister_device, parport_open + + + +parport_device_id - obtain IEEE 1284 Device ID +---------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + ssize_t parport_device_id (int devnum, char *buffer, size_t len); + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Obtains the IEEE 1284 Device ID associated with a given device. + +RETURN VALUE +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +If negative, an error code; otherwise, the number of bytes of buffer +that contain the device ID. The format of the device ID is as +follows:: + + [length][ID] + +The first two bytes indicate the inclusive length of the entire Device +ID, and are in big-endian order. The ID is a sequence of pairs of the +form:: + + key:value; + +NOTES +^^^^^ + +Many devices have ill-formed IEEE 1284 Device IDs. + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +parport_find_class, parport_find_device + + + +parport_device_coords - convert device number to device coordinates +------------------------------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + int parport_device_coords (int devnum, int *parport, int *mux, + int *daisy); + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Convert between device number (zero-based) and device coordinates +(port, multiplexor, daisy chain address). + +RETURN VALUE +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Zero on success, in which case the coordinates are (``*parport``, ``*mux``, +``*daisy``). + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +parport_open, parport_device_id + + + +parport_find_class - find a device by its class +----------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + typedef enum { + PARPORT_CLASS_LEGACY = 0, /* Non-IEEE1284 device */ + PARPORT_CLASS_PRINTER, + PARPORT_CLASS_MODEM, + PARPORT_CLASS_NET, + PARPORT_CLASS_HDC, /* Hard disk controller */ + PARPORT_CLASS_PCMCIA, + PARPORT_CLASS_MEDIA, /* Multimedia device */ + PARPORT_CLASS_FDC, /* Floppy disk controller */ + PARPORT_CLASS_PORTS, + PARPORT_CLASS_SCANNER, + PARPORT_CLASS_DIGCAM, + PARPORT_CLASS_OTHER, /* Anything else */ + PARPORT_CLASS_UNSPEC, /* No CLS field in ID */ + PARPORT_CLASS_SCSIADAPTER + } parport_device_class; + + int parport_find_class (parport_device_class cls, int from); + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Find a device by class. The search starts from device number from+1. + +RETURN VALUE +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +The device number of the next device in that class, or -1 if no such +device exists. + +NOTES +^^^^^ + +Example usage:: + + int devnum = -1; + while ((devnum = parport_find_class (PARPORT_CLASS_DIGCAM, devnum)) != -1) { + struct pardevice *dev = parport_open (devnum, ...); + ... + } + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +parport_find_device, parport_open, parport_device_id + + + +parport_find_device - find a device by its class +------------------------------------------------ + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + int parport_find_device (const char *mfg, const char *mdl, int from); + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Find a device by vendor and model. The search starts from device +number from+1. + +RETURN VALUE +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +The device number of the next device matching the specifications, or +-1 if no such device exists. + +NOTES +^^^^^ + +Example usage:: + + int devnum = -1; + while ((devnum = parport_find_device ("IOMEGA", "ZIP+", devnum)) != -1) { + struct pardevice *dev = parport_open (devnum, ...); + ... + } + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +parport_find_class, parport_open, parport_device_id + + + +parport_set_timeout - set the inactivity timeout +------------------------------------------------ + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + long parport_set_timeout (struct pardevice *dev, long inactivity); + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Set the inactivity timeout, in jiffies, for a registered device. The +previous timeout is returned. + +RETURN VALUE +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +The previous timeout, in jiffies. + +NOTES +^^^^^ + +Some of the port->ops functions for a parport may take time, owing to +delays at the peripheral. After the peripheral has not responded for +``inactivity`` jiffies, a timeout will occur and the blocking function +will return. + +A timeout of 0 jiffies is a special case: the function must do as much +as it can without blocking or leaving the hardware in an unknown +state. If port operations are performed from within an interrupt +handler, for instance, a timeout of 0 jiffies should be used. + +Once set for a registered device, the timeout will remain at the set +value until set again. + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +port->ops->xxx_read/write_yyy + + + + +PORT FUNCTIONS +============== + +The functions in the port->ops structure (struct parport_operations) +are provided by the low-level driver responsible for that port. + +port->ops->read_data - read the data register +--------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + struct parport_operations { + ... + unsigned char (*read_data) (struct parport *port); + ... + }; + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +If port->modes contains the PARPORT_MODE_TRISTATE flag and the +PARPORT_CONTROL_DIRECTION bit in the control register is set, this +returns the value on the data pins. If port->modes contains the +PARPORT_MODE_TRISTATE flag and the PARPORT_CONTROL_DIRECTION bit is +not set, the return value _may_ be the last value written to the data +register. Otherwise the return value is undefined. + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +write_data, read_status, write_control + + + +port->ops->write_data - write the data register +----------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + struct parport_operations { + ... + void (*write_data) (struct parport *port, unsigned char d); + ... + }; + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Writes to the data register. May have side-effects (a STROBE pulse, +for instance). + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +read_data, read_status, write_control + + + +port->ops->read_status - read the status register +------------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + struct parport_operations { + ... + unsigned char (*read_status) (struct parport *port); + ... + }; + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Reads from the status register. This is a bitmask: + +- PARPORT_STATUS_ERROR (printer fault, "nFault") +- PARPORT_STATUS_SELECT (on-line, "Select") +- PARPORT_STATUS_PAPEROUT (no paper, "PError") +- PARPORT_STATUS_ACK (handshake, "nAck") +- PARPORT_STATUS_BUSY (busy, "Busy") + +There may be other bits set. + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +read_data, write_data, write_control + + + +port->ops->read_control - read the control register +--------------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + struct parport_operations { + ... + unsigned char (*read_control) (struct parport *port); + ... + }; + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Returns the last value written to the control register (either from +write_control or frob_control). No port access is performed. + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +read_data, write_data, read_status, write_control + + + +port->ops->write_control - write the control register +----------------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + struct parport_operations { + ... + void (*write_control) (struct parport *port, unsigned char s); + ... + }; + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Writes to the control register. This is a bitmask:: + + _______ + - PARPORT_CONTROL_STROBE (nStrobe) + _______ + - PARPORT_CONTROL_AUTOFD (nAutoFd) + _____ + - PARPORT_CONTROL_INIT (nInit) + _________ + - PARPORT_CONTROL_SELECT (nSelectIn) + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +read_data, write_data, read_status, frob_control + + + +port->ops->frob_control - write control register bits +----------------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + struct parport_operations { + ... + unsigned char (*frob_control) (struct parport *port, + unsigned char mask, + unsigned char val); + ... + }; + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +This is equivalent to reading from the control register, masking out +the bits in mask, exclusive-or'ing with the bits in val, and writing +the result to the control register. + +As some ports don't allow reads from the control port, a software copy +of its contents is maintained, so frob_control is in fact only one +port access. + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +read_data, write_data, read_status, write_control + + + +port->ops->enable_irq - enable interrupt generation +--------------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + struct parport_operations { + ... + void (*enable_irq) (struct parport *port); + ... + }; + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +The parallel port hardware is instructed to generate interrupts at +appropriate moments, although those moments are +architecture-specific. For the PC architecture, interrupts are +commonly generated on the rising edge of nAck. + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +disable_irq + + + +port->ops->disable_irq - disable interrupt generation +----------------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + struct parport_operations { + ... + void (*disable_irq) (struct parport *port); + ... + }; + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +The parallel port hardware is instructed not to generate interrupts. +The interrupt itself is not masked. + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +enable_irq + + + +port->ops->data_forward - enable data drivers +--------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + struct parport_operations { + ... + void (*data_forward) (struct parport *port); + ... + }; + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Enables the data line drivers, for 8-bit host-to-peripheral +communications. + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +data_reverse + + + +port->ops->data_reverse - tristate the buffer +--------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + struct parport_operations { + ... + void (*data_reverse) (struct parport *port); + ... + }; + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Places the data bus in a high impedance state, if port->modes has the +PARPORT_MODE_TRISTATE bit set. + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +data_forward + + + +port->ops->epp_write_data - write EPP data +------------------------------------------ + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + struct parport_operations { + ... + size_t (*epp_write_data) (struct parport *port, const void *buf, + size_t len, int flags); + ... + }; + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Writes data in EPP mode, and returns the number of bytes written. + +The ``flags`` parameter may be one or more of the following, +bitwise-or'ed together: + +======================= ================================================= +PARPORT_EPP_FAST Use fast transfers. Some chips provide 16-bit and + 32-bit registers. However, if a transfer + times out, the return value may be unreliable. +======================= ================================================= + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +epp_read_data, epp_write_addr, epp_read_addr + + + +port->ops->epp_read_data - read EPP data +---------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + struct parport_operations { + ... + size_t (*epp_read_data) (struct parport *port, void *buf, + size_t len, int flags); + ... + }; + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Reads data in EPP mode, and returns the number of bytes read. + +The ``flags`` parameter may be one or more of the following, +bitwise-or'ed together: + +======================= ================================================= +PARPORT_EPP_FAST Use fast transfers. Some chips provide 16-bit and + 32-bit registers. However, if a transfer + times out, the return value may be unreliable. +======================= ================================================= + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +epp_write_data, epp_write_addr, epp_read_addr + + + +port->ops->epp_write_addr - write EPP address +--------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + struct parport_operations { + ... + size_t (*epp_write_addr) (struct parport *port, + const void *buf, size_t len, int flags); + ... + }; + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Writes EPP addresses (8 bits each), and returns the number written. + +The ``flags`` parameter may be one or more of the following, +bitwise-or'ed together: + +======================= ================================================= +PARPORT_EPP_FAST Use fast transfers. Some chips provide 16-bit and + 32-bit registers. However, if a transfer + times out, the return value may be unreliable. +======================= ================================================= + +(Does PARPORT_EPP_FAST make sense for this function?) + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +epp_write_data, epp_read_data, epp_read_addr + + + +port->ops->epp_read_addr - read EPP address +------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + struct parport_operations { + ... + size_t (*epp_read_addr) (struct parport *port, void *buf, + size_t len, int flags); + ... + }; + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Reads EPP addresses (8 bits each), and returns the number read. + +The ``flags`` parameter may be one or more of the following, +bitwise-or'ed together: + +======================= ================================================= +PARPORT_EPP_FAST Use fast transfers. Some chips provide 16-bit and + 32-bit registers. However, if a transfer + times out, the return value may be unreliable. +======================= ================================================= + +(Does PARPORT_EPP_FAST make sense for this function?) + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +epp_write_data, epp_read_data, epp_write_addr + + + +port->ops->ecp_write_data - write a block of ECP data +----------------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + struct parport_operations { + ... + size_t (*ecp_write_data) (struct parport *port, + const void *buf, size_t len, int flags); + ... + }; + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Writes a block of ECP data. The ``flags`` parameter is ignored. + +RETURN VALUE +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +The number of bytes written. + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +ecp_read_data, ecp_write_addr + + + +port->ops->ecp_read_data - read a block of ECP data +--------------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + struct parport_operations { + ... + size_t (*ecp_read_data) (struct parport *port, + void *buf, size_t len, int flags); + ... + }; + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Reads a block of ECP data. The ``flags`` parameter is ignored. + +RETURN VALUE +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +The number of bytes read. NB. There may be more unread data in a +FIFO. Is there a way of stunning the FIFO to prevent this? + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +ecp_write_block, ecp_write_addr + + + +port->ops->ecp_write_addr - write a block of ECP addresses +---------------------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + struct parport_operations { + ... + size_t (*ecp_write_addr) (struct parport *port, + const void *buf, size_t len, int flags); + ... + }; + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Writes a block of ECP addresses. The ``flags`` parameter is ignored. + +RETURN VALUE +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +The number of bytes written. + +NOTES +^^^^^ + +This may use a FIFO, and if so shall not return until the FIFO is empty. + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +ecp_read_data, ecp_write_data + + + +port->ops->nibble_read_data - read a block of data in nibble mode +----------------------------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + struct parport_operations { + ... + size_t (*nibble_read_data) (struct parport *port, + void *buf, size_t len, int flags); + ... + }; + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Reads a block of data in nibble mode. The ``flags`` parameter is ignored. + +RETURN VALUE +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +The number of whole bytes read. + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +byte_read_data, compat_write_data + + + +port->ops->byte_read_data - read a block of data in byte mode +------------------------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + struct parport_operations { + ... + size_t (*byte_read_data) (struct parport *port, + void *buf, size_t len, int flags); + ... + }; + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Reads a block of data in byte mode. The ``flags`` parameter is ignored. + +RETURN VALUE +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +The number of bytes read. + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +nibble_read_data, compat_write_data + + + +port->ops->compat_write_data - write a block of data in compatibility mode +-------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +SYNOPSIS +^^^^^^^^ + +:: + + #include <linux/parport.h> + + struct parport_operations { + ... + size_t (*compat_write_data) (struct parport *port, + const void *buf, size_t len, int flags); + ... + }; + +DESCRIPTION +^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Writes a block of data in compatibility mode. The ``flags`` parameter +is ignored. + +RETURN VALUE +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +The number of bytes written. + +SEE ALSO +^^^^^^^^ + +nibble_read_data, byte_read_data diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/phy/index.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/phy/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..69ba1216de72 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/phy/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +===================== +Generic PHY Framework +===================== + +.. toctree:: + + phy + samsung-usb2 + +.. only:: subproject and html + + Indices + ======= + + * :ref:`genindex` + diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/phy/phy.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/phy/phy.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..457c3e0f86d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/phy/phy.rst @@ -0,0 +1,197 @@ +============= +PHY subsystem +============= + +:Author: Kishon Vijay Abraham I <kishon@ti.com> + +This document explains the Generic PHY Framework along with the APIs provided, +and how-to-use. + +Introduction +============ + +*PHY* is the abbreviation for physical layer. It is used to connect a device +to the physical medium e.g., the USB controller has a PHY to provide functions +such as serialization, de-serialization, encoding, decoding and is responsible +for obtaining the required data transmission rate. Note that some USB +controllers have PHY functionality embedded into it and others use an external +PHY. Other peripherals that use PHY include Wireless LAN, Ethernet, +SATA etc. + +The intention of creating this framework is to bring the PHY drivers spread +all over the Linux kernel to drivers/phy to increase code re-use and for +better code maintainability. + +This framework will be of use only to devices that use external PHY (PHY +functionality is not embedded within the controller). + +Registering/Unregistering the PHY provider +========================================== + +PHY provider refers to an entity that implements one or more PHY instances. +For the simple case where the PHY provider implements only a single instance of +the PHY, the framework provides its own implementation of of_xlate in +of_phy_simple_xlate. If the PHY provider implements multiple instances, it +should provide its own implementation of of_xlate. of_xlate is used only for +dt boot case. + +:: + + #define of_phy_provider_register(dev, xlate) \ + __of_phy_provider_register((dev), NULL, THIS_MODULE, (xlate)) + + #define devm_of_phy_provider_register(dev, xlate) \ + __devm_of_phy_provider_register((dev), NULL, THIS_MODULE, + (xlate)) + +of_phy_provider_register and devm_of_phy_provider_register macros can be used to +register the phy_provider and it takes device and of_xlate as +arguments. For the dt boot case, all PHY providers should use one of the above +2 macros to register the PHY provider. + +Often the device tree nodes associated with a PHY provider will contain a set +of children that each represent a single PHY. Some bindings may nest the child +nodes within extra levels for context and extensibility, in which case the low +level of_phy_provider_register_full() and devm_of_phy_provider_register_full() +macros can be used to override the node containing the children. + +:: + + #define of_phy_provider_register_full(dev, children, xlate) \ + __of_phy_provider_register(dev, children, THIS_MODULE, xlate) + + #define devm_of_phy_provider_register_full(dev, children, xlate) \ + __devm_of_phy_provider_register_full(dev, children, + THIS_MODULE, xlate) + + void devm_of_phy_provider_unregister(struct device *dev, + struct phy_provider *phy_provider); + void of_phy_provider_unregister(struct phy_provider *phy_provider); + +devm_of_phy_provider_unregister and of_phy_provider_unregister can be used to +unregister the PHY. + +Creating the PHY +================ + +The PHY driver should create the PHY in order for other peripheral controllers +to make use of it. The PHY framework provides 2 APIs to create the PHY. + +:: + + struct phy *phy_create(struct device *dev, struct device_node *node, + const struct phy_ops *ops); + struct phy *devm_phy_create(struct device *dev, + struct device_node *node, + const struct phy_ops *ops); + +The PHY drivers can use one of the above 2 APIs to create the PHY by passing +the device pointer and phy ops. +phy_ops is a set of function pointers for performing PHY operations such as +init, exit, power_on and power_off. + +Inorder to dereference the private data (in phy_ops), the phy provider driver +can use phy_set_drvdata() after creating the PHY and use phy_get_drvdata() in +phy_ops to get back the private data. + +4. Getting a reference to the PHY + +Before the controller can make use of the PHY, it has to get a reference to +it. This framework provides the following APIs to get a reference to the PHY. + +:: + + struct phy *phy_get(struct device *dev, const char *string); + struct phy *phy_optional_get(struct device *dev, const char *string); + struct phy *devm_phy_get(struct device *dev, const char *string); + struct phy *devm_phy_optional_get(struct device *dev, + const char *string); + struct phy *devm_of_phy_get_by_index(struct device *dev, + struct device_node *np, + int index); + +phy_get, phy_optional_get, devm_phy_get and devm_phy_optional_get can +be used to get the PHY. In the case of dt boot, the string arguments +should contain the phy name as given in the dt data and in the case of +non-dt boot, it should contain the label of the PHY. The two +devm_phy_get associates the device with the PHY using devres on +successful PHY get. On driver detach, release function is invoked on +the devres data and devres data is freed. phy_optional_get and +devm_phy_optional_get should be used when the phy is optional. These +two functions will never return -ENODEV, but instead returns NULL when +the phy cannot be found.Some generic drivers, such as ehci, may use multiple +phys and for such drivers referencing phy(s) by name(s) does not make sense. In +this case, devm_of_phy_get_by_index can be used to get a phy reference based on +the index. + +It should be noted that NULL is a valid phy reference. All phy +consumer calls on the NULL phy become NOPs. That is the release calls, +the phy_init() and phy_exit() calls, and phy_power_on() and +phy_power_off() calls are all NOP when applied to a NULL phy. The NULL +phy is useful in devices for handling optional phy devices. + +Releasing a reference to the PHY +================================ + +When the controller no longer needs the PHY, it has to release the reference +to the PHY it has obtained using the APIs mentioned in the above section. The +PHY framework provides 2 APIs to release a reference to the PHY. + +:: + + void phy_put(struct phy *phy); + void devm_phy_put(struct device *dev, struct phy *phy); + +Both these APIs are used to release a reference to the PHY and devm_phy_put +destroys the devres associated with this PHY. + +Destroying the PHY +================== + +When the driver that created the PHY is unloaded, it should destroy the PHY it +created using one of the following 2 APIs:: + + void phy_destroy(struct phy *phy); + void devm_phy_destroy(struct device *dev, struct phy *phy); + +Both these APIs destroy the PHY and devm_phy_destroy destroys the devres +associated with this PHY. + +PM Runtime +========== + +This subsystem is pm runtime enabled. So while creating the PHY, +pm_runtime_enable of the phy device created by this subsystem is called and +while destroying the PHY, pm_runtime_disable is called. Note that the phy +device created by this subsystem will be a child of the device that calls +phy_create (PHY provider device). + +So pm_runtime_get_sync of the phy_device created by this subsystem will invoke +pm_runtime_get_sync of PHY provider device because of parent-child relationship. +It should also be noted that phy_power_on and phy_power_off performs +phy_pm_runtime_get_sync and phy_pm_runtime_put respectively. +There are exported APIs like phy_pm_runtime_get, phy_pm_runtime_get_sync, +phy_pm_runtime_put, phy_pm_runtime_put_sync, phy_pm_runtime_allow and +phy_pm_runtime_forbid for performing PM operations. + +PHY Mappings +============ + +In order to get reference to a PHY without help from DeviceTree, the framework +offers lookups which can be compared to clkdev that allow clk structures to be +bound to devices. A lookup can be made be made during runtime when a handle to +the struct phy already exists. + +The framework offers the following API for registering and unregistering the +lookups:: + + int phy_create_lookup(struct phy *phy, const char *con_id, + const char *dev_id); + void phy_remove_lookup(struct phy *phy, const char *con_id, + const char *dev_id); + +DeviceTree Binding +================== + +The documentation for PHY dt binding can be found @ +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-bindings.txt diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/phy/samsung-usb2.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/phy/samsung-usb2.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c48c8b9797b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/phy/samsung-usb2.rst @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ +==================================== +Samsung USB 2.0 PHY adaptation layer +==================================== + +1. Description +-------------- + +The architecture of the USB 2.0 PHY module in Samsung SoCs is similar +among many SoCs. In spite of the similarities it proved difficult to +create a one driver that would fit all these PHY controllers. Often +the differences were minor and were found in particular bits of the +registers of the PHY. In some rare cases the order of register writes or +the PHY powering up process had to be altered. This adaptation layer is +a compromise between having separate drivers and having a single driver +with added support for many special cases. + +2. Files description +-------------------- + +- phy-samsung-usb2.c + This is the main file of the adaptation layer. This file contains + the probe function and provides two callbacks to the Generic PHY + Framework. This two callbacks are used to power on and power off the + phy. They carry out the common work that has to be done on all version + of the PHY module. Depending on which SoC was chosen they execute SoC + specific callbacks. The specific SoC version is selected by choosing + the appropriate compatible string. In addition, this file contains + struct of_device_id definitions for particular SoCs. + +- phy-samsung-usb2.h + This is the include file. It declares the structures used by this + driver. In addition it should contain extern declarations for + structures that describe particular SoCs. + +3. Supporting SoCs +------------------ + +To support a new SoC a new file should be added to the drivers/phy +directory. Each SoC's configuration is stored in an instance of the +struct samsung_usb2_phy_config:: + + struct samsung_usb2_phy_config { + const struct samsung_usb2_common_phy *phys; + int (*rate_to_clk)(unsigned long, u32 *); + unsigned int num_phys; + bool has_mode_switch; + }; + +The num_phys is the number of phys handled by the driver. `*phys` is an +array that contains the configuration for each phy. The has_mode_switch +property is a boolean flag that determines whether the SoC has USB host +and device on a single pair of pins. If so, a special register has to +be modified to change the internal routing of these pins between a USB +device or host module. + +For example the configuration for Exynos 4210 is following:: + + const struct samsung_usb2_phy_config exynos4210_usb2_phy_config = { + .has_mode_switch = 0, + .num_phys = EXYNOS4210_NUM_PHYS, + .phys = exynos4210_phys, + .rate_to_clk = exynos4210_rate_to_clk, + } + +- `int (*rate_to_clk)(unsigned long, u32 *)` + + The rate_to_clk callback is to convert the rate of the clock + used as the reference clock for the PHY module to the value + that should be written in the hardware register. + +The exynos4210_phys configuration array is as follows:: + + static const struct samsung_usb2_common_phy exynos4210_phys[] = { + { + .label = "device", + .id = EXYNOS4210_DEVICE, + .power_on = exynos4210_power_on, + .power_off = exynos4210_power_off, + }, + { + .label = "host", + .id = EXYNOS4210_HOST, + .power_on = exynos4210_power_on, + .power_off = exynos4210_power_off, + }, + { + .label = "hsic0", + .id = EXYNOS4210_HSIC0, + .power_on = exynos4210_power_on, + .power_off = exynos4210_power_off, + }, + { + .label = "hsic1", + .id = EXYNOS4210_HSIC1, + .power_on = exynos4210_power_on, + .power_off = exynos4210_power_off, + }, + {}, + }; + +- `int (*power_on)(struct samsung_usb2_phy_instance *);` + `int (*power_off)(struct samsung_usb2_phy_instance *);` + + These two callbacks are used to power on and power off the phy + by modifying appropriate registers. + +Final change to the driver is adding appropriate compatible value to the +phy-samsung-usb2.c file. In case of Exynos 4210 the following lines were +added to the struct of_device_id samsung_usb2_phy_of_match[] array:: + + #ifdef CONFIG_PHY_EXYNOS4210_USB2 + { + .compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-usb2-phy", + .data = &exynos4210_usb2_phy_config, + }, + #endif + +To add further flexibility to the driver the Kconfig file enables to +include support for selected SoCs in the compiled driver. The Kconfig +entry for Exynos 4210 is following:: + + config PHY_EXYNOS4210_USB2 + bool "Support for Exynos 4210" + depends on PHY_SAMSUNG_USB2 + depends on CPU_EXYNOS4210 + help + Enable USB PHY support for Exynos 4210. This option requires that + Samsung USB 2.0 PHY driver is enabled and means that support for this + particular SoC is compiled in the driver. In case of Exynos 4210 four + phys are available - device, host, HSCI0 and HSCI1. + +The newly created file that supports the new SoC has to be also added to the +Makefile. In case of Exynos 4210 the added line is following:: + + obj-$(CONFIG_PHY_EXYNOS4210_USB2) += phy-exynos4210-usb2.o + +After completing these steps the support for the new SoC should be ready. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/pps.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/pps.rst index 1456d2c32ebd..2d6b99766ee8 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/pps.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/pps.rst @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -:orphan: +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 ====================== PPS - Pulse Per Second diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/pti_intel_mid.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/pti_intel_mid.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..20f1cff42d5f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/pti_intel_mid.rst @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +============= +Intel MID PTI +============= + +The Intel MID PTI project is HW implemented in Intel Atom +system-on-a-chip designs based on the Parallel Trace +Interface for MIPI P1149.7 cJTAG standard. The kernel solution +for this platform involves the following files:: + + ./include/linux/pti.h + ./drivers/.../n_tracesink.h + ./drivers/.../n_tracerouter.c + ./drivers/.../n_tracesink.c + ./drivers/.../pti.c + +pti.c is the driver that enables various debugging features +popular on platforms from certain mobile manufacturers. +n_tracerouter.c and n_tracesink.c allow extra system information to +be collected and routed to the pti driver, such as trace +debugging data from a modem. Although n_tracerouter +and n_tracesink are a part of the complete PTI solution, +these two line disciplines can work separately from +pti.c and route any data stream from one /dev/tty node +to another /dev/tty node via kernel-space. This provides +a stable, reliable connection that will not break unless +the user-space application shuts down (plus avoids +kernel->user->kernel context switch overheads of routing +data). + +An example debugging usage for this driver system: + + * Hook /dev/ttyPTI0 to syslogd. Opening this port will also start + a console device to further capture debugging messages to PTI. + * Hook /dev/ttyPTI1 to modem debugging data to write to PTI HW. + This is where n_tracerouter and n_tracesink are used. + * Hook /dev/pti to a user-level debugging application for writing + to PTI HW. + * `Use mipi_` Kernel Driver API in other device drivers for + debugging to PTI by first requesting a PTI write address via + mipi_request_masterchannel(1). + +Below is example pseudo-code on how a 'privileged' application +can hook up n_tracerouter and n_tracesink to any tty on +a system. 'Privileged' means the application has enough +privileges to successfully manipulate the ldisc drivers +but is not just blindly executing as 'root'. Keep in mind +the use of ioctl(,TIOCSETD,) is not specific to the n_tracerouter +and n_tracesink line discpline drivers but is a generic +operation for a program to use a line discpline driver +on a tty port other than the default n_tty:: + + /////////// To hook up n_tracerouter and n_tracesink ///////// + + // Note that n_tracerouter depends on n_tracesink. + #include <errno.h> + #define ONE_TTY "/dev/ttyOne" + #define TWO_TTY "/dev/ttyTwo" + + // needed global to hand onto ldisc connection + static int g_fd_source = -1; + static int g_fd_sink = -1; + + // these two vars used to grab LDISC values from loaded ldisc drivers + // in OS. Look at /proc/tty/ldiscs to get the right numbers from + // the ldiscs loaded in the system. + int source_ldisc_num, sink_ldisc_num = -1; + int retval; + + g_fd_source = open(ONE_TTY, O_RDWR); // must be R/W + g_fd_sink = open(TWO_TTY, O_RDWR); // must be R/W + + if (g_fd_source <= 0) || (g_fd_sink <= 0) { + // doubt you'll want to use these exact error lines of code + printf("Error on open(). errno: %d\n",errno); + return errno; + } + + retval = ioctl(g_fd_sink, TIOCSETD, &sink_ldisc_num); + if (retval < 0) { + printf("Error on ioctl(). errno: %d\n", errno); + return errno; + } + + retval = ioctl(g_fd_source, TIOCSETD, &source_ldisc_num); + if (retval < 0) { + printf("Error on ioctl(). errno: %d\n", errno); + return errno; + } + + /////////// To disconnect n_tracerouter and n_tracesink //////// + + // First make sure data through the ldiscs has stopped. + + // Second, disconnect ldiscs. This provides a + // little cleaner shutdown on tty stack. + sink_ldisc_num = 0; + source_ldisc_num = 0; + ioctl(g_fd_uart, TIOCSETD, &sink_ldisc_num); + ioctl(g_fd_gadget, TIOCSETD, &source_ldisc_num); + + // Three, program closes connection, and cleanup: + close(g_fd_uart); + close(g_fd_gadget); + g_fd_uart = g_fd_gadget = NULL; diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/ptp.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/ptp.rst index b6e65d66d37a..a15192e32347 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/ptp.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/ptp.rst @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -:orphan: +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 =========================================== PTP hardware clock infrastructure for Linux diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/pwm.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/pwm.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ab62f1bb0366 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/pwm.rst @@ -0,0 +1,165 @@ +====================================== +Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) interface +====================================== + +This provides an overview about the Linux PWM interface + +PWMs are commonly used for controlling LEDs, fans or vibrators in +cell phones. PWMs with a fixed purpose have no need implementing +the Linux PWM API (although they could). However, PWMs are often +found as discrete devices on SoCs which have no fixed purpose. It's +up to the board designer to connect them to LEDs or fans. To provide +this kind of flexibility the generic PWM API exists. + +Identifying PWMs +---------------- + +Users of the legacy PWM API use unique IDs to refer to PWM devices. + +Instead of referring to a PWM device via its unique ID, board setup code +should instead register a static mapping that can be used to match PWM +consumers to providers, as given in the following example:: + + static struct pwm_lookup board_pwm_lookup[] = { + PWM_LOOKUP("tegra-pwm", 0, "pwm-backlight", NULL, + 50000, PWM_POLARITY_NORMAL), + }; + + static void __init board_init(void) + { + ... + pwm_add_table(board_pwm_lookup, ARRAY_SIZE(board_pwm_lookup)); + ... + } + +Using PWMs +---------- + +Legacy users can request a PWM device using pwm_request() and free it +after usage with pwm_free(). + +New users should use the pwm_get() function and pass to it the consumer +device or a consumer name. pwm_put() is used to free the PWM device. Managed +variants of these functions, devm_pwm_get() and devm_pwm_put(), also exist. + +After being requested, a PWM has to be configured using:: + + int pwm_apply_state(struct pwm_device *pwm, struct pwm_state *state); + +This API controls both the PWM period/duty_cycle config and the +enable/disable state. + +The pwm_config(), pwm_enable() and pwm_disable() functions are just wrappers +around pwm_apply_state() and should not be used if the user wants to change +several parameter at once. For example, if you see pwm_config() and +pwm_{enable,disable}() calls in the same function, this probably means you +should switch to pwm_apply_state(). + +The PWM user API also allows one to query the PWM state with pwm_get_state(). + +In addition to the PWM state, the PWM API also exposes PWM arguments, which +are the reference PWM config one should use on this PWM. +PWM arguments are usually platform-specific and allows the PWM user to only +care about dutycycle relatively to the full period (like, duty = 50% of the +period). struct pwm_args contains 2 fields (period and polarity) and should +be used to set the initial PWM config (usually done in the probe function +of the PWM user). PWM arguments are retrieved with pwm_get_args(). + +All consumers should really be reconfiguring the PWM upon resume as +appropriate. This is the only way to ensure that everything is resumed in +the proper order. + +Using PWMs with the sysfs interface +----------------------------------- + +If CONFIG_SYSFS is enabled in your kernel configuration a simple sysfs +interface is provided to use the PWMs from userspace. It is exposed at +/sys/class/pwm/. Each probed PWM controller/chip will be exported as +pwmchipN, where N is the base of the PWM chip. Inside the directory you +will find: + + npwm + The number of PWM channels this chip supports (read-only). + + export + Exports a PWM channel for use with sysfs (write-only). + + unexport + Unexports a PWM channel from sysfs (write-only). + +The PWM channels are numbered using a per-chip index from 0 to npwm-1. + +When a PWM channel is exported a pwmX directory will be created in the +pwmchipN directory it is associated with, where X is the number of the +channel that was exported. The following properties will then be available: + + period + The total period of the PWM signal (read/write). + Value is in nanoseconds and is the sum of the active and inactive + time of the PWM. + + duty_cycle + The active time of the PWM signal (read/write). + Value is in nanoseconds and must be less than the period. + + polarity + Changes the polarity of the PWM signal (read/write). + Writes to this property only work if the PWM chip supports changing + the polarity. The polarity can only be changed if the PWM is not + enabled. Value is the string "normal" or "inversed". + + enable + Enable/disable the PWM signal (read/write). + + - 0 - disabled + - 1 - enabled + +Implementing a PWM driver +------------------------- + +Currently there are two ways to implement pwm drivers. Traditionally +there only has been the barebone API meaning that each driver has +to implement the pwm_*() functions itself. This means that it's impossible +to have multiple PWM drivers in the system. For this reason it's mandatory +for new drivers to use the generic PWM framework. + +A new PWM controller/chip can be added using pwmchip_add() and removed +again with pwmchip_remove(). pwmchip_add() takes a filled in struct +pwm_chip as argument which provides a description of the PWM chip, the +number of PWM devices provided by the chip and the chip-specific +implementation of the supported PWM operations to the framework. + +When implementing polarity support in a PWM driver, make sure to respect the +signal conventions in the PWM framework. By definition, normal polarity +characterizes a signal starts high for the duration of the duty cycle and +goes low for the remainder of the period. Conversely, a signal with inversed +polarity starts low for the duration of the duty cycle and goes high for the +remainder of the period. + +Drivers are encouraged to implement ->apply() instead of the legacy +->enable(), ->disable() and ->config() methods. Doing that should provide +atomicity in the PWM config workflow, which is required when the PWM controls +a critical device (like a regulator). + +The implementation of ->get_state() (a method used to retrieve initial PWM +state) is also encouraged for the same reason: letting the PWM user know +about the current PWM state would allow him to avoid glitches. + +Drivers should not implement any power management. In other words, +consumers should implement it as described in the "Using PWMs" section. + +Locking +------- + +The PWM core list manipulations are protected by a mutex, so pwm_request() +and pwm_free() may not be called from an atomic context. Currently the +PWM core does not enforce any locking to pwm_enable(), pwm_disable() and +pwm_config(), so the calling context is currently driver specific. This +is an issue derived from the former barebone API and should be fixed soon. + +Helpers +------- + +Currently a PWM can only be configured with period_ns and duty_ns. For several +use cases freq_hz and duty_percent might be better. Instead of calculating +this in your driver please consider adding appropriate helpers to the framework. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/rapidio.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/rapidio.rst deleted file mode 100644 index 71ff658ab78e..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/rapidio.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,107 +0,0 @@ -======================= -RapidIO Subsystem Guide -======================= - -:Author: Matt Porter - -Introduction -============ - -RapidIO is a high speed switched fabric interconnect with features aimed -at the embedded market. RapidIO provides support for memory-mapped I/O -as well as message-based transactions over the switched fabric network. -RapidIO has a standardized discovery mechanism not unlike the PCI bus -standard that allows simple detection of devices in a network. - -This documentation is provided for developers intending to support -RapidIO on new architectures, write new drivers, or to understand the -subsystem internals. - -Known Bugs and Limitations -========================== - -Bugs ----- - -None. ;) - -Limitations ------------ - -1. Access/management of RapidIO memory regions is not supported - -2. Multiple host enumeration is not supported - -RapidIO driver interface -======================== - -Drivers are provided a set of calls in order to interface with the -subsystem to gather info on devices, request/map memory region -resources, and manage mailboxes/doorbells. - -Functions ---------- - -.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/rio_drv.h - :internal: - -.. kernel-doc:: drivers/rapidio/rio-driver.c - :export: - -.. kernel-doc:: drivers/rapidio/rio.c - :export: - -Internals -========= - -This chapter contains the autogenerated documentation of the RapidIO -subsystem. - -Structures ----------- - -.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/rio.h - :internal: - -Enumeration and Discovery -------------------------- - -.. kernel-doc:: drivers/rapidio/rio-scan.c - :internal: - -Driver functionality --------------------- - -.. kernel-doc:: drivers/rapidio/rio.c - :internal: - -.. kernel-doc:: drivers/rapidio/rio-access.c - :internal: - -Device model support --------------------- - -.. kernel-doc:: drivers/rapidio/rio-driver.c - :internal: - -PPC32 support -------------- - -.. kernel-doc:: arch/powerpc/sysdev/fsl_rio.c - :internal: - -Credits -======= - -The following people have contributed to the RapidIO subsystem directly -or indirectly: - -1. Matt Porter\ mporter@kernel.crashing.org - -2. Randy Vinson\ rvinson@mvista.com - -3. Dan Malek\ dan@embeddedalley.com - -The following people have contributed to this document: - -1. Matt Porter\ mporter@kernel.crashing.org diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/rapidio/index.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/rapidio/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a41b4242d16f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/rapidio/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +=========================== +The Linux RapidIO Subsystem +=========================== + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 1 + + rapidio + sysfs + + tsi721 + mport_cdev + rio_cm diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/rapidio/mport_cdev.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/rapidio/mport_cdev.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..df77a7f7be7d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/rapidio/mport_cdev.rst @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ +================================================================== +RapidIO subsystem mport character device driver (rio_mport_cdev.c) +================================================================== + +1. Overview +=========== + +This device driver is the result of collaboration within the RapidIO.org +Software Task Group (STG) between Texas Instruments, Freescale, +Prodrive Technologies, Nokia Networks, BAE and IDT. Additional input was +received from other members of RapidIO.org. The objective was to create a +character mode driver interface which exposes the capabilities of RapidIO +devices directly to applications, in a manner that allows the numerous and +varied RapidIO implementations to interoperate. + +This driver (MPORT_CDEV) provides access to basic RapidIO subsystem operations +for user-space applications. Most of RapidIO operations are supported through +'ioctl' system calls. + +When loaded this device driver creates filesystem nodes named rio_mportX in /dev +directory for each registered RapidIO mport device. 'X' in the node name matches +to unique port ID assigned to each local mport device. + +Using available set of ioctl commands user-space applications can perform +following RapidIO bus and subsystem operations: + +- Reads and writes from/to configuration registers of mport devices + (RIO_MPORT_MAINT_READ_LOCAL/RIO_MPORT_MAINT_WRITE_LOCAL) +- Reads and writes from/to configuration registers of remote RapidIO devices. + This operations are defined as RapidIO Maintenance reads/writes in RIO spec. + (RIO_MPORT_MAINT_READ_REMOTE/RIO_MPORT_MAINT_WRITE_REMOTE) +- Set RapidIO Destination ID for mport devices (RIO_MPORT_MAINT_HDID_SET) +- Set RapidIO Component Tag for mport devices (RIO_MPORT_MAINT_COMPTAG_SET) +- Query logical index of mport devices (RIO_MPORT_MAINT_PORT_IDX_GET) +- Query capabilities and RapidIO link configuration of mport devices + (RIO_MPORT_GET_PROPERTIES) +- Enable/Disable reporting of RapidIO doorbell events to user-space applications + (RIO_ENABLE_DOORBELL_RANGE/RIO_DISABLE_DOORBELL_RANGE) +- Enable/Disable reporting of RIO port-write events to user-space applications + (RIO_ENABLE_PORTWRITE_RANGE/RIO_DISABLE_PORTWRITE_RANGE) +- Query/Control type of events reported through this driver: doorbells, + port-writes or both (RIO_SET_EVENT_MASK/RIO_GET_EVENT_MASK) +- Configure/Map mport's outbound requests window(s) for specific size, + RapidIO destination ID, hopcount and request type + (RIO_MAP_OUTBOUND/RIO_UNMAP_OUTBOUND) +- Configure/Map mport's inbound requests window(s) for specific size, + RapidIO base address and local memory base address + (RIO_MAP_INBOUND/RIO_UNMAP_INBOUND) +- Allocate/Free contiguous DMA coherent memory buffer for DMA data transfers + to/from remote RapidIO devices (RIO_ALLOC_DMA/RIO_FREE_DMA) +- Initiate DMA data transfers to/from remote RapidIO devices (RIO_TRANSFER). + Supports blocking, asynchronous and posted (a.k.a 'fire-and-forget') data + transfer modes. +- Check/Wait for completion of asynchronous DMA data transfer + (RIO_WAIT_FOR_ASYNC) +- Manage device objects supported by RapidIO subsystem (RIO_DEV_ADD/RIO_DEV_DEL). + This allows implementation of various RapidIO fabric enumeration algorithms + as user-space applications while using remaining functionality provided by + kernel RapidIO subsystem. + +2. Hardware Compatibility +========================= + +This device driver uses standard interfaces defined by kernel RapidIO subsystem +and therefore it can be used with any mport device driver registered by RapidIO +subsystem with limitations set by available mport implementation. + +At this moment the most common limitation is availability of RapidIO-specific +DMA engine framework for specific mport device. Users should verify available +functionality of their platform when planning to use this driver: + +- IDT Tsi721 PCIe-to-RapidIO bridge device and its mport device driver are fully + compatible with this driver. +- Freescale SoCs 'fsl_rio' mport driver does not have implementation for RapidIO + specific DMA engine support and therefore DMA data transfers mport_cdev driver + are not available. + +3. Module parameters +==================== + +- 'dma_timeout' + - DMA transfer completion timeout (in msec, default value 3000). + This parameter set a maximum completion wait time for SYNC mode DMA + transfer requests and for RIO_WAIT_FOR_ASYNC ioctl requests. + +- 'dbg_level' + - This parameter allows to control amount of debug information + generated by this device driver. This parameter is formed by set of + bit masks that correspond to the specific functional blocks. + For mask definitions see 'drivers/rapidio/devices/rio_mport_cdev.c' + This parameter can be changed dynamically. + Use CONFIG_RAPIDIO_DEBUG=y to enable debug output at the top level. + +4. Known problems +================= + + None. + +5. User-space Applications and API +================================== + +API library and applications that use this device driver are available from +RapidIO.org. + +6. TODO List +============ + +- Add support for sending/receiving "raw" RapidIO messaging packets. +- Add memory mapped DMA data transfers as an option when RapidIO-specific DMA + is not available. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/rapidio/rapidio.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/rapidio/rapidio.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fb8942d3ba85 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/rapidio/rapidio.rst @@ -0,0 +1,362 @@ +============ +Introduction +============ + +The RapidIO standard is a packet-based fabric interconnect standard designed for +use in embedded systems. Development of the RapidIO standard is directed by the +RapidIO Trade Association (RTA). The current version of the RapidIO specification +is publicly available for download from the RTA web-site [1]. + +This document describes the basics of the Linux RapidIO subsystem and provides +information on its major components. + +1 Overview +========== + +Because the RapidIO subsystem follows the Linux device model it is integrated +into the kernel similarly to other buses by defining RapidIO-specific device and +bus types and registering them within the device model. + +The Linux RapidIO subsystem is architecture independent and therefore defines +architecture-specific interfaces that provide support for common RapidIO +subsystem operations. + +2. Core Components +================== + +A typical RapidIO network is a combination of endpoints and switches. +Each of these components is represented in the subsystem by an associated data +structure. The core logical components of the RapidIO subsystem are defined +in include/linux/rio.h file. + +2.1 Master Port +--------------- + +A master port (or mport) is a RapidIO interface controller that is local to the +processor executing the Linux code. A master port generates and receives RapidIO +packets (transactions). In the RapidIO subsystem each master port is represented +by a rio_mport data structure. This structure contains master port specific +resources such as mailboxes and doorbells. The rio_mport also includes a unique +host device ID that is valid when a master port is configured as an enumerating +host. + +RapidIO master ports are serviced by subsystem specific mport device drivers +that provide functionality defined for this subsystem. To provide a hardware +independent interface for RapidIO subsystem operations, rio_mport structure +includes rio_ops data structure which contains pointers to hardware specific +implementations of RapidIO functions. + +2.2 Device +---------- + +A RapidIO device is any endpoint (other than mport) or switch in the network. +All devices are presented in the RapidIO subsystem by corresponding rio_dev data +structure. Devices form one global device list and per-network device lists +(depending on number of available mports and networks). + +2.3 Switch +---------- + +A RapidIO switch is a special class of device that routes packets between its +ports towards their final destination. The packet destination port within a +switch is defined by an internal routing table. A switch is presented in the +RapidIO subsystem by rio_dev data structure expanded by additional rio_switch +data structure, which contains switch specific information such as copy of the +routing table and pointers to switch specific functions. + +The RapidIO subsystem defines the format and initialization method for subsystem +specific switch drivers that are designed to provide hardware-specific +implementation of common switch management routines. + +2.4 Network +----------- + +A RapidIO network is a combination of interconnected endpoint and switch devices. +Each RapidIO network known to the system is represented by corresponding rio_net +data structure. This structure includes lists of all devices and local master +ports that form the same network. It also contains a pointer to the default +master port that is used to communicate with devices within the network. + +2.5 Device Drivers +------------------ + +RapidIO device-specific drivers follow Linux Kernel Driver Model and are +intended to support specific RapidIO devices attached to the RapidIO network. + +2.6 Subsystem Interfaces +------------------------ + +RapidIO interconnect specification defines features that may be used to provide +one or more common service layers for all participating RapidIO devices. These +common services may act separately from device-specific drivers or be used by +device-specific drivers. Example of such service provider is the RIONET driver +which implements Ethernet-over-RapidIO interface. Because only one driver can be +registered for a device, all common RapidIO services have to be registered as +subsystem interfaces. This allows to have multiple common services attached to +the same device without blocking attachment of a device-specific driver. + +3. Subsystem Initialization +=========================== + +In order to initialize the RapidIO subsystem, a platform must initialize and +register at least one master port within the RapidIO network. To register mport +within the subsystem controller driver's initialization code calls function +rio_register_mport() for each available master port. + +After all active master ports are registered with a RapidIO subsystem, +an enumeration and/or discovery routine may be called automatically or +by user-space command. + +RapidIO subsystem can be configured to be built as a statically linked or +modular component of the kernel (see details below). + +4. Enumeration and Discovery +============================ + +4.1 Overview +------------ + +RapidIO subsystem configuration options allow users to build enumeration and +discovery methods as statically linked components or loadable modules. +An enumeration/discovery method implementation and available input parameters +define how any given method can be attached to available RapidIO mports: +simply to all available mports OR individually to the specified mport device. + +Depending on selected enumeration/discovery build configuration, there are +several methods to initiate an enumeration and/or discovery process: + + (a) Statically linked enumeration and discovery process can be started + automatically during kernel initialization time using corresponding module + parameters. This was the original method used since introduction of RapidIO + subsystem. Now this method relies on enumerator module parameter which is + 'rio-scan.scan' for existing basic enumeration/discovery method. + When automatic start of enumeration/discovery is used a user has to ensure + that all discovering endpoints are started before the enumerating endpoint + and are waiting for enumeration to be completed. + Configuration option CONFIG_RAPIDIO_DISC_TIMEOUT defines time that discovering + endpoint waits for enumeration to be completed. If the specified timeout + expires the discovery process is terminated without obtaining RapidIO network + information. NOTE: a timed out discovery process may be restarted later using + a user-space command as it is described below (if the given endpoint was + enumerated successfully). + + (b) Statically linked enumeration and discovery process can be started by + a command from user space. This initiation method provides more flexibility + for a system startup compared to the option (a) above. After all participating + endpoints have been successfully booted, an enumeration process shall be + started first by issuing a user-space command, after an enumeration is + completed a discovery process can be started on all remaining endpoints. + + (c) Modular enumeration and discovery process can be started by a command from + user space. After an enumeration/discovery module is loaded, a network scan + process can be started by issuing a user-space command. + Similar to the option (b) above, an enumerator has to be started first. + + (d) Modular enumeration and discovery process can be started by a module + initialization routine. In this case an enumerating module shall be loaded + first. + +When a network scan process is started it calls an enumeration or discovery +routine depending on the configured role of a master port: host or agent. + +Enumeration is performed by a master port if it is configured as a host port by +assigning a host destination ID greater than or equal to zero. The host +destination ID can be assigned to a master port using various methods depending +on RapidIO subsystem build configuration: + + (a) For a statically linked RapidIO subsystem core use command line parameter + "rapidio.hdid=" with a list of destination ID assignments in order of mport + device registration. For example, in a system with two RapidIO controllers + the command line parameter "rapidio.hdid=-1,7" will result in assignment of + the host destination ID=7 to the second RapidIO controller, while the first + one will be assigned destination ID=-1. + + (b) If the RapidIO subsystem core is built as a loadable module, in addition + to the method shown above, the host destination ID(s) can be specified using + traditional methods of passing module parameter "hdid=" during its loading: + + - from command line: "modprobe rapidio hdid=-1,7", or + - from modprobe configuration file using configuration command "options", + like in this example: "options rapidio hdid=-1,7". An example of modprobe + configuration file is provided in the section below. + +NOTES: + (i) if "hdid=" parameter is omitted all available mport will be assigned + destination ID = -1; + + (ii) the "hdid=" parameter in systems with multiple mports can have + destination ID assignments omitted from the end of list (default = -1). + +If the host device ID for a specific master port is set to -1, the discovery +process will be performed for it. + +The enumeration and discovery routines use RapidIO maintenance transactions +to access the configuration space of devices. + +NOTE: If RapidIO switch-specific device drivers are built as loadable modules +they must be loaded before enumeration/discovery process starts. +This requirement is cased by the fact that enumeration/discovery methods invoke +vendor-specific callbacks on early stages. + +4.2 Automatic Start of Enumeration and Discovery +------------------------------------------------ + +Automatic enumeration/discovery start method is applicable only to built-in +enumeration/discovery RapidIO configuration selection. To enable automatic +enumeration/discovery start by existing basic enumerator method set use boot +command line parameter "rio-scan.scan=1". + +This configuration requires synchronized start of all RapidIO endpoints that +form a network which will be enumerated/discovered. Discovering endpoints have +to be started before an enumeration starts to ensure that all RapidIO +controllers have been initialized and are ready to be discovered. Configuration +parameter CONFIG_RAPIDIO_DISC_TIMEOUT defines time (in seconds) which +a discovering endpoint will wait for enumeration to be completed. + +When automatic enumeration/discovery start is selected, basic method's +initialization routine calls rio_init_mports() to perform enumeration or +discovery for all known mport devices. + +Depending on RapidIO network size and configuration this automatic +enumeration/discovery start method may be difficult to use due to the +requirement for synchronized start of all endpoints. + +4.3 User-space Start of Enumeration and Discovery +------------------------------------------------- + +User-space start of enumeration and discovery can be used with built-in and +modular build configurations. For user-space controlled start RapidIO subsystem +creates the sysfs write-only attribute file '/sys/bus/rapidio/scan'. To initiate +an enumeration or discovery process on specific mport device, a user needs to +write mport_ID (not RapidIO destination ID) into that file. The mport_ID is a +sequential number (0 ... RIO_MAX_MPORTS) assigned during mport device +registration. For example for machine with single RapidIO controller, mport_ID +for that controller always will be 0. + +To initiate RapidIO enumeration/discovery on all available mports a user may +write '-1' (or RIO_MPORT_ANY) into the scan attribute file. + +4.4 Basic Enumeration Method +---------------------------- + +This is an original enumeration/discovery method which is available since +first release of RapidIO subsystem code. The enumeration process is +implemented according to the enumeration algorithm outlined in the RapidIO +Interconnect Specification: Annex I [1]. + +This method can be configured as statically linked or loadable module. +The method's single parameter "scan" allows to trigger the enumeration/discovery +process from module initialization routine. + +This enumeration/discovery method can be started only once and does not support +unloading if it is built as a module. + +The enumeration process traverses the network using a recursive depth-first +algorithm. When a new device is found, the enumerator takes ownership of that +device by writing into the Host Device ID Lock CSR. It does this to ensure that +the enumerator has exclusive right to enumerate the device. If device ownership +is successfully acquired, the enumerator allocates a new rio_dev structure and +initializes it according to device capabilities. + +If the device is an endpoint, a unique device ID is assigned to it and its value +is written into the device's Base Device ID CSR. + +If the device is a switch, the enumerator allocates an additional rio_switch +structure to store switch specific information. Then the switch's vendor ID and +device ID are queried against a table of known RapidIO switches. Each switch +table entry contains a pointer to a switch-specific initialization routine that +initializes pointers to the rest of switch specific operations, and performs +hardware initialization if necessary. A RapidIO switch does not have a unique +device ID; it relies on hopcount and routing for device ID of an attached +endpoint if access to its configuration registers is required. If a switch (or +chain of switches) does not have any endpoint (except enumerator) attached to +it, a fake device ID will be assigned to configure a route to that switch. +In the case of a chain of switches without endpoint, one fake device ID is used +to configure a route through the entire chain and switches are differentiated by +their hopcount value. + +For both endpoints and switches the enumerator writes a unique component tag +into device's Component Tag CSR. That unique value is used by the error +management notification mechanism to identify a device that is reporting an +error management event. + +Enumeration beyond a switch is completed by iterating over each active egress +port of that switch. For each active link, a route to a default device ID +(0xFF for 8-bit systems and 0xFFFF for 16-bit systems) is temporarily written +into the routing table. The algorithm recurs by calling itself with hopcount + 1 +and the default device ID in order to access the device on the active port. + +After the host has completed enumeration of the entire network it releases +devices by clearing device ID locks (calls rio_clear_locks()). For each endpoint +in the system, it sets the Discovered bit in the Port General Control CSR +to indicate that enumeration is completed and agents are allowed to execute +passive discovery of the network. + +The discovery process is performed by agents and is similar to the enumeration +process that is described above. However, the discovery process is performed +without changes to the existing routing because agents only gather information +about RapidIO network structure and are building an internal map of discovered +devices. This way each Linux-based component of the RapidIO subsystem has +a complete view of the network. The discovery process can be performed +simultaneously by several agents. After initializing its RapidIO master port +each agent waits for enumeration completion by the host for the configured wait +time period. If this wait time period expires before enumeration is completed, +an agent skips RapidIO discovery and continues with remaining kernel +initialization. + +4.5 Adding New Enumeration/Discovery Method +------------------------------------------- + +RapidIO subsystem code organization allows addition of new enumeration/discovery +methods as new configuration options without significant impact to the core +RapidIO code. + +A new enumeration/discovery method has to be attached to one or more mport +devices before an enumeration/discovery process can be started. Normally, +method's module initialization routine calls rio_register_scan() to attach +an enumerator to a specified mport device (or devices). The basic enumerator +implementation demonstrates this process. + +4.6 Using Loadable RapidIO Switch Drivers +----------------------------------------- + +In the case when RapidIO switch drivers are built as loadable modules a user +must ensure that they are loaded before the enumeration/discovery starts. +This process can be automated by specifying pre- or post- dependencies in the +RapidIO-specific modprobe configuration file as shown in the example below. + +File /etc/modprobe.d/rapidio.conf:: + + # Configure RapidIO subsystem modules + + # Set enumerator host destination ID (overrides kernel command line option) + options rapidio hdid=-1,2 + + # Load RapidIO switch drivers immediately after rapidio core module was loaded + softdep rapidio post: idt_gen2 idtcps tsi57x + + # OR : + + # Load RapidIO switch drivers just before rio-scan enumerator module is loaded + softdep rio-scan pre: idt_gen2 idtcps tsi57x + + -------------------------- + +NOTE: + In the example above, one of "softdep" commands must be removed or + commented out to keep required module loading sequence. + +5. References +============= + +[1] RapidIO Trade Association. RapidIO Interconnect Specifications. + http://www.rapidio.org. + +[2] Rapidio TA. Technology Comparisons. + http://www.rapidio.org/education/technology_comparisons/ + +[3] RapidIO support for Linux. + http://lwn.net/Articles/139118/ + +[4] Matt Porter. RapidIO for Linux. Ottawa Linux Symposium, 2005 + http://www.kernel.org/doc/ols/2005/ols2005v2-pages-43-56.pdf diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/rapidio/rio_cm.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/rapidio/rio_cm.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5294430a7a74 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/rapidio/rio_cm.rst @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ +========================================================================== +RapidIO subsystem Channelized Messaging character device driver (rio_cm.c) +========================================================================== + + +1. Overview +=========== + +This device driver is the result of collaboration within the RapidIO.org +Software Task Group (STG) between Texas Instruments, Prodrive Technologies, +Nokia Networks, BAE and IDT. Additional input was received from other members +of RapidIO.org. + +The objective was to create a character mode driver interface which exposes +messaging capabilities of RapidIO endpoint devices (mports) directly +to applications, in a manner that allows the numerous and varied RapidIO +implementations to interoperate. + +This driver (RIO_CM) provides to user-space applications shared access to +RapidIO mailbox messaging resources. + +RapidIO specification (Part 2) defines that endpoint devices may have up to four +messaging mailboxes in case of multi-packet message (up to 4KB) and +up to 64 mailboxes if single-packet messages (up to 256 B) are used. In addition +to protocol definition limitations, a particular hardware implementation can +have reduced number of messaging mailboxes. RapidIO aware applications must +therefore share the messaging resources of a RapidIO endpoint. + +Main purpose of this device driver is to provide RapidIO mailbox messaging +capability to large number of user-space processes by introducing socket-like +operations using a single messaging mailbox. This allows applications to +use the limited RapidIO messaging hardware resources efficiently. + +Most of device driver's operations are supported through 'ioctl' system calls. + +When loaded this device driver creates a single file system node named rio_cm +in /dev directory common for all registered RapidIO mport devices. + +Following ioctl commands are available to user-space applications: + +- RIO_CM_MPORT_GET_LIST: + Returns to caller list of local mport devices that + support messaging operations (number of entries up to RIO_MAX_MPORTS). + Each list entry is combination of mport's index in the system and RapidIO + destination ID assigned to the port. +- RIO_CM_EP_GET_LIST_SIZE: + Returns number of messaging capable remote endpoints + in a RapidIO network associated with the specified mport device. +- RIO_CM_EP_GET_LIST: + Returns list of RapidIO destination IDs for messaging + capable remote endpoints (peers) available in a RapidIO network associated + with the specified mport device. +- RIO_CM_CHAN_CREATE: + Creates RapidIO message exchange channel data structure + with channel ID assigned automatically or as requested by a caller. +- RIO_CM_CHAN_BIND: + Binds the specified channel data structure to the specified + mport device. +- RIO_CM_CHAN_LISTEN: + Enables listening for connection requests on the specified + channel. +- RIO_CM_CHAN_ACCEPT: + Accepts a connection request from peer on the specified + channel. If wait timeout for this request is specified by a caller it is + a blocking call. If timeout set to 0 this is non-blocking call - ioctl + handler checks for a pending connection request and if one is not available + exits with -EGAIN error status immediately. +- RIO_CM_CHAN_CONNECT: + Sends a connection request to a remote peer/channel. +- RIO_CM_CHAN_SEND: + Sends a data message through the specified channel. + The handler for this request assumes that message buffer specified by + a caller includes the reserved space for a packet header required by + this driver. +- RIO_CM_CHAN_RECEIVE: + Receives a data message through a connected channel. + If the channel does not have an incoming message ready to return this ioctl + handler will wait for new message until timeout specified by a caller + expires. If timeout value is set to 0, ioctl handler uses a default value + defined by MAX_SCHEDULE_TIMEOUT. +- RIO_CM_CHAN_CLOSE: + Closes a specified channel and frees associated buffers. + If the specified channel is in the CONNECTED state, sends close notification + to the remote peer. + +The ioctl command codes and corresponding data structures intended for use by +user-space applications are defined in 'include/uapi/linux/rio_cm_cdev.h'. + +2. Hardware Compatibility +========================= + +This device driver uses standard interfaces defined by kernel RapidIO subsystem +and therefore it can be used with any mport device driver registered by RapidIO +subsystem with limitations set by available mport HW implementation of messaging +mailboxes. + +3. Module parameters +==================== + +- 'dbg_level' + - This parameter allows to control amount of debug information + generated by this device driver. This parameter is formed by set of + bit masks that correspond to the specific functional block. + For mask definitions see 'drivers/rapidio/devices/rio_cm.c' + This parameter can be changed dynamically. + Use CONFIG_RAPIDIO_DEBUG=y to enable debug output at the top level. + +- 'cmbox' + - Number of RapidIO mailbox to use (default value is 1). + This parameter allows to set messaging mailbox number that will be used + within entire RapidIO network. It can be used when default mailbox is + used by other device drivers or is not supported by some nodes in the + RapidIO network. + +- 'chstart' + - Start channel number for dynamic assignment. Default value - 256. + Allows to exclude channel numbers below this parameter from dynamic + allocation to avoid conflicts with software components that use + reserved predefined channel numbers. + +4. Known problems +================= + + None. + +5. User-space Applications and API Library +========================================== + +Messaging API library and applications that use this device driver are available +from RapidIO.org. + +6. TODO List +============ + +- Add support for system notification messages (reserved channel 0). diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/rapidio/sysfs.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/rapidio/sysfs.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..540f72683496 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/rapidio/sysfs.rst @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ +============= +Sysfs entries +============= + +The RapidIO sysfs files have moved to: +Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rapidio and +Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-rapidio diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/rapidio/tsi721.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/rapidio/tsi721.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..42aea438cd20 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/rapidio/tsi721.rst @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ +========================================================================= +RapidIO subsystem mport driver for IDT Tsi721 PCI Express-to-SRIO bridge. +========================================================================= + +1. Overview +=========== + +This driver implements all currently defined RapidIO mport callback functions. +It supports maintenance read and write operations, inbound and outbound RapidIO +doorbells, inbound maintenance port-writes and RapidIO messaging. + +To generate SRIO maintenance transactions this driver uses one of Tsi721 DMA +channels. This mechanism provides access to larger range of hop counts and +destination IDs without need for changes in outbound window translation. + +RapidIO messaging support uses dedicated messaging channels for each mailbox. +For inbound messages this driver uses destination ID matching to forward messages +into the corresponding message queue. Messaging callbacks are implemented to be +fully compatible with RIONET driver (Ethernet over RapidIO messaging services). + +1. Module parameters: + +- 'dbg_level' + - This parameter allows to control amount of debug information + generated by this device driver. This parameter is formed by set of + This parameter can be changed bit masks that correspond to the specific + functional block. + For mask definitions see 'drivers/rapidio/devices/tsi721.h' + This parameter can be changed dynamically. + Use CONFIG_RAPIDIO_DEBUG=y to enable debug output at the top level. + +- 'dma_desc_per_channel' + - This parameter defines number of hardware buffer + descriptors allocated for each registered Tsi721 DMA channel. + Its default value is 128. + +- 'dma_txqueue_sz' + - DMA transactions queue size. Defines number of pending + transaction requests that can be accepted by each DMA channel. + Default value is 16. + +- 'dma_sel' + - DMA channel selection mask. Bitmask that defines which hardware + DMA channels (0 ... 6) will be registered with DmaEngine core. + If bit is set to 1, the corresponding DMA channel will be registered. + DMA channels not selected by this mask will not be used by this device + driver. Default value is 0x7f (use all channels). + +- 'pcie_mrrs' + - override value for PCIe Maximum Read Request Size (MRRS). + This parameter gives an ability to override MRRS value set during PCIe + configuration process. Tsi721 supports read request sizes up to 4096B. + Value for this parameter must be set as defined by PCIe specification: + 0 = 128B, 1 = 256B, 2 = 512B, 3 = 1024B, 4 = 2048B and 5 = 4096B. + Default value is '-1' (= keep platform setting). + +- 'mbox_sel' + - RIO messaging MBOX selection mask. This is a bitmask that defines + messaging MBOXes are managed by this device driver. Mask bits 0 - 3 + correspond to MBOX0 - MBOX3. MBOX is under driver's control if the + corresponding bit is set to '1'. Default value is 0x0f (= all). + +2. Known problems +================= + + None. + +3. DMA Engine Support +===================== + +Tsi721 mport driver supports DMA data transfers between local system memory and +remote RapidIO devices. This functionality is implemented according to SLAVE +mode API defined by common Linux kernel DMA Engine framework. + +Depending on system requirements RapidIO DMA operations can be included/excluded +by setting CONFIG_RAPIDIO_DMA_ENGINE option. Tsi721 miniport driver uses seven +out of eight available BDMA channels to support DMA data transfers. +One BDMA channel is reserved for generation of maintenance read/write requests. + +If Tsi721 mport driver have been built with RAPIDIO_DMA_ENGINE support included, +this driver will accept DMA-specific module parameter: + + "dma_desc_per_channel" + - defines number of hardware buffer descriptors used by + each BDMA channel of Tsi721 (by default - 128). + +4. Version History + + ===== ==================================================================== + 1.1.0 DMA operations re-worked to support data scatter/gather lists larger + than hardware buffer descriptors ring. + 1.0.0 Initial driver release. + ===== ==================================================================== + +5. License +=========== + + Copyright(c) 2011 Integrated Device Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. + + This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it + under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free + Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) + any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT + ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or + FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for + more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with + this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., + 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/rfkill.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/rfkill.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7d3684e81df6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/rfkill.rst @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ +=============================== +rfkill - RF kill switch support +=============================== + + +.. contents:: + :depth: 2 + +Introduction +============ + +The rfkill subsystem provides a generic interface for disabling any radio +transmitter in the system. When a transmitter is blocked, it shall not +radiate any power. + +The subsystem also provides the ability to react on button presses and +disable all transmitters of a certain type (or all). This is intended for +situations where transmitters need to be turned off, for example on +aircraft. + +The rfkill subsystem has a concept of "hard" and "soft" block, which +differ little in their meaning (block == transmitters off) but rather in +whether they can be changed or not: + + - hard block + read-only radio block that cannot be overridden by software + + - soft block + writable radio block (need not be readable) that is set by + the system software. + +The rfkill subsystem has two parameters, rfkill.default_state and +rfkill.master_switch_mode, which are documented in +admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst. + + +Implementation details +====================== + +The rfkill subsystem is composed of three main components: + + * the rfkill core, + * the deprecated rfkill-input module (an input layer handler, being + replaced by userspace policy code) and + * the rfkill drivers. + +The rfkill core provides API for kernel drivers to register their radio +transmitter with the kernel, methods for turning it on and off, and letting +the system know about hardware-disabled states that may be implemented on +the device. + +The rfkill core code also notifies userspace of state changes, and provides +ways for userspace to query the current states. See the "Userspace support" +section below. + +When the device is hard-blocked (either by a call to rfkill_set_hw_state() +or from query_hw_block), set_block() will be invoked for additional software +block, but drivers can ignore the method call since they can use the return +value of the function rfkill_set_hw_state() to sync the software state +instead of keeping track of calls to set_block(). In fact, drivers should +use the return value of rfkill_set_hw_state() unless the hardware actually +keeps track of soft and hard block separately. + + +Kernel API +========== + +Drivers for radio transmitters normally implement an rfkill driver. + +Platform drivers might implement input devices if the rfkill button is just +that, a button. If that button influences the hardware then you need to +implement an rfkill driver instead. This also applies if the platform provides +a way to turn on/off the transmitter(s). + +For some platforms, it is possible that the hardware state changes during +suspend/hibernation, in which case it will be necessary to update the rfkill +core with the current state at resume time. + +To create an rfkill driver, driver's Kconfig needs to have:: + + depends on RFKILL || !RFKILL + +to ensure the driver cannot be built-in when rfkill is modular. The !RFKILL +case allows the driver to be built when rfkill is not configured, in which +case all rfkill API can still be used but will be provided by static inlines +which compile to almost nothing. + +Calling rfkill_set_hw_state() when a state change happens is required from +rfkill drivers that control devices that can be hard-blocked unless they also +assign the poll_hw_block() callback (then the rfkill core will poll the +device). Don't do this unless you cannot get the event in any other way. + +rfkill provides per-switch LED triggers, which can be used to drive LEDs +according to the switch state (LED_FULL when blocked, LED_OFF otherwise). + + +Userspace support +================= + +The recommended userspace interface to use is /dev/rfkill, which is a misc +character device that allows userspace to obtain and set the state of rfkill +devices and sets of devices. It also notifies userspace about device addition +and removal. The API is a simple read/write API that is defined in +linux/rfkill.h, with one ioctl that allows turning off the deprecated input +handler in the kernel for the transition period. + +Except for the one ioctl, communication with the kernel is done via read() +and write() of instances of 'struct rfkill_event'. In this structure, the +soft and hard block are properly separated (unlike sysfs, see below) and +userspace is able to get a consistent snapshot of all rfkill devices in the +system. Also, it is possible to switch all rfkill drivers (or all drivers of +a specified type) into a state which also updates the default state for +hotplugged devices. + +After an application opens /dev/rfkill, it can read the current state of all +devices. Changes can be obtained by either polling the descriptor for +hotplug or state change events or by listening for uevents emitted by the +rfkill core framework. + +Additionally, each rfkill device is registered in sysfs and emits uevents. + +rfkill devices issue uevents (with an action of "change"), with the following +environment variables set:: + + RFKILL_NAME + RFKILL_STATE + RFKILL_TYPE + +The content of these variables corresponds to the "name", "state" and +"type" sysfs files explained above. + +For further details consult Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-rfkill. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/serial/cyclades_z.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/serial/cyclades_z.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..532ff67e2f1c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/serial/cyclades_z.rst @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +================ +Cyclades-Z notes +================ + +The Cyclades-Z must have firmware loaded onto the card before it will +operate. This operation should be performed during system startup, + +The firmware, loader program and the latest device driver code are +available from Cyclades at + + ftp://ftp.cyclades.com/pub/cyclades/cyclades-z/linux/ diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/serial/driver.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/serial/driver.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..31bd4e16fb1f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/serial/driver.rst @@ -0,0 +1,549 @@ +==================== +Low Level Serial API +==================== + + +This document is meant as a brief overview of some aspects of the new serial +driver. It is not complete, any questions you have should be directed to +<rmk@arm.linux.org.uk> + +The reference implementation is contained within amba-pl011.c. + + + +Low Level Serial Hardware Driver +-------------------------------- + +The low level serial hardware driver is responsible for supplying port +information (defined by uart_port) and a set of control methods (defined +by uart_ops) to the core serial driver. The low level driver is also +responsible for handling interrupts for the port, and providing any +console support. + + +Console Support +--------------- + +The serial core provides a few helper functions. This includes identifing +the correct port structure (via uart_get_console) and decoding command line +arguments (uart_parse_options). + +There is also a helper function (uart_console_write) which performs a +character by character write, translating newlines to CRLF sequences. +Driver writers are recommended to use this function rather than implementing +their own version. + + +Locking +------- + +It is the responsibility of the low level hardware driver to perform the +necessary locking using port->lock. There are some exceptions (which +are described in the uart_ops listing below.) + +There are two locks. A per-port spinlock, and an overall semaphore. + +From the core driver perspective, the port->lock locks the following +data:: + + port->mctrl + port->icount + port->state->xmit.head (circ_buf->head) + port->state->xmit.tail (circ_buf->tail) + +The low level driver is free to use this lock to provide any additional +locking. + +The port_sem semaphore is used to protect against ports being added/ +removed or reconfigured at inappropriate times. Since v2.6.27, this +semaphore has been the 'mutex' member of the tty_port struct, and +commonly referred to as the port mutex. + + +uart_ops +-------- + +The uart_ops structure is the main interface between serial_core and the +hardware specific driver. It contains all the methods to control the +hardware. + + tx_empty(port) + This function tests whether the transmitter fifo and shifter + for the port described by 'port' is empty. If it is empty, + this function should return TIOCSER_TEMT, otherwise return 0. + If the port does not support this operation, then it should + return TIOCSER_TEMT. + + Locking: none. + + Interrupts: caller dependent. + + This call must not sleep + + set_mctrl(port, mctrl) + This function sets the modem control lines for port described + by 'port' to the state described by mctrl. The relevant bits + of mctrl are: + + - TIOCM_RTS RTS signal. + - TIOCM_DTR DTR signal. + - TIOCM_OUT1 OUT1 signal. + - TIOCM_OUT2 OUT2 signal. + - TIOCM_LOOP Set the port into loopback mode. + + If the appropriate bit is set, the signal should be driven + active. If the bit is clear, the signal should be driven + inactive. + + Locking: port->lock taken. + + Interrupts: locally disabled. + + This call must not sleep + + get_mctrl(port) + Returns the current state of modem control inputs. The state + of the outputs should not be returned, since the core keeps + track of their state. The state information should include: + + - TIOCM_CAR state of DCD signal + - TIOCM_CTS state of CTS signal + - TIOCM_DSR state of DSR signal + - TIOCM_RI state of RI signal + + The bit is set if the signal is currently driven active. If + the port does not support CTS, DCD or DSR, the driver should + indicate that the signal is permanently active. If RI is + not available, the signal should not be indicated as active. + + Locking: port->lock taken. + + Interrupts: locally disabled. + + This call must not sleep + + stop_tx(port) + Stop transmitting characters. This might be due to the CTS + line becoming inactive or the tty layer indicating we want + to stop transmission due to an XOFF character. + + The driver should stop transmitting characters as soon as + possible. + + Locking: port->lock taken. + + Interrupts: locally disabled. + + This call must not sleep + + start_tx(port) + Start transmitting characters. + + Locking: port->lock taken. + + Interrupts: locally disabled. + + This call must not sleep + + throttle(port) + Notify the serial driver that input buffers for the line discipline are + close to full, and it should somehow signal that no more characters + should be sent to the serial port. + This will be called only if hardware assisted flow control is enabled. + + Locking: serialized with .unthrottle() and termios modification by the + tty layer. + + unthrottle(port) + Notify the serial driver that characters can now be sent to the serial + port without fear of overrunning the input buffers of the line + disciplines. + + This will be called only if hardware assisted flow control is enabled. + + Locking: serialized with .throttle() and termios modification by the + tty layer. + + send_xchar(port,ch) + Transmit a high priority character, even if the port is stopped. + This is used to implement XON/XOFF flow control and tcflow(). If + the serial driver does not implement this function, the tty core + will append the character to the circular buffer and then call + start_tx() / stop_tx() to flush the data out. + + Do not transmit if ch == '\0' (__DISABLED_CHAR). + + Locking: none. + + Interrupts: caller dependent. + + stop_rx(port) + Stop receiving characters; the port is in the process of + being closed. + + Locking: port->lock taken. + + Interrupts: locally disabled. + + This call must not sleep + + enable_ms(port) + Enable the modem status interrupts. + + This method may be called multiple times. Modem status + interrupts should be disabled when the shutdown method is + called. + + Locking: port->lock taken. + + Interrupts: locally disabled. + + This call must not sleep + + break_ctl(port,ctl) + Control the transmission of a break signal. If ctl is + nonzero, the break signal should be transmitted. The signal + should be terminated when another call is made with a zero + ctl. + + Locking: caller holds tty_port->mutex + + startup(port) + Grab any interrupt resources and initialise any low level driver + state. Enable the port for reception. It should not activate + RTS nor DTR; this will be done via a separate call to set_mctrl. + + This method will only be called when the port is initially opened. + + Locking: port_sem taken. + + Interrupts: globally disabled. + + shutdown(port) + Disable the port, disable any break condition that may be in + effect, and free any interrupt resources. It should not disable + RTS nor DTR; this will have already been done via a separate + call to set_mctrl. + + Drivers must not access port->state once this call has completed. + + This method will only be called when there are no more users of + this port. + + Locking: port_sem taken. + + Interrupts: caller dependent. + + flush_buffer(port) + Flush any write buffers, reset any DMA state and stop any + ongoing DMA transfers. + + This will be called whenever the port->state->xmit circular + buffer is cleared. + + Locking: port->lock taken. + + Interrupts: locally disabled. + + This call must not sleep + + set_termios(port,termios,oldtermios) + Change the port parameters, including word length, parity, stop + bits. Update read_status_mask and ignore_status_mask to indicate + the types of events we are interested in receiving. Relevant + termios->c_cflag bits are: + + CSIZE + - word size + CSTOPB + - 2 stop bits + PARENB + - parity enable + PARODD + - odd parity (when PARENB is in force) + CREAD + - enable reception of characters (if not set, + still receive characters from the port, but + throw them away. + CRTSCTS + - if set, enable CTS status change reporting + CLOCAL + - if not set, enable modem status change + reporting. + + Relevant termios->c_iflag bits are: + + INPCK + - enable frame and parity error events to be + passed to the TTY layer. + BRKINT / PARMRK + - both of these enable break events to be + passed to the TTY layer. + + IGNPAR + - ignore parity and framing errors + IGNBRK + - ignore break errors, If IGNPAR is also + set, ignore overrun errors as well. + + The interaction of the iflag bits is as follows (parity error + given as an example): + + =============== ======= ====== ============================= + Parity error INPCK IGNPAR + =============== ======= ====== ============================= + n/a 0 n/a character received, marked as + TTY_NORMAL + None 1 n/a character received, marked as + TTY_NORMAL + Yes 1 0 character received, marked as + TTY_PARITY + Yes 1 1 character discarded + =============== ======= ====== ============================= + + Other flags may be used (eg, xon/xoff characters) if your + hardware supports hardware "soft" flow control. + + Locking: caller holds tty_port->mutex + + Interrupts: caller dependent. + + This call must not sleep + + set_ldisc(port,termios) + Notifier for discipline change. See Documentation/driver-api/serial/tty.rst. + + Locking: caller holds tty_port->mutex + + pm(port,state,oldstate) + Perform any power management related activities on the specified + port. State indicates the new state (defined by + enum uart_pm_state), oldstate indicates the previous state. + + This function should not be used to grab any resources. + + This will be called when the port is initially opened and finally + closed, except when the port is also the system console. This + will occur even if CONFIG_PM is not set. + + Locking: none. + + Interrupts: caller dependent. + + type(port) + Return a pointer to a string constant describing the specified + port, or return NULL, in which case the string 'unknown' is + substituted. + + Locking: none. + + Interrupts: caller dependent. + + release_port(port) + Release any memory and IO region resources currently in use by + the port. + + Locking: none. + + Interrupts: caller dependent. + + request_port(port) + Request any memory and IO region resources required by the port. + If any fail, no resources should be registered when this function + returns, and it should return -EBUSY on failure. + + Locking: none. + + Interrupts: caller dependent. + + config_port(port,type) + Perform any autoconfiguration steps required for the port. `type` + contains a bit mask of the required configuration. UART_CONFIG_TYPE + indicates that the port requires detection and identification. + port->type should be set to the type found, or PORT_UNKNOWN if + no port was detected. + + UART_CONFIG_IRQ indicates autoconfiguration of the interrupt signal, + which should be probed using standard kernel autoprobing techniques. + This is not necessary on platforms where ports have interrupts + internally hard wired (eg, system on a chip implementations). + + Locking: none. + + Interrupts: caller dependent. + + verify_port(port,serinfo) + Verify the new serial port information contained within serinfo is + suitable for this port type. + + Locking: none. + + Interrupts: caller dependent. + + ioctl(port,cmd,arg) + Perform any port specific IOCTLs. IOCTL commands must be defined + using the standard numbering system found in <asm/ioctl.h> + + Locking: none. + + Interrupts: caller dependent. + + poll_init(port) + Called by kgdb to perform the minimal hardware initialization needed + to support poll_put_char() and poll_get_char(). Unlike ->startup() + this should not request interrupts. + + Locking: tty_mutex and tty_port->mutex taken. + + Interrupts: n/a. + + poll_put_char(port,ch) + Called by kgdb to write a single character directly to the serial + port. It can and should block until there is space in the TX FIFO. + + Locking: none. + + Interrupts: caller dependent. + + This call must not sleep + + poll_get_char(port) + Called by kgdb to read a single character directly from the serial + port. If data is available, it should be returned; otherwise + the function should return NO_POLL_CHAR immediately. + + Locking: none. + + Interrupts: caller dependent. + + This call must not sleep + +Other functions +--------------- + +uart_update_timeout(port,cflag,baud) + Update the FIFO drain timeout, port->timeout, according to the + number of bits, parity, stop bits and baud rate. + + Locking: caller is expected to take port->lock + + Interrupts: n/a + +uart_get_baud_rate(port,termios,old,min,max) + Return the numeric baud rate for the specified termios, taking + account of the special 38400 baud "kludge". The B0 baud rate + is mapped to 9600 baud. + + If the baud rate is not within min..max, then if old is non-NULL, + the original baud rate will be tried. If that exceeds the + min..max constraint, 9600 baud will be returned. termios will + be updated to the baud rate in use. + + Note: min..max must always allow 9600 baud to be selected. + + Locking: caller dependent. + + Interrupts: n/a + +uart_get_divisor(port,baud) + Return the divisor (baud_base / baud) for the specified baud + rate, appropriately rounded. + + If 38400 baud and custom divisor is selected, return the + custom divisor instead. + + Locking: caller dependent. + + Interrupts: n/a + +uart_match_port(port1,port2) + This utility function can be used to determine whether two + uart_port structures describe the same port. + + Locking: n/a + + Interrupts: n/a + +uart_write_wakeup(port) + A driver is expected to call this function when the number of + characters in the transmit buffer have dropped below a threshold. + + Locking: port->lock should be held. + + Interrupts: n/a + +uart_register_driver(drv) + Register a uart driver with the core driver. We in turn register + with the tty layer, and initialise the core driver per-port state. + + drv->port should be NULL, and the per-port structures should be + registered using uart_add_one_port after this call has succeeded. + + Locking: none + + Interrupts: enabled + +uart_unregister_driver() + Remove all references to a driver from the core driver. The low + level driver must have removed all its ports via the + uart_remove_one_port() if it registered them with uart_add_one_port(). + + Locking: none + + Interrupts: enabled + +**uart_suspend_port()** + +**uart_resume_port()** + +**uart_add_one_port()** + +**uart_remove_one_port()** + +Other notes +----------- + +It is intended some day to drop the 'unused' entries from uart_port, and +allow low level drivers to register their own individual uart_port's with +the core. This will allow drivers to use uart_port as a pointer to a +structure containing both the uart_port entry with their own extensions, +thus:: + + struct my_port { + struct uart_port port; + int my_stuff; + }; + +Modem control lines via GPIO +---------------------------- + +Some helpers are provided in order to set/get modem control lines via GPIO. + +mctrl_gpio_init(port, idx): + This will get the {cts,rts,...}-gpios from device tree if they are + present and request them, set direction etc, and return an + allocated structure. `devm_*` functions are used, so there's no need + to call mctrl_gpio_free(). + As this sets up the irq handling make sure to not handle changes to the + gpio input lines in your driver, too. + +mctrl_gpio_free(dev, gpios): + This will free the requested gpios in mctrl_gpio_init(). + As `devm_*` functions are used, there's generally no need to call + this function. + +mctrl_gpio_to_gpiod(gpios, gidx) + This returns the gpio_desc structure associated to the modem line + index. + +mctrl_gpio_set(gpios, mctrl): + This will sets the gpios according to the mctrl state. + +mctrl_gpio_get(gpios, mctrl): + This will update mctrl with the gpios values. + +mctrl_gpio_enable_ms(gpios): + Enables irqs and handling of changes to the ms lines. + +mctrl_gpio_disable_ms(gpios): + Disables irqs and handling of changes to the ms lines. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/serial/index.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/serial/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..33ad10d05b26 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/serial/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +========================== +Support for Serial devices +========================== + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 1 + + + driver + tty + +Serial drivers +============== + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 1 + + cyclades_z + moxa-smartio + n_gsm + rocket + serial-iso7816 + serial-rs485 + +.. only:: subproject and html + + Indices + ======= + + * :ref:`genindex` diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/serial/moxa-smartio.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/serial/moxa-smartio.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..156100f17c3f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/serial/moxa-smartio.rst @@ -0,0 +1,615 @@ +============================================================= +MOXA Smartio/Industio Family Device Driver Installation Guide +============================================================= + +.. note:: + + This file is outdated. It needs some care in order to make it + updated to Kernel 5.0 and upper + +Copyright (C) 2008, Moxa Inc. + +Date: 01/21/2008 + +.. Content + + 1. Introduction + 2. System Requirement + 3. Installation + 3.1 Hardware installation + 3.2 Driver files + 3.3 Device naming convention + 3.4 Module driver configuration + 3.5 Static driver configuration for Linux kernel 2.4.x and 2.6.x. + 3.6 Custom configuration + 3.7 Verify driver installation + 4. Utilities + 5. Setserial + 6. Troubleshooting + +1. Introduction +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + + The Smartio/Industio/UPCI family Linux driver supports following multiport + boards. + + - 2 ports multiport board + CP-102U, CP-102UL, CP-102UF + CP-132U-I, CP-132UL, + CP-132, CP-132I, CP132S, CP-132IS, + CI-132, CI-132I, CI-132IS, + (C102H, C102HI, C102HIS, C102P, CP-102, CP-102S) + + - 4 ports multiport board + CP-104EL, + CP-104UL, CP-104JU, + CP-134U, CP-134U-I, + C104H/PCI, C104HS/PCI, + CP-114, CP-114I, CP-114S, CP-114IS, CP-114UL, + C104H, C104HS, + CI-104J, CI-104JS, + CI-134, CI-134I, CI-134IS, + (C114HI, CT-114I, C104P), + POS-104UL, + CB-114, + CB-134I + + - 8 ports multiport board + CP-118EL, CP-168EL, + CP-118U, CP-168U, + C168H/PCI, + C168H, C168HS, + (C168P), + CB-108 + + This driver and installation procedure have been developed upon Linux Kernel + 2.4.x and 2.6.x. This driver supports Intel x86 hardware platform. In order + to maintain compatibility, this version has also been properly tested with + RedHat, Mandrake, Fedora and S.u.S.E Linux. However, if compatibility problem + occurs, please contact Moxa at support@moxa.com.tw. + + In addition to device driver, useful utilities are also provided in this + version. They are: + + - msdiag + Diagnostic program for displaying installed Moxa + Smartio/Industio boards. + - msmon + Monitor program to observe data count and line status signals. + - msterm A simple terminal program which is useful in testing serial + ports. + - io-irq.exe + Configuration program to setup ISA boards. Please note that + this program can only be executed under DOS. + + All the drivers and utilities are published in form of source code under + GNU General Public License in this version. Please refer to GNU General + Public License announcement in each source code file for more detail. + + In Moxa's Web sites, you may always find latest driver at http://www.moxa.com/. + + This version of driver can be installed as Loadable Module (Module driver) + or built-in into kernel (Static driver). You may refer to following + installation procedure for suitable one. Before you install the driver, + please refer to hardware installation procedure in the User's Manual. + + We assume the user should be familiar with following documents. + + - Serial-HOWTO + - Kernel-HOWTO + +2. System Requirement +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + + - Hardware platform: Intel x86 machine + - Kernel version: 2.4.x or 2.6.x + - gcc version 2.72 or later + - Maximum 4 boards can be installed in combination + +3. Installation +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +3.1 Hardware installation +========================= + + There are two types of buses, ISA and PCI, for Smartio/Industio + family multiport board. + +ISA board +--------- + + You'll have to configure CAP address, I/O address, Interrupt Vector + as well as IRQ before installing this driver. Please refer to hardware + installation procedure in User's Manual before proceed any further. + Please make sure the JP1 is open after the ISA board is set properly. + +PCI/UPCI board +-------------- + + You may need to adjust IRQ usage in BIOS to avoid from IRQ conflict + with other ISA devices. Please refer to hardware installation + procedure in User's Manual in advance. + +PCI IRQ Sharing +--------------- + + Each port within the same multiport board shares the same IRQ. Up to + 4 Moxa Smartio/Industio PCI Family multiport boards can be installed + together on one system and they can share the same IRQ. + + +3.2 Driver files +================ + + The driver file may be obtained from ftp, CD-ROM or floppy disk. The + first step, anyway, is to copy driver file "mxser.tgz" into specified + directory. e.g. /moxa. The execute commands as below:: + + # cd / + # mkdir moxa + # cd /moxa + # tar xvf /dev/fd0 + +or:: + + # cd / + # mkdir moxa + # cd /moxa + # cp /mnt/cdrom/<driver directory>/mxser.tgz . + # tar xvfz mxser.tgz + + +3.3 Device naming convention +============================ + + You may find all the driver and utilities files in /moxa/mxser. + Following installation procedure depends on the model you'd like to + run the driver. If you prefer module driver, please refer to 3.4. + If static driver is required, please refer to 3.5. + +Dialin and callout port +----------------------- + + This driver remains traditional serial device properties. There are + two special file name for each serial port. One is dial-in port + which is named "ttyMxx". For callout port, the naming convention + is "cumxx". + +Device naming when more than 2 boards installed +----------------------------------------------- + + Naming convention for each Smartio/Industio multiport board is + pre-defined as below. + + ============ =============== ============== + Board Num. Dial-in Port Callout port + 1st board ttyM0 - ttyM7 cum0 - cum7 + 2nd board ttyM8 - ttyM15 cum8 - cum15 + 3rd board ttyM16 - ttyM23 cum16 - cum23 + 4th board ttyM24 - ttym31 cum24 - cum31 + ============ =============== ============== + +.. note:: + + Under Kernel 2.6 and upper, the cum Device is Obsolete. So use ttyM* + device instead. + +Board sequence +-------------- + + This driver will activate ISA boards according to the parameter set + in the driver. After all specified ISA board activated, PCI board + will be installed in the system automatically driven. + Therefore the board number is sorted by the CAP address of ISA boards. + For PCI boards, their sequence will be after ISA boards and C168H/PCI + has higher priority than C104H/PCI boards. + +3.4 Module driver configuration +=============================== + + Module driver is easiest way to install. If you prefer static driver + installation, please skip this paragraph. + + + ------------- Prepare to use the MOXA driver -------------------- + +3.4.1 Create tty device with correct major number +------------------------------------------------- + + Before using MOXA driver, your system must have the tty devices + which are created with driver's major number. We offer one shell + script "msmknod" to simplify the procedure. + This step is only needed to be executed once. But you still + need to do this procedure when: + + a. You change the driver's major number. Please refer the "3.7" + section. + b. Your total installed MOXA boards number is changed. Maybe you + add/delete one MOXA board. + c. You want to change the tty name. This needs to modify the + shell script "msmknod" + + The procedure is:: + + # cd /moxa/mxser/driver + # ./msmknod + + This shell script will require the major number for dial-in + device and callout device to create tty device. You also need + to specify the total installed MOXA board number. Default major + numbers for dial-in device and callout device are 30, 35. If + you need to change to other number, please refer section "3.7" + for more detailed procedure. + Msmknod will delete any special files occupying the same device + naming. + +3.4.2 Build the MOXA driver and utilities +----------------------------------------- + + Before using the MOXA driver and utilities, you need compile the + all the source code. This step is only need to be executed once. + But you still re-compile the source code if you modify the source + code. For example, if you change the driver's major number (see + "3.7" section), then you need to do this step again. + + Find "Makefile" in /moxa/mxser, then run + + # make clean; make install + + ..note:: + + For Red Hat 9, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS3/ES3/WS3 & Fedora Core1: + # make clean; make installsp1 + + For Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS4/ES4/WS4: + # make clean; make installsp2 + + The driver files "mxser.o" and utilities will be properly compiled + and copied to system directories respectively. + +------------- Load MOXA driver-------------------- + +3.4.3 Load the MOXA driver +-------------------------- + + :: + + # modprobe mxser <argument> + + will activate the module driver. You may run "lsmod" to check + if "mxser" is activated. If the MOXA board is ISA board, the + <argument> is needed. Please refer to section "3.4.5" for more + information. + +------------- Load MOXA driver on boot -------------------- + +3.4.4 Load the mxser driver +--------------------------- + + + For the above description, you may manually execute + "modprobe mxser" to activate this driver and run + "rmmod mxser" to remove it. + + However, it's better to have a boot time configuration to + eliminate manual operation. Boot time configuration can be + achieved by rc file. We offer one "rc.mxser" file to simplify + the procedure under "moxa/mxser/driver". + + But if you use ISA board, please modify the "modprobe ..." command + to add the argument (see "3.4.5" section). After modifying the + rc.mxser, please try to execute "/moxa/mxser/driver/rc.mxser" + manually to make sure the modification is ok. If any error + encountered, please try to modify again. If the modification is + completed, follow the below step. + + Run following command for setting rc files:: + + # cd /moxa/mxser/driver + # cp ./rc.mxser /etc/rc.d + # cd /etc/rc.d + + Check "rc.serial" is existed or not. If "rc.serial" doesn't exist, + create it by vi, run "chmod 755 rc.serial" to change the permission. + + Add "/etc/rc.d/rc.mxser" in last line. + + Reboot and check if moxa.o activated by "lsmod" command. + +3.4.5. specify CAP address +-------------------------- + + If you'd like to drive Smartio/Industio ISA boards in the system, + you'll have to add parameter to specify CAP address of given + board while activating "mxser.o". The format for parameters are + as follows.:: + + modprobe mxser ioaddr=0x???,0x???,0x???,0x??? + | | | | + | | | +- 4th ISA board + | | +------ 3rd ISA board + | +------------ 2nd ISA board + +-------------------1st ISA board + +3.5 Static driver configuration for Linux kernel 2.4.x and 2.6.x +================================================================ + + Note: + To use static driver, you must install the linux kernel + source package. + +3.5.1 Backup the built-in driver in the kernel +---------------------------------------------- + + :: + + # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char + # mv mxser.c mxser.c.old + + For Red Hat 7.x user, you need to create link: + # cd /usr/src + # ln -s linux-2.4 linux + +3.5.2 Create link +----------------- + :: + + # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char + # ln -s /moxa/mxser/driver/mxser.c mxser.c + +3.5.3 Add CAP address list for ISA boards. +------------------------------------------ + + For PCI boards user, please skip this step. + + In module mode, the CAP address for ISA board is given by + parameter. In static driver configuration, you'll have to + assign it within driver's source code. If you will not + install any ISA boards, you may skip to next portion. + The instructions to modify driver source code are as + below. + + a. run:: + + # cd /moxa/mxser/driver + # vi mxser.c + + b. Find the array mxserBoardCAP[] as below:: + + static int mxserBoardCAP[] = {0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00}; + + c. Change the address within this array using vi. For + example, to driver 2 ISA boards with CAP address + 0x280 and 0x180 as 1st and 2nd board. Just to change + the source code as follows:: + + static int mxserBoardCAP[] = {0x280, 0x180, 0x00, 0x00}; + +3.5.4 Setup kernel configuration +-------------------------------- + + Configure the kernel:: + + # cd /usr/src/linux + # make menuconfig + + You will go into a menu-driven system. Please select [Character + devices][Non-standard serial port support], enable the [Moxa + SmartIO support] driver with "[*]" for built-in (not "[M]"), then + select [Exit] to exit this program. + +3.5.5 Rebuild kernel +-------------------- + + The following are for Linux kernel rebuilding, for your + reference only. + + For appropriate details, please refer to the Linux document: + + a. Run the following commands:: + + cd /usr/src/linux + make clean # take a few minutes + make dep # take a few minutes + make bzImage # take probably 10-20 minutes + make install # copy boot image to correct position + + f. Please make sure the boot kernel (vmlinuz) is in the + correct position. + g. If you use 'lilo' utility, you should check /etc/lilo.conf + 'image' item specified the path which is the 'vmlinuz' path, + or you will load wrong (or old) boot kernel image (vmlinuz). + After checking /etc/lilo.conf, please run "lilo". + + Note that if the result of "make bzImage" is ERROR, then you have to + go back to Linux configuration Setup. Type "make menuconfig" in + directory /usr/src/linux. + + +3.5.6 Make tty device and special file +-------------------------------------- + + :: + # cd /moxa/mxser/driver + # ./msmknod + +3.5.7 Make utility +------------------ + + :: + + # cd /moxa/mxser/utility + # make clean; make install + +3.5.8 Reboot +------------ + + + +3.6 Custom configuration +======================== + + Although this driver already provides you default configuration, you + still can change the device name and major number. The instruction to + change these parameters are shown as below. + +a. Change Device name + + If you'd like to use other device names instead of default naming + convention, all you have to do is to modify the internal code + within the shell script "msmknod". First, you have to open "msmknod" + by vi. Locate each line contains "ttyM" and "cum" and change them + to the device name you desired. "msmknod" creates the device names + you need next time executed. + +b. Change Major number + + If major number 30 and 35 had been occupied, you may have to select + 2 free major numbers for this driver. There are 3 steps to change + major numbers. + +3.6.1 Find free major numbers +----------------------------- + + In /proc/devices, you may find all the major numbers occupied + in the system. Please select 2 major numbers that are available. + e.g. 40, 45. + +3.6.2 Create special files +-------------------------- + + Run /moxa/mxser/driver/msmknod to create special files with + specified major numbers. + +3.6.3 Modify driver with new major number +----------------------------------------- + + Run vi to open /moxa/mxser/driver/mxser.c. Locate the line + contains "MXSERMAJOR". Change the content as below:: + + #define MXSERMAJOR 40 + #define MXSERCUMAJOR 45 + + 3.6.4 Run "make clean; make install" in /moxa/mxser/driver. + +3.7 Verify driver installation +============================== + + You may refer to /var/log/messages to check the latest status + log reported by this driver whenever it's activated. + +4. Utilities +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + + There are 3 utilities contained in this driver. They are msdiag, msmon and + msterm. These 3 utilities are released in form of source code. They should + be compiled into executable file and copied into /usr/bin. + + Before using these utilities, please load driver (refer 3.4 & 3.5) and + make sure you had run the "msmknod" utility. + +msdiag - Diagnostic +=================== + + This utility provides the function to display what Moxa Smartio/Industio + board found by driver in the system. + +msmon - Port Monitoring +======================= + + This utility gives the user a quick view about all the MOXA ports' + activities. One can easily learn each port's total received/transmitted + (Rx/Tx) character count since the time when the monitoring is started. + + Rx/Tx throughputs per second are also reported in interval basis (e.g. + the last 5 seconds) and in average basis (since the time the monitoring + is started). You can reset all ports' count by <HOME> key. <+> <-> + (plus/minus) keys to change the displaying time interval. Press <ENTER> + on the port, that cursor stay, to view the port's communication + parameters, signal status, and input/output queue. + +msterm - Terminal Emulation +=========================== + + This utility provides data sending and receiving ability of all tty ports, + especially for MOXA ports. It is quite useful for testing simple + application, for example, sending AT command to a modem connected to the + port or used as a terminal for login purpose. Note that this is only a + dumb terminal emulation without handling full screen operation. + +5. Setserial +^^^^^^^^^^^^ + + Supported Setserial parameters are listed as below. + + ============== ========================================================= + uart set UART type(16450-->disable FIFO, 16550A-->enable FIFO) + close_delay set the amount of time(in 1/100 of a second) that DTR + should be kept low while being closed. + closing_wait set the amount of time(in 1/100 of a second) that the + serial port should wait for data to be drained while + being closed, before the receiver is disable. + spd_hi Use 57.6kb when the application requests 38.4kb. + spd_vhi Use 115.2kb when the application requests 38.4kb. + spd_shi Use 230.4kb when the application requests 38.4kb. + spd_warp Use 460.8kb when the application requests 38.4kb. + spd_normal Use 38.4kb when the application requests 38.4kb. + spd_cust Use the custom divisor to set the speed when the + application requests 38.4kb. + divisor This option set the custom division. + baud_base This option set the base baud rate. + ============== ========================================================= + +6. Troubleshooting +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + + The boot time error messages and solutions are stated as clearly as + possible. If all the possible solutions fail, please contact our technical + support team to get more help. + + + Error msg: + More than 4 Moxa Smartio/Industio family boards found. Fifth board + and after are ignored. + + Solution: + To avoid this problem, please unplug fifth and after board, because Moxa + driver supports up to 4 boards. + + Error msg: + Request_irq fail, IRQ(?) may be conflict with another device. + + Solution: + Other PCI or ISA devices occupy the assigned IRQ. If you are not sure + which device causes the situation, please check /proc/interrupts to find + free IRQ and simply change another free IRQ for Moxa board. + + Error msg: + Board #: C1xx Series(CAP=xxx) interrupt number invalid. + + Solution: + Each port within the same multiport board shares the same IRQ. Please set + one IRQ (IRQ doesn't equal to zero) for one Moxa board. + + Error msg: + No interrupt vector be set for Moxa ISA board(CAP=xxx). + + Solution: + Moxa ISA board needs an interrupt vector.Please refer to user's manual + "Hardware Installation" chapter to set interrupt vector. + + Error msg: + Couldn't install MOXA Smartio/Industio family driver! + + Solution: + Load Moxa driver fail, the major number may conflict with other devices. + Please refer to previous section 3.7 to change a free major number for + Moxa driver. + + Error msg: + Couldn't install MOXA Smartio/Industio family callout driver! + + Solution: + Load Moxa callout driver fail, the callout device major number may + conflict with other devices. Please refer to previous section 3.7 to + change a free callout device major number for Moxa driver. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/serial/n_gsm.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/serial/n_gsm.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f3ad9fd26408 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/serial/n_gsm.rst @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ +============================== +GSM 0710 tty multiplexor HOWTO +============================== + +This line discipline implements the GSM 07.10 multiplexing protocol +detailed in the following 3GPP document: + + http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/07_series/07.10/0710-720.zip + +This document give some hints on how to use this driver with GPRS and 3G +modems connected to a physical serial port. + +How to use it +------------- +1. initialize the modem in 0710 mux mode (usually AT+CMUX= command) through + its serial port. Depending on the modem used, you can pass more or less + parameters to this command, +2. switch the serial line to using the n_gsm line discipline by using + TIOCSETD ioctl, +3. configure the mux using GSMIOC_GETCONF / GSMIOC_SETCONF ioctl, + +Major parts of the initialization program : +(a good starting point is util-linux-ng/sys-utils/ldattach.c):: + + #include <linux/gsmmux.h> + #define N_GSM0710 21 /* GSM 0710 Mux */ + #define DEFAULT_SPEED B115200 + #define SERIAL_PORT /dev/ttyS0 + + int ldisc = N_GSM0710; + struct gsm_config c; + struct termios configuration; + + /* open the serial port connected to the modem */ + fd = open(SERIAL_PORT, O_RDWR | O_NOCTTY | O_NDELAY); + + /* configure the serial port : speed, flow control ... */ + + /* send the AT commands to switch the modem to CMUX mode + and check that it's successful (should return OK) */ + write(fd, "AT+CMUX=0\r", 10); + + /* experience showed that some modems need some time before + being able to answer to the first MUX packet so a delay + may be needed here in some case */ + sleep(3); + + /* use n_gsm line discipline */ + ioctl(fd, TIOCSETD, &ldisc); + + /* get n_gsm configuration */ + ioctl(fd, GSMIOC_GETCONF, &c); + /* we are initiator and need encoding 0 (basic) */ + c.initiator = 1; + c.encapsulation = 0; + /* our modem defaults to a maximum size of 127 bytes */ + c.mru = 127; + c.mtu = 127; + /* set the new configuration */ + ioctl(fd, GSMIOC_SETCONF, &c); + + /* and wait for ever to keep the line discipline enabled */ + daemon(0,0); + pause(); + +4. create the devices corresponding to the "virtual" serial ports (take care, + each modem has its configuration and some DLC have dedicated functions, + for example GPS), starting with minor 1 (DLC0 is reserved for the management + of the mux):: + + MAJOR=`cat /proc/devices |grep gsmtty | awk '{print $1}` + for i in `seq 1 4`; do + mknod /dev/ttygsm$i c $MAJOR $i + done + +5. use these devices as plain serial ports. + + for example, it's possible: + + - and to use gnokii to send / receive SMS on ttygsm1 + - to use ppp to establish a datalink on ttygsm2 + +6. first close all virtual ports before closing the physical port. + + Note that after closing the physical port the modem is still in multiplexing + mode. This may prevent a successful re-opening of the port later. To avoid + this situation either reset the modem if your hardware allows that or send + a disconnect command frame manually before initializing the multiplexing mode + for the second time. The byte sequence for the disconnect command frame is:: + + 0xf9, 0x03, 0xef, 0x03, 0xc3, 0x16, 0xf9. + +Additional Documentation +------------------------ +More practical details on the protocol and how it's supported by industrial +modems can be found in the following documents : + +- http://www.telit.com/module/infopool/download.php?id=616 +- http://www.u-blox.com/images/downloads/Product_Docs/LEON-G100-G200-MuxImplementation_ApplicationNote_%28GSM%20G1-CS-10002%29.pdf +- http://www.sierrawireless.com/Support/Downloads/AirPrime/WMP_Series/~/media/Support_Downloads/AirPrime/Application_notes/CMUX_Feature_Application_Note-Rev004.ashx +- http://wm.sim.com/sim/News/photo/2010721161442.pdf + +11-03-08 - Eric Bénard - <eric@eukrea.com> diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/serial/rocket.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/serial/rocket.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..23761eae4282 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/serial/rocket.rst @@ -0,0 +1,185 @@ +================================================ +Comtrol(tm) RocketPort(R)/RocketModem(TM) Series +================================================ + +Device Driver for the Linux Operating System +============================================ + +Product overview +---------------- + +This driver provides a loadable kernel driver for the Comtrol RocketPort +and RocketModem PCI boards. These boards provide, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 +high-speed serial ports or modems. This driver supports up to a combination +of four RocketPort or RocketModems boards in one machine simultaneously. +This file assumes that you are using the RocketPort driver which is +integrated into the kernel sources. + +The driver can also be installed as an external module using the usual +"make;make install" routine. This external module driver, obtainable +from the Comtrol website listed below, is useful for updating the driver +or installing it into kernels which do not have the driver configured +into them. Installations instructions for the external module +are in the included README and HW_INSTALL files. + +RocketPort ISA and RocketModem II PCI boards currently are only supported by +this driver in module form. + +The RocketPort ISA board requires I/O ports to be configured by the DIP +switches on the board. See the section "ISA Rocketport Boards" below for +information on how to set the DIP switches. + +You pass the I/O port to the driver using the following module parameters: + +board1: + I/O port for the first ISA board +board2: + I/O port for the second ISA board +board3: + I/O port for the third ISA board +board4: + I/O port for the fourth ISA board + +There is a set of utilities and scripts provided with the external driver +(downloadable from http://www.comtrol.com) that ease the configuration and +setup of the ISA cards. + +The RocketModem II PCI boards require firmware to be loaded into the card +before it will function. The driver has only been tested as a module for this +board. + +Installation Procedures +----------------------- + +RocketPort/RocketModem PCI cards require no driver configuration, they are +automatically detected and configured. + +The RocketPort driver can be installed as a module (recommended) or built +into the kernel. This is selected, as for other drivers, through the `make config` +command from the root of the Linux source tree during the kernel build process. + +The RocketPort/RocketModem serial ports installed by this driver are assigned +device major number 46, and will be named /dev/ttyRx, where x is the port number +starting at zero (ex. /dev/ttyR0, /devttyR1, ...). If you have multiple cards +installed in the system, the mapping of port names to serial ports is displayed +in the system log at /var/log/messages. + +If installed as a module, the module must be loaded. This can be done +manually by entering "modprobe rocket". To have the module loaded automatically +upon system boot, edit a `/etc/modprobe.d/*.conf` file and add the line +"alias char-major-46 rocket". + +In order to use the ports, their device names (nodes) must be created with mknod. +This is only required once, the system will retain the names once created. To +create the RocketPort/RocketModem device names, use the command +"mknod /dev/ttyRx c 46 x" where x is the port number starting at zero. + +For example:: + + > mknod /dev/ttyR0 c 46 0 + > mknod /dev/ttyR1 c 46 1 + > mknod /dev/ttyR2 c 46 2 + +The Linux script MAKEDEV will create the first 16 ttyRx device names (nodes) +for you:: + + >/dev/MAKEDEV ttyR + +ISA Rocketport Boards +--------------------- + +You must assign and configure the I/O addresses used by the ISA Rocketport +card before installing and using it. This is done by setting a set of DIP +switches on the Rocketport board. + + +Setting the I/O address +----------------------- + +Before installing RocketPort(R) or RocketPort RA boards, you must find +a range of I/O addresses for it to use. The first RocketPort card +requires a 68-byte contiguous block of I/O addresses, starting at one +of the following: 0x100h, 0x140h, 0x180h, 0x200h, 0x240h, 0x280h, +0x300h, 0x340h, 0x380h. This I/O address must be reflected in the DIP +switches of *all* of the Rocketport cards. + +The second, third, and fourth RocketPort cards require a 64-byte +contiguous block of I/O addresses, starting at one of the following +I/O addresses: 0x100h, 0x140h, 0x180h, 0x1C0h, 0x200h, 0x240h, 0x280h, +0x2C0h, 0x300h, 0x340h, 0x380h, 0x3C0h. The I/O address used by the +second, third, and fourth Rocketport cards (if present) are set via +software control. The DIP switch settings for the I/O address must be +set to the value of the first Rocketport cards. + +In order to distinguish each of the card from the others, each card +must have a unique board ID set on the dip switches. The first +Rocketport board must be set with the DIP switches corresponding to +the first board, the second board must be set with the DIP switches +corresponding to the second board, etc. IMPORTANT: The board ID is +the only place where the DIP switch settings should differ between the +various Rocketport boards in a system. + +The I/O address range used by any of the RocketPort cards must not +conflict with any other cards in the system, including other +RocketPort cards. Below, you will find a list of commonly used I/O +address ranges which may be in use by other devices in your system. +On a Linux system, "cat /proc/ioports" will also be helpful in +identifying what I/O addresses are being used by devices on your +system. + +Remember, the FIRST RocketPort uses 68 I/O addresses. So, if you set it +for 0x100, it will occupy 0x100 to 0x143. This would mean that you +CAN NOT set the second, third or fourth board for address 0x140 since +the first 4 bytes of that range are used by the first board. You would +need to set the second, third, or fourth board to one of the next available +blocks such as 0x180. + +RocketPort and RocketPort RA SW1 Settings:: + + +-------------------------------+ + | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | + +-------+-------+---------------+ + | Unused| Card | I/O Port Block| + +-------------------------------+ + + DIP Switches DIP Switches + 7 8 6 5 + =================== =================== + On On UNUSED, MUST BE ON. On On First Card <==== Default + On Off Second Card + Off On Third Card + Off Off Fourth Card + + DIP Switches I/O Address Range + 4 3 2 1 Used by the First Card + ===================================== + On Off On Off 100-143 + On Off Off On 140-183 + On Off Off Off 180-1C3 <==== Default + Off On On Off 200-243 + Off On Off On 240-283 + Off On Off Off 280-2C3 + Off Off On Off 300-343 + Off Off Off On 340-383 + Off Off Off Off 380-3C3 + +Reporting Bugs +-------------- + +For technical support, please provide the following +information: Driver version, kernel release, distribution of +kernel, and type of board you are using. Error messages and log +printouts port configuration details are especially helpful. + +USA: + :Phone: (612) 494-4100 + :FAX: (612) 494-4199 + :email: support@comtrol.com + +Comtrol Europe: + :Phone: +44 (0) 1 869 323-220 + :FAX: +44 (0) 1 869 323-211 + :email: support@comtrol.co.uk + +Web: http://www.comtrol.com +FTP: ftp.comtrol.com diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/serial/serial-iso7816.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/serial/serial-iso7816.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d990143de0c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/serial/serial-iso7816.rst @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +============================= +ISO7816 Serial Communications +============================= + +1. Introduction +=============== + + ISO/IEC7816 is a series of standards specifying integrated circuit cards (ICC) + also known as smart cards. + +2. Hardware-related considerations +================================== + + Some CPUs/UARTs (e.g., Microchip AT91) contain a built-in mode capable of + handling communication with a smart card. + + For these microcontrollers, the Linux driver should be made capable of + working in both modes, and proper ioctls (see later) should be made + available at user-level to allow switching from one mode to the other, and + vice versa. + +3. Data Structures Already Available in the Kernel +================================================== + + The Linux kernel provides the serial_iso7816 structure (see [1]) to handle + ISO7816 communications. This data structure is used to set and configure + ISO7816 parameters in ioctls. + + Any driver for devices capable of working both as RS232 and ISO7816 should + implement the iso7816_config callback in the uart_port structure. The + serial_core calls iso7816_config to do the device specific part in response + to TIOCGISO7816 and TIOCSISO7816 ioctls (see below). The iso7816_config + callback receives a pointer to struct serial_iso7816. + +4. Usage from user-level +======================== + + From user-level, ISO7816 configuration can be get/set using the previous + ioctls. For instance, to set ISO7816 you can use the following code:: + + #include <linux/serial.h> + + /* Include definition for ISO7816 ioctls: TIOCSISO7816 and TIOCGISO7816 */ + #include <sys/ioctl.h> + + /* Open your specific device (e.g., /dev/mydevice): */ + int fd = open ("/dev/mydevice", O_RDWR); + if (fd < 0) { + /* Error handling. See errno. */ + } + + struct serial_iso7816 iso7816conf; + + /* Reserved fields as to be zeroed */ + memset(&iso7816conf, 0, sizeof(iso7816conf)); + + /* Enable ISO7816 mode: */ + iso7816conf.flags |= SER_ISO7816_ENABLED; + + /* Select the protocol: */ + /* T=0 */ + iso7816conf.flags |= SER_ISO7816_T(0); + /* or T=1 */ + iso7816conf.flags |= SER_ISO7816_T(1); + + /* Set the guard time: */ + iso7816conf.tg = 2; + + /* Set the clock frequency*/ + iso7816conf.clk = 3571200; + + /* Set transmission factors: */ + iso7816conf.sc_fi = 372; + iso7816conf.sc_di = 1; + + if (ioctl(fd_usart, TIOCSISO7816, &iso7816conf) < 0) { + /* Error handling. See errno. */ + } + + /* Use read() and write() syscalls here... */ + + /* Close the device when finished: */ + if (close (fd) < 0) { + /* Error handling. See errno. */ + } + +5. References +============= + + [1] include/uapi/linux/serial.h diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/serial/serial-rs485.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/serial/serial-rs485.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6bc824f948f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/serial/serial-rs485.rst @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ +=========================== +RS485 Serial Communications +=========================== + +1. Introduction +=============== + + EIA-485, also known as TIA/EIA-485 or RS-485, is a standard defining the + electrical characteristics of drivers and receivers for use in balanced + digital multipoint systems. + This standard is widely used for communications in industrial automation + because it can be used effectively over long distances and in electrically + noisy environments. + +2. Hardware-related Considerations +================================== + + Some CPUs/UARTs (e.g., Atmel AT91 or 16C950 UART) contain a built-in + half-duplex mode capable of automatically controlling line direction by + toggling RTS or DTR signals. That can be used to control external + half-duplex hardware like an RS485 transceiver or any RS232-connected + half-duplex devices like some modems. + + For these microcontrollers, the Linux driver should be made capable of + working in both modes, and proper ioctls (see later) should be made + available at user-level to allow switching from one mode to the other, and + vice versa. + +3. Data Structures Already Available in the Kernel +================================================== + + The Linux kernel provides the serial_rs485 structure (see [1]) to handle + RS485 communications. This data structure is used to set and configure RS485 + parameters in the platform data and in ioctls. + + The device tree can also provide RS485 boot time parameters (see [2] + for bindings). The driver is in charge of filling this data structure from + the values given by the device tree. + + Any driver for devices capable of working both as RS232 and RS485 should + implement the rs485_config callback in the uart_port structure. The + serial_core calls rs485_config to do the device specific part in response + to TIOCSRS485 and TIOCGRS485 ioctls (see below). The rs485_config callback + receives a pointer to struct serial_rs485. + +4. Usage from user-level +======================== + + From user-level, RS485 configuration can be get/set using the previous + ioctls. For instance, to set RS485 you can use the following code:: + + #include <linux/serial.h> + + /* Include definition for RS485 ioctls: TIOCGRS485 and TIOCSRS485 */ + #include <sys/ioctl.h> + + /* Open your specific device (e.g., /dev/mydevice): */ + int fd = open ("/dev/mydevice", O_RDWR); + if (fd < 0) { + /* Error handling. See errno. */ + } + + struct serial_rs485 rs485conf; + + /* Enable RS485 mode: */ + rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_ENABLED; + + /* Set logical level for RTS pin equal to 1 when sending: */ + rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_RTS_ON_SEND; + /* or, set logical level for RTS pin equal to 0 when sending: */ + rs485conf.flags &= ~(SER_RS485_RTS_ON_SEND); + + /* Set logical level for RTS pin equal to 1 after sending: */ + rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_RTS_AFTER_SEND; + /* or, set logical level for RTS pin equal to 0 after sending: */ + rs485conf.flags &= ~(SER_RS485_RTS_AFTER_SEND); + + /* Set rts delay before send, if needed: */ + rs485conf.delay_rts_before_send = ...; + + /* Set rts delay after send, if needed: */ + rs485conf.delay_rts_after_send = ...; + + /* Set this flag if you want to receive data even while sending data */ + rs485conf.flags |= SER_RS485_RX_DURING_TX; + + if (ioctl (fd, TIOCSRS485, &rs485conf) < 0) { + /* Error handling. See errno. */ + } + + /* Use read() and write() syscalls here... */ + + /* Close the device when finished: */ + if (close (fd) < 0) { + /* Error handling. See errno. */ + } + +5. References +============= + + [1] include/uapi/linux/serial.h + + [2] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/rs485.txt diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/serial/tty.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/serial/tty.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..dd972caacf3e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/serial/tty.rst @@ -0,0 +1,328 @@ +================= +The Lockronomicon +================= + +Your guide to the ancient and twisted locking policies of the tty layer and +the warped logic behind them. Beware all ye who read on. + + +Line Discipline +--------------- + +Line disciplines are registered with tty_register_ldisc() passing the +discipline number and the ldisc structure. At the point of registration the +discipline must be ready to use and it is possible it will get used before +the call returns success. If the call returns an error then it won't get +called. Do not re-use ldisc numbers as they are part of the userspace ABI +and writing over an existing ldisc will cause demons to eat your computer. +After the return the ldisc data has been copied so you may free your own +copy of the structure. You must not re-register over the top of the line +discipline even with the same data or your computer again will be eaten by +demons. + +In order to remove a line discipline call tty_unregister_ldisc(). +In ancient times this always worked. In modern times the function will +return -EBUSY if the ldisc is currently in use. Since the ldisc referencing +code manages the module counts this should not usually be a concern. + +Heed this warning: the reference count field of the registered copies of the +tty_ldisc structure in the ldisc table counts the number of lines using this +discipline. The reference count of the tty_ldisc structure within a tty +counts the number of active users of the ldisc at this instant. In effect it +counts the number of threads of execution within an ldisc method (plus those +about to enter and exit although this detail matters not). + +Line Discipline Methods +----------------------- + +TTY side interfaces +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +======================= ======================================================= +open() Called when the line discipline is attached to + the terminal. No other call into the line + discipline for this tty will occur until it + completes successfully. Should initialize any + state needed by the ldisc, and set receive_room + in the tty_struct to the maximum amount of data + the line discipline is willing to accept from the + driver with a single call to receive_buf(). + Returning an error will prevent the ldisc from + being attached. Can sleep. + +close() This is called on a terminal when the line + discipline is being unplugged. At the point of + execution no further users will enter the + ldisc code for this tty. Can sleep. + +hangup() Called when the tty line is hung up. + The line discipline should cease I/O to the tty. + No further calls into the ldisc code will occur. + The return value is ignored. Can sleep. + +read() (optional) A process requests reading data from + the line. Multiple read calls may occur in parallel + and the ldisc must deal with serialization issues. + If not defined, the process will receive an EIO + error. May sleep. + +write() (optional) A process requests writing data to the + line. Multiple write calls are serialized by the + tty layer for the ldisc. If not defined, the + process will receive an EIO error. May sleep. + +flush_buffer() (optional) May be called at any point between + open and close, and instructs the line discipline + to empty its input buffer. + +set_termios() (optional) Called on termios structure changes. + The caller passes the old termios data and the + current data is in the tty. Called under the + termios semaphore so allowed to sleep. Serialized + against itself only. + +poll() (optional) Check the status for the poll/select + calls. Multiple poll calls may occur in parallel. + May sleep. + +ioctl() (optional) Called when an ioctl is handed to the + tty layer that might be for the ldisc. Multiple + ioctl calls may occur in parallel. May sleep. + +compat_ioctl() (optional) Called when a 32 bit ioctl is handed + to the tty layer that might be for the ldisc. + Multiple ioctl calls may occur in parallel. + May sleep. +======================= ======================================================= + +Driver Side Interfaces +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +======================= ======================================================= +receive_buf() (optional) Called by the low-level driver to hand + a buffer of received bytes to the ldisc for + processing. The number of bytes is guaranteed not + to exceed the current value of tty->receive_room. + All bytes must be processed. + +receive_buf2() (optional) Called by the low-level driver to hand + a buffer of received bytes to the ldisc for + processing. Returns the number of bytes processed. + + If both receive_buf() and receive_buf2() are + defined, receive_buf2() should be preferred. + +write_wakeup() May be called at any point between open and close. + The TTY_DO_WRITE_WAKEUP flag indicates if a call + is needed but always races versus calls. Thus the + ldisc must be careful about setting order and to + handle unexpected calls. Must not sleep. + + The driver is forbidden from calling this directly + from the ->write call from the ldisc as the ldisc + is permitted to call the driver write method from + this function. In such a situation defer it. + +dcd_change() Report to the tty line the current DCD pin status + changes and the relative timestamp. The timestamp + cannot be NULL. +======================= ======================================================= + + +Driver Access +^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +Line discipline methods can call the following methods of the underlying +hardware driver through the function pointers within the tty->driver +structure: + +======================= ======================================================= +write() Write a block of characters to the tty device. + Returns the number of characters accepted. The + character buffer passed to this method is already + in kernel space. + +put_char() Queues a character for writing to the tty device. + If there is no room in the queue, the character is + ignored. + +flush_chars() (Optional) If defined, must be called after + queueing characters with put_char() in order to + start transmission. + +write_room() Returns the numbers of characters the tty driver + will accept for queueing to be written. + +ioctl() Invoke device specific ioctl. + Expects data pointers to refer to userspace. + Returns ENOIOCTLCMD for unrecognized ioctl numbers. + +set_termios() Notify the tty driver that the device's termios + settings have changed. New settings are in + tty->termios. Previous settings should be passed in + the "old" argument. + + The API is defined such that the driver should return + the actual modes selected. This means that the + driver function is responsible for modifying any + bits in the request it cannot fulfill to indicate + the actual modes being used. A device with no + hardware capability for change (e.g. a USB dongle or + virtual port) can provide NULL for this method. + +throttle() Notify the tty driver that input buffers for the + line discipline are close to full, and it should + somehow signal that no more characters should be + sent to the tty. + +unthrottle() Notify the tty driver that characters can now be + sent to the tty without fear of overrunning the + input buffers of the line disciplines. + +stop() Ask the tty driver to stop outputting characters + to the tty device. + +start() Ask the tty driver to resume sending characters + to the tty device. + +hangup() Ask the tty driver to hang up the tty device. + +break_ctl() (Optional) Ask the tty driver to turn on or off + BREAK status on the RS-232 port. If state is -1, + then the BREAK status should be turned on; if + state is 0, then BREAK should be turned off. + If this routine is not implemented, use ioctls + TIOCSBRK / TIOCCBRK instead. + +wait_until_sent() Waits until the device has written out all of the + characters in its transmitter FIFO. + +send_xchar() Send a high-priority XON/XOFF character to the device. +======================= ======================================================= + + +Flags +^^^^^ + +Line discipline methods have access to tty->flags field containing the +following interesting flags: + +======================= ======================================================= +TTY_THROTTLED Driver input is throttled. The ldisc should call + tty->driver->unthrottle() in order to resume + reception when it is ready to process more data. + +TTY_DO_WRITE_WAKEUP If set, causes the driver to call the ldisc's + write_wakeup() method in order to resume + transmission when it can accept more data + to transmit. + +TTY_IO_ERROR If set, causes all subsequent userspace read/write + calls on the tty to fail, returning -EIO. + +TTY_OTHER_CLOSED Device is a pty and the other side has closed. + +TTY_NO_WRITE_SPLIT Prevent driver from splitting up writes into + smaller chunks. +======================= ======================================================= + + +Locking +^^^^^^^ + +Callers to the line discipline functions from the tty layer are required to +take line discipline locks. The same is true of calls from the driver side +but not yet enforced. + +Three calls are now provided:: + + ldisc = tty_ldisc_ref(tty); + +takes a handle to the line discipline in the tty and returns it. If no ldisc +is currently attached or the ldisc is being closed and re-opened at this +point then NULL is returned. While this handle is held the ldisc will not +change or go away:: + + tty_ldisc_deref(ldisc) + +Returns the ldisc reference and allows the ldisc to be closed. Returning the +reference takes away your right to call the ldisc functions until you take +a new reference:: + + ldisc = tty_ldisc_ref_wait(tty); + +Performs the same function as tty_ldisc_ref except that it will wait for an +ldisc change to complete and then return a reference to the new ldisc. + +While these functions are slightly slower than the old code they should have +minimal impact as most receive logic uses the flip buffers and they only +need to take a reference when they push bits up through the driver. + +A caution: The ldisc->open(), ldisc->close() and driver->set_ldisc +functions are called with the ldisc unavailable. Thus tty_ldisc_ref will +fail in this situation if used within these functions. Ldisc and driver +code calling its own functions must be careful in this case. + + +Driver Interface +---------------- + +======================= ======================================================= +open() Called when a device is opened. May sleep + +close() Called when a device is closed. At the point of + return from this call the driver must make no + further ldisc calls of any kind. May sleep + +write() Called to write bytes to the device. May not + sleep. May occur in parallel in special cases. + Because this includes panic paths drivers generally + shouldn't try and do clever locking here. + +put_char() Stuff a single character onto the queue. The + driver is guaranteed following up calls to + flush_chars. + +flush_chars() Ask the kernel to write put_char queue + +write_room() Return the number of characters that can be stuffed + into the port buffers without overflow (or less). + The ldisc is responsible for being intelligent + about multi-threading of write_room/write calls + +ioctl() Called when an ioctl may be for the driver + +set_termios() Called on termios change, serialized against + itself by a semaphore. May sleep. + +set_ldisc() Notifier for discipline change. At the point this + is done the discipline is not yet usable. Can now + sleep (I think) + +throttle() Called by the ldisc to ask the driver to do flow + control. Serialization including with unthrottle + is the job of the ldisc layer. + +unthrottle() Called by the ldisc to ask the driver to stop flow + control. + +stop() Ldisc notifier to the driver to stop output. As with + throttle the serializations with start() are down + to the ldisc layer. + +start() Ldisc notifier to the driver to start output. + +hangup() Ask the tty driver to cause a hangup initiated + from the host side. [Can sleep ??] + +break_ctl() Send RS232 break. Can sleep. Can get called in + parallel, driver must serialize (for now), and + with write calls. + +wait_until_sent() Wait for characters to exit the hardware queue + of the driver. Can sleep + +send_xchar() Send XON/XOFF and if possible jump the queue with + it in order to get fast flow control responses. + Cannot sleep ?? +======================= ======================================================= diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/sgi-ioc4.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/sgi-ioc4.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..72709222d3c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/sgi-ioc4.rst @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +==================================== +SGI IOC4 PCI (multi function) device +==================================== + +The SGI IOC4 PCI device is a bit of a strange beast, so some notes on +it are in order. + +First, even though the IOC4 performs multiple functions, such as an +IDE controller, a serial controller, a PS/2 keyboard/mouse controller, +and an external interrupt mechanism, it's not implemented as a +multifunction device. The consequence of this from a software +standpoint is that all these functions share a single IRQ, and +they can't all register to own the same PCI device ID. To make +matters a bit worse, some of the register blocks (and even registers +themselves) present in IOC4 are mixed-purpose between these several +functions, meaning that there's no clear "owning" device driver. + +The solution is to organize the IOC4 driver into several independent +drivers, "ioc4", "sgiioc4", and "ioc4_serial". Note that there is no +PS/2 controller driver as this functionality has never been wired up +on a shipping IO card. + +ioc4 +==== +This is the core (or shim) driver for IOC4. It is responsible for +initializing the basic functionality of the chip, and allocating +the PCI resources that are shared between the IOC4 functions. + +This driver also provides registration functions that the other +IOC4 drivers can call to make their presence known. Each driver +needs to provide a probe and remove function, which are invoked +by the core driver at appropriate times. The interface of these +IOC4 function probe and remove operations isn't precisely the same +as PCI device probe and remove operations, but is logically the +same operation. + +sgiioc4 +======= +This is the IDE driver for IOC4. Its name isn't very descriptive +simply for historical reasons (it used to be the only IOC4 driver +component). There's not much to say about it other than it hooks +up to the ioc4 driver via the appropriate registration, probe, and +remove functions. + +ioc4_serial +=========== +This is the serial driver for IOC4. There's not much to say about it +other than it hooks up to the ioc4 driver via the appropriate registration, +probe, and remove functions. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/sm501.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/sm501.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..882507453ba4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/sm501.rst @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +.. include:: <isonum.txt> + +============ +SM501 Driver +============ + +:Copyright: |copy| 2006, 2007 Simtec Electronics + +The Silicon Motion SM501 multimedia companion chip is a multifunction device +which may provide numerous interfaces including USB host controller USB gadget, +asynchronous serial ports, audio functions, and a dual display video interface. +The device may be connected by PCI or local bus with varying functions enabled. + +Core +---- + +The core driver in drivers/mfd provides common services for the +drivers which manage the specific hardware blocks. These services +include locking for common registers, clock control and resource +management. + +The core registers drivers for both PCI and generic bus based +chips via the platform device and driver system. + +On detection of a device, the core initialises the chip (which may +be specified by the platform data) and then exports the selected +peripheral set as platform devices for the specific drivers. + +The core re-uses the platform device system as the platform device +system provides enough features to support the drivers without the +need to create a new bus-type and the associated code to go with it. + + +Resources +--------- + +Each peripheral has a view of the device which is implicitly narrowed to +the specific set of resources that peripheral requires in order to +function correctly. + +The centralised memory allocation allows the driver to ensure that the +maximum possible resource allocation can be made to the video subsystem +as this is by-far the most resource-sensitive of the on-chip functions. + +The primary issue with memory allocation is that of moving the video +buffers once a display mode is chosen. Indeed when a video mode change +occurs the memory footprint of the video subsystem changes. + +Since video memory is difficult to move without changing the display +(unless sufficient contiguous memory can be provided for the old and new +modes simultaneously) the video driver fully utilises the memory area +given to it by aligning fb0 to the start of the area and fb1 to the end +of it. Any memory left over in the middle is used for the acceleration +functions, which are transient and thus their location is less critical +as it can be moved. + + +Configuration +------------- + +The platform device driver uses a set of platform data to pass +configurations through to the core and the subsidiary drivers +so that there can be support for more than one system carrying +an SM501 built into a single kernel image. + +The PCI driver assumes that the PCI card behaves as per the Silicon +Motion reference design. + +There is an errata (AB-5) affecting the selection of the +of the M1XCLK and M1CLK frequencies. These two clocks +must be sourced from the same PLL, although they can then +be divided down individually. If this is not set, then SM501 may +lock and hang the whole system. The driver will refuse to +attach if the PLL selection is different. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/smsc_ece1099.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/smsc_ece1099.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..079277421eaf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/smsc_ece1099.rst @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +================================================= +Msc Keyboard Scan Expansion/GPIO Expansion device +================================================= + +What is smsc-ece1099? +---------------------- + +The ECE1099 is a 40-Pin 3.3V Keyboard Scan Expansion +or GPIO Expansion device. The device supports a keyboard +scan matrix of 23x8. The device is connected to a Master +via the SMSC BC-Link interface or via the SMBus. +Keypad scan Input(KSI) and Keypad Scan Output(KSO) signals +are multiplexed with GPIOs. + +Interrupt generation +-------------------- + +Interrupts can be generated by an edge detection on a GPIO +pin or an edge detection on one of the bus interface pins. +Interrupts can also be detected on the keyboard scan interface. +The bus interrupt pin (BC_INT# or SMBUS_INT#) is asserted if +any bit in one of the Interrupt Status registers is 1 and +the corresponding Interrupt Mask bit is also 1. + +In order for software to determine which device is the source +of an interrupt, it should first read the Group Interrupt Status Register +to determine which Status register group is a source for the interrupt. +Software should read both the Status register and the associated Mask register, +then AND the two values together. Bits that are 1 in the result of the AND +are active interrupts. Software clears an interrupt by writing a 1 to the +corresponding bit in the Status register. + +Communication Protocol +---------------------- + +- SMbus slave Interface + The host processor communicates with the ECE1099 device + through a series of read/write registers via the SMBus + interface. SMBus is a serial communication protocol between + a computer host and its peripheral devices. The SMBus data + rate is 10KHz minimum to 400 KHz maximum + +- Slave Bus Interface + The ECE1099 device SMBus implementation is a subset of the + SMBus interface to the host. The device is a slave-only SMBus device. + The implementation in the device is a subset of SMBus since it + only supports four protocols. + + The Write Byte, Read Byte, Send Byte, and Receive Byte protocols are the + only valid SMBus protocols for the device. + +- BC-LinkTM Interface + The BC-Link is a proprietary bus that allows communication + between a Master device and a Companion device. The Master + device uses this serial bus to read and write registers + located on the Companion device. The bus comprises three signals, + BC_CLK, BC_DAT and BC_INT#. The Master device always provides the + clock, BC_CLK, and the Companion device is the source for an + independent asynchronous interrupt signal, BC_INT#. The ECE1099 + supports BC-Link speeds up to 24MHz. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/switchtec.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/switchtec.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7611fdc53e19 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/switchtec.rst @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +======================== +Linux Switchtec Support +======================== + +Microsemi's "Switchtec" line of PCI switch devices is already +supported by the kernel with standard PCI switch drivers. However, the +Switchtec device advertises a special management endpoint which +enables some additional functionality. This includes: + +* Packet and Byte Counters +* Firmware Upgrades +* Event and Error logs +* Querying port link status +* Custom user firmware commands + +The switchtec kernel module implements this functionality. + + +Interface +========= + +The primary means of communicating with the Switchtec management firmware is +through the Memory-mapped Remote Procedure Call (MRPC) interface. +Commands are submitted to the interface with a 4-byte command +identifier and up to 1KB of command specific data. The firmware will +respond with a 4-byte return code and up to 1KB of command-specific +data. The interface only processes a single command at a time. + + +Userspace Interface +=================== + +The MRPC interface will be exposed to userspace through a simple char +device: /dev/switchtec#, one for each management endpoint in the system. + +The char device has the following semantics: + +* A write must consist of at least 4 bytes and no more than 1028 bytes. + The first 4 bytes will be interpreted as the Command ID and the + remainder will be used as the input data. A write will send the + command to the firmware to begin processing. + +* Each write must be followed by exactly one read. Any double write will + produce an error and any read that doesn't follow a write will + produce an error. + +* A read will block until the firmware completes the command and return + the 4-byte Command Return Value plus up to 1024 bytes of output + data. (The length will be specified by the size parameter of the read + call -- reading less than 4 bytes will produce an error.) + +* The poll call will also be supported for userspace applications that + need to do other things while waiting for the command to complete. + +The following IOCTLs are also supported by the device: + +* SWITCHTEC_IOCTL_FLASH_INFO - Retrieve firmware length and number + of partitions in the device. + +* SWITCHTEC_IOCTL_FLASH_PART_INFO - Retrieve address and lengeth for + any specified partition in flash. + +* SWITCHTEC_IOCTL_EVENT_SUMMARY - Read a structure of bitmaps + indicating all uncleared events. + +* SWITCHTEC_IOCTL_EVENT_CTL - Get the current count, clear and set flags + for any event. This ioctl takes in a switchtec_ioctl_event_ctl struct + with the event_id, index and flags set (index being the partition or PFF + number for non-global events). It returns whether the event has + occurred, the number of times and any event specific data. The flags + can be used to clear the count or enable and disable actions to + happen when the event occurs. + By using the SWITCHTEC_IOCTL_EVENT_FLAG_EN_POLL flag, + you can set an event to trigger a poll command to return with + POLLPRI. In this way, userspace can wait for events to occur. + +* SWITCHTEC_IOCTL_PFF_TO_PORT and SWITCHTEC_IOCTL_PORT_TO_PFF convert + between PCI Function Framework number (used by the event system) + and Switchtec Logic Port ID and Partition number (which is more + user friendly). + + +Non-Transparent Bridge (NTB) Driver +=================================== + +An NTB hardware driver is provided for the Switchtec hardware in +ntb_hw_switchtec. Currently, it only supports switches configured with +exactly 2 NT partitions and zero or more non-NT partitions. It also requires +the following configuration settings: + +* Both NT partitions must be able to access each other's GAS spaces. + Thus, the bits in the GAS Access Vector under Management Settings + must be set to support this. +* Kernel configuration MUST include support for NTB (CONFIG_NTB needs + to be set) + +NT EP BAR 2 will be dynamically configured as a Direct Window, and +the configuration file does not need to configure it explicitly. + +Please refer to Documentation/driver-api/ntb.rst in Linux source tree for an overall +understanding of the Linux NTB stack. ntb_hw_switchtec works as an NTB +Hardware Driver in this stack. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/sync_file.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/sync_file.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..496fb2c3b3e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/sync_file.rst @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ +=================== +Sync File API Guide +=================== + +:Author: Gustavo Padovan <gustavo at padovan dot org> + +This document serves as a guide for device drivers writers on what the +sync_file API is, and how drivers can support it. Sync file is the carrier of +the fences(struct dma_fence) that are needed to synchronize between drivers or +across process boundaries. + +The sync_file API is meant to be used to send and receive fence information +to/from userspace. It enables userspace to do explicit fencing, where instead +of attaching a fence to the buffer a producer driver (such as a GPU or V4L +driver) sends the fence related to the buffer to userspace via a sync_file. + +The sync_file then can be sent to the consumer (DRM driver for example), that +will not use the buffer for anything before the fence(s) signals, i.e., the +driver that issued the fence is not using/processing the buffer anymore, so it +signals that the buffer is ready to use. And vice-versa for the consumer -> +producer part of the cycle. + +Sync files allows userspace awareness on buffer sharing synchronization between +drivers. + +Sync file was originally added in the Android kernel but current Linux Desktop +can benefit a lot from it. + +in-fences and out-fences +------------------------ + +Sync files can go either to or from userspace. When a sync_file is sent from +the driver to userspace we call the fences it contains 'out-fences'. They are +related to a buffer that the driver is processing or is going to process, so +the driver creates an out-fence to be able to notify, through +dma_fence_signal(), when it has finished using (or processing) that buffer. +Out-fences are fences that the driver creates. + +On the other hand if the driver receives fence(s) through a sync_file from +userspace we call these fence(s) 'in-fences'. Receiving in-fences means that +we need to wait for the fence(s) to signal before using any buffer related to +the in-fences. + +Creating Sync Files +------------------- + +When a driver needs to send an out-fence userspace it creates a sync_file. + +Interface:: + + struct sync_file *sync_file_create(struct dma_fence *fence); + +The caller pass the out-fence and gets back the sync_file. That is just the +first step, next it needs to install an fd on sync_file->file. So it gets an +fd:: + + fd = get_unused_fd_flags(O_CLOEXEC); + +and installs it on sync_file->file:: + + fd_install(fd, sync_file->file); + +The sync_file fd now can be sent to userspace. + +If the creation process fail, or the sync_file needs to be released by any +other reason fput(sync_file->file) should be used. + +Receiving Sync Files from Userspace +----------------------------------- + +When userspace needs to send an in-fence to the driver it passes file descriptor +of the Sync File to the kernel. The kernel can then retrieve the fences +from it. + +Interface:: + + struct dma_fence *sync_file_get_fence(int fd); + + +The returned reference is owned by the caller and must be disposed of +afterwards using dma_fence_put(). In case of error, a NULL is returned instead. + +References: + +1. struct sync_file in include/linux/sync_file.h +2. All interfaces mentioned above defined in include/linux/sync_file.h diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/vfio-mediated-device.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/vfio-mediated-device.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..25eb7d5b834b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/vfio-mediated-device.rst @@ -0,0 +1,414 @@ +.. include:: <isonum.txt> + +===================== +VFIO Mediated devices +===================== + +:Copyright: |copy| 2016, NVIDIA CORPORATION. All rights reserved. +:Author: Neo Jia <cjia@nvidia.com> +:Author: Kirti Wankhede <kwankhede@nvidia.com> + +This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as +published by the Free Software Foundation. + + +Virtual Function I/O (VFIO) Mediated devices[1] +=============================================== + +The number of use cases for virtualizing DMA devices that do not have built-in +SR_IOV capability is increasing. Previously, to virtualize such devices, +developers had to create their own management interfaces and APIs, and then +integrate them with user space software. To simplify integration with user space +software, we have identified common requirements and a unified management +interface for such devices. + +The VFIO driver framework provides unified APIs for direct device access. It is +an IOMMU/device-agnostic framework for exposing direct device access to user +space in a secure, IOMMU-protected environment. This framework is used for +multiple devices, such as GPUs, network adapters, and compute accelerators. With +direct device access, virtual machines or user space applications have direct +access to the physical device. This framework is reused for mediated devices. + +The mediated core driver provides a common interface for mediated device +management that can be used by drivers of different devices. This module +provides a generic interface to perform these operations: + +* Create and destroy a mediated device +* Add a mediated device to and remove it from a mediated bus driver +* Add a mediated device to and remove it from an IOMMU group + +The mediated core driver also provides an interface to register a bus driver. +For example, the mediated VFIO mdev driver is designed for mediated devices and +supports VFIO APIs. The mediated bus driver adds a mediated device to and +removes it from a VFIO group. + +The following high-level block diagram shows the main components and interfaces +in the VFIO mediated driver framework. The diagram shows NVIDIA, Intel, and IBM +devices as examples, as these devices are the first devices to use this module:: + + +---------------+ + | | + | +-----------+ | mdev_register_driver() +--------------+ + | | | +<------------------------+ | + | | mdev | | | | + | | bus | +------------------------>+ vfio_mdev.ko |<-> VFIO user + | | driver | | probe()/remove() | | APIs + | | | | +--------------+ + | +-----------+ | + | | + | MDEV CORE | + | MODULE | + | mdev.ko | + | +-----------+ | mdev_register_device() +--------------+ + | | | +<------------------------+ | + | | | | | nvidia.ko |<-> physical + | | | +------------------------>+ | device + | | | | callbacks +--------------+ + | | Physical | | + | | device | | mdev_register_device() +--------------+ + | | interface | |<------------------------+ | + | | | | | i915.ko |<-> physical + | | | +------------------------>+ | device + | | | | callbacks +--------------+ + | | | | + | | | | mdev_register_device() +--------------+ + | | | +<------------------------+ | + | | | | | ccw_device.ko|<-> physical + | | | +------------------------>+ | device + | | | | callbacks +--------------+ + | +-----------+ | + +---------------+ + + +Registration Interfaces +======================= + +The mediated core driver provides the following types of registration +interfaces: + +* Registration interface for a mediated bus driver +* Physical device driver interface + +Registration Interface for a Mediated Bus Driver +------------------------------------------------ + +The registration interface for a mediated bus driver provides the following +structure to represent a mediated device's driver:: + + /* + * struct mdev_driver [2] - Mediated device's driver + * @name: driver name + * @probe: called when new device created + * @remove: called when device removed + * @driver: device driver structure + */ + struct mdev_driver { + const char *name; + int (*probe) (struct device *dev); + void (*remove) (struct device *dev); + struct device_driver driver; + }; + +A mediated bus driver for mdev should use this structure in the function calls +to register and unregister itself with the core driver: + +* Register:: + + extern int mdev_register_driver(struct mdev_driver *drv, + struct module *owner); + +* Unregister:: + + extern void mdev_unregister_driver(struct mdev_driver *drv); + +The mediated bus driver is responsible for adding mediated devices to the VFIO +group when devices are bound to the driver and removing mediated devices from +the VFIO when devices are unbound from the driver. + + +Physical Device Driver Interface +-------------------------------- + +The physical device driver interface provides the mdev_parent_ops[3] structure +to define the APIs to manage work in the mediated core driver that is related +to the physical device. + +The structures in the mdev_parent_ops structure are as follows: + +* dev_attr_groups: attributes of the parent device +* mdev_attr_groups: attributes of the mediated device +* supported_config: attributes to define supported configurations + +The functions in the mdev_parent_ops structure are as follows: + +* create: allocate basic resources in a driver for a mediated device +* remove: free resources in a driver when a mediated device is destroyed + +(Note that mdev-core provides no implicit serialization of create/remove +callbacks per mdev parent device, per mdev type, or any other categorization. +Vendor drivers are expected to be fully asynchronous in this respect or +provide their own internal resource protection.) + +The callbacks in the mdev_parent_ops structure are as follows: + +* open: open callback of mediated device +* close: close callback of mediated device +* ioctl: ioctl callback of mediated device +* read : read emulation callback +* write: write emulation callback +* mmap: mmap emulation callback + +A driver should use the mdev_parent_ops structure in the function call to +register itself with the mdev core driver:: + + extern int mdev_register_device(struct device *dev, + const struct mdev_parent_ops *ops); + +However, the mdev_parent_ops structure is not required in the function call +that a driver should use to unregister itself with the mdev core driver:: + + extern void mdev_unregister_device(struct device *dev); + + +Mediated Device Management Interface Through sysfs +================================================== + +The management interface through sysfs enables user space software, such as +libvirt, to query and configure mediated devices in a hardware-agnostic fashion. +This management interface provides flexibility to the underlying physical +device's driver to support features such as: + +* Mediated device hot plug +* Multiple mediated devices in a single virtual machine +* Multiple mediated devices from different physical devices + +Links in the mdev_bus Class Directory +------------------------------------- +The /sys/class/mdev_bus/ directory contains links to devices that are registered +with the mdev core driver. + +Directories and files under the sysfs for Each Physical Device +-------------------------------------------------------------- + +:: + + |- [parent physical device] + |--- Vendor-specific-attributes [optional] + |--- [mdev_supported_types] + | |--- [<type-id>] + | | |--- create + | | |--- name + | | |--- available_instances + | | |--- device_api + | | |--- description + | | |--- [devices] + | |--- [<type-id>] + | | |--- create + | | |--- name + | | |--- available_instances + | | |--- device_api + | | |--- description + | | |--- [devices] + | |--- [<type-id>] + | |--- create + | |--- name + | |--- available_instances + | |--- device_api + | |--- description + | |--- [devices] + +* [mdev_supported_types] + + The list of currently supported mediated device types and their details. + + [<type-id>], device_api, and available_instances are mandatory attributes + that should be provided by vendor driver. + +* [<type-id>] + + The [<type-id>] name is created by adding the device driver string as a prefix + to the string provided by the vendor driver. This format of this name is as + follows:: + + sprintf(buf, "%s-%s", dev_driver_string(parent->dev), group->name); + + (or using mdev_parent_dev(mdev) to arrive at the parent device outside + of the core mdev code) + +* device_api + + This attribute should show which device API is being created, for example, + "vfio-pci" for a PCI device. + +* available_instances + + This attribute should show the number of devices of type <type-id> that can be + created. + +* [device] + + This directory contains links to the devices of type <type-id> that have been + created. + +* name + + This attribute should show human readable name. This is optional attribute. + +* description + + This attribute should show brief features/description of the type. This is + optional attribute. + +Directories and Files Under the sysfs for Each mdev Device +---------------------------------------------------------- + +:: + + |- [parent phy device] + |--- [$MDEV_UUID] + |--- remove + |--- mdev_type {link to its type} + |--- vendor-specific-attributes [optional] + +* remove (write only) + +Writing '1' to the 'remove' file destroys the mdev device. The vendor driver can +fail the remove() callback if that device is active and the vendor driver +doesn't support hot unplug. + +Example:: + + # echo 1 > /sys/bus/mdev/devices/$mdev_UUID/remove + +Mediated device Hot plug +------------------------ + +Mediated devices can be created and assigned at runtime. The procedure to hot +plug a mediated device is the same as the procedure to hot plug a PCI device. + +Translation APIs for Mediated Devices +===================================== + +The following APIs are provided for translating user pfn to host pfn in a VFIO +driver:: + + extern int vfio_pin_pages(struct device *dev, unsigned long *user_pfn, + int npage, int prot, unsigned long *phys_pfn); + + extern int vfio_unpin_pages(struct device *dev, unsigned long *user_pfn, + int npage); + +These functions call back into the back-end IOMMU module by using the pin_pages +and unpin_pages callbacks of the struct vfio_iommu_driver_ops[4]. Currently +these callbacks are supported in the TYPE1 IOMMU module. To enable them for +other IOMMU backend modules, such as PPC64 sPAPR module, they need to provide +these two callback functions. + +Using the Sample Code +===================== + +mtty.c in samples/vfio-mdev/ directory is a sample driver program to +demonstrate how to use the mediated device framework. + +The sample driver creates an mdev device that simulates a serial port over a PCI +card. + +1. Build and load the mtty.ko module. + + This step creates a dummy device, /sys/devices/virtual/mtty/mtty/ + + Files in this device directory in sysfs are similar to the following:: + + # tree /sys/devices/virtual/mtty/mtty/ + /sys/devices/virtual/mtty/mtty/ + |-- mdev_supported_types + | |-- mtty-1 + | | |-- available_instances + | | |-- create + | | |-- device_api + | | |-- devices + | | `-- name + | `-- mtty-2 + | |-- available_instances + | |-- create + | |-- device_api + | |-- devices + | `-- name + |-- mtty_dev + | `-- sample_mtty_dev + |-- power + | |-- autosuspend_delay_ms + | |-- control + | |-- runtime_active_time + | |-- runtime_status + | `-- runtime_suspended_time + |-- subsystem -> ../../../../class/mtty + `-- uevent + +2. Create a mediated device by using the dummy device that you created in the + previous step:: + + # echo "83b8f4f2-509f-382f-3c1e-e6bfe0fa1001" > \ + /sys/devices/virtual/mtty/mtty/mdev_supported_types/mtty-2/create + +3. Add parameters to qemu-kvm:: + + -device vfio-pci,\ + sysfsdev=/sys/bus/mdev/devices/83b8f4f2-509f-382f-3c1e-e6bfe0fa1001 + +4. Boot the VM. + + In the Linux guest VM, with no hardware on the host, the device appears + as follows:: + + # lspci -s 00:05.0 -xxvv + 00:05.0 Serial controller: Device 4348:3253 (rev 10) (prog-if 02 [16550]) + Subsystem: Device 4348:3253 + Physical Slot: 5 + Control: I/O+ Mem- BusMaster- SpecCycle- MemWINV- VGASnoop- ParErr- + Stepping- SERR- FastB2B- DisINTx- + Status: Cap- 66MHz- UDF- FastB2B- ParErr- DEVSEL=medium >TAbort- + <TAbort- <MAbort- >SERR- <PERR- INTx- + Interrupt: pin A routed to IRQ 10 + Region 0: I/O ports at c150 [size=8] + Region 1: I/O ports at c158 [size=8] + Kernel driver in use: serial + 00: 48 43 53 32 01 00 00 02 10 02 00 07 00 00 00 00 + 10: 51 c1 00 00 59 c1 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 + 20: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 48 43 53 32 + 30: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0a 01 00 00 + + In the Linux guest VM, dmesg output for the device is as follows: + + serial 0000:00:05.0: PCI INT A -> Link[LNKA] -> GSI 10 (level, high) -> IRQ 10 + 0000:00:05.0: ttyS1 at I/O 0xc150 (irq = 10) is a 16550A + 0000:00:05.0: ttyS2 at I/O 0xc158 (irq = 10) is a 16550A + + +5. In the Linux guest VM, check the serial ports:: + + # setserial -g /dev/ttyS* + /dev/ttyS0, UART: 16550A, Port: 0x03f8, IRQ: 4 + /dev/ttyS1, UART: 16550A, Port: 0xc150, IRQ: 10 + /dev/ttyS2, UART: 16550A, Port: 0xc158, IRQ: 10 + +6. Using minicom or any terminal emulation program, open port /dev/ttyS1 or + /dev/ttyS2 with hardware flow control disabled. + +7. Type data on the minicom terminal or send data to the terminal emulation + program and read the data. + + Data is loop backed from hosts mtty driver. + +8. Destroy the mediated device that you created:: + + # echo 1 > /sys/bus/mdev/devices/83b8f4f2-509f-382f-3c1e-e6bfe0fa1001/remove + +References +========== + +1. See Documentation/driver-api/vfio.rst for more information on VFIO. +2. struct mdev_driver in include/linux/mdev.h +3. struct mdev_parent_ops in include/linux/mdev.h +4. struct vfio_iommu_driver_ops in include/linux/vfio.h diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/vfio.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/vfio.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f1a4d3c3ba0b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/vfio.rst @@ -0,0 +1,520 @@ +================================== +VFIO - "Virtual Function I/O" [1]_ +================================== + +Many modern system now provide DMA and interrupt remapping facilities +to help ensure I/O devices behave within the boundaries they've been +allotted. This includes x86 hardware with AMD-Vi and Intel VT-d, +POWER systems with Partitionable Endpoints (PEs) and embedded PowerPC +systems such as Freescale PAMU. The VFIO driver is an IOMMU/device +agnostic framework for exposing direct device access to userspace, in +a secure, IOMMU protected environment. In other words, this allows +safe [2]_, non-privileged, userspace drivers. + +Why do we want that? Virtual machines often make use of direct device +access ("device assignment") when configured for the highest possible +I/O performance. From a device and host perspective, this simply +turns the VM into a userspace driver, with the benefits of +significantly reduced latency, higher bandwidth, and direct use of +bare-metal device drivers [3]_. + +Some applications, particularly in the high performance computing +field, also benefit from low-overhead, direct device access from +userspace. Examples include network adapters (often non-TCP/IP based) +and compute accelerators. Prior to VFIO, these drivers had to either +go through the full development cycle to become proper upstream +driver, be maintained out of tree, or make use of the UIO framework, +which has no notion of IOMMU protection, limited interrupt support, +and requires root privileges to access things like PCI configuration +space. + +The VFIO driver framework intends to unify these, replacing both the +KVM PCI specific device assignment code as well as provide a more +secure, more featureful userspace driver environment than UIO. + +Groups, Devices, and IOMMUs +--------------------------- + +Devices are the main target of any I/O driver. Devices typically +create a programming interface made up of I/O access, interrupts, +and DMA. Without going into the details of each of these, DMA is +by far the most critical aspect for maintaining a secure environment +as allowing a device read-write access to system memory imposes the +greatest risk to the overall system integrity. + +To help mitigate this risk, many modern IOMMUs now incorporate +isolation properties into what was, in many cases, an interface only +meant for translation (ie. solving the addressing problems of devices +with limited address spaces). With this, devices can now be isolated +from each other and from arbitrary memory access, thus allowing +things like secure direct assignment of devices into virtual machines. + +This isolation is not always at the granularity of a single device +though. Even when an IOMMU is capable of this, properties of devices, +interconnects, and IOMMU topologies can each reduce this isolation. +For instance, an individual device may be part of a larger multi- +function enclosure. While the IOMMU may be able to distinguish +between devices within the enclosure, the enclosure may not require +transactions between devices to reach the IOMMU. Examples of this +could be anything from a multi-function PCI device with backdoors +between functions to a non-PCI-ACS (Access Control Services) capable +bridge allowing redirection without reaching the IOMMU. Topology +can also play a factor in terms of hiding devices. A PCIe-to-PCI +bridge masks the devices behind it, making transaction appear as if +from the bridge itself. Obviously IOMMU design plays a major factor +as well. + +Therefore, while for the most part an IOMMU may have device level +granularity, any system is susceptible to reduced granularity. The +IOMMU API therefore supports a notion of IOMMU groups. A group is +a set of devices which is isolatable from all other devices in the +system. Groups are therefore the unit of ownership used by VFIO. + +While the group is the minimum granularity that must be used to +ensure secure user access, it's not necessarily the preferred +granularity. In IOMMUs which make use of page tables, it may be +possible to share a set of page tables between different groups, +reducing the overhead both to the platform (reduced TLB thrashing, +reduced duplicate page tables), and to the user (programming only +a single set of translations). For this reason, VFIO makes use of +a container class, which may hold one or more groups. A container +is created by simply opening the /dev/vfio/vfio character device. + +On its own, the container provides little functionality, with all +but a couple version and extension query interfaces locked away. +The user needs to add a group into the container for the next level +of functionality. To do this, the user first needs to identify the +group associated with the desired device. This can be done using +the sysfs links described in the example below. By unbinding the +device from the host driver and binding it to a VFIO driver, a new +VFIO group will appear for the group as /dev/vfio/$GROUP, where +$GROUP is the IOMMU group number of which the device is a member. +If the IOMMU group contains multiple devices, each will need to +be bound to a VFIO driver before operations on the VFIO group +are allowed (it's also sufficient to only unbind the device from +host drivers if a VFIO driver is unavailable; this will make the +group available, but not that particular device). TBD - interface +for disabling driver probing/locking a device. + +Once the group is ready, it may be added to the container by opening +the VFIO group character device (/dev/vfio/$GROUP) and using the +VFIO_GROUP_SET_CONTAINER ioctl, passing the file descriptor of the +previously opened container file. If desired and if the IOMMU driver +supports sharing the IOMMU context between groups, multiple groups may +be set to the same container. If a group fails to set to a container +with existing groups, a new empty container will need to be used +instead. + +With a group (or groups) attached to a container, the remaining +ioctls become available, enabling access to the VFIO IOMMU interfaces. +Additionally, it now becomes possible to get file descriptors for each +device within a group using an ioctl on the VFIO group file descriptor. + +The VFIO device API includes ioctls for describing the device, the I/O +regions and their read/write/mmap offsets on the device descriptor, as +well as mechanisms for describing and registering interrupt +notifications. + +VFIO Usage Example +------------------ + +Assume user wants to access PCI device 0000:06:0d.0:: + + $ readlink /sys/bus/pci/devices/0000:06:0d.0/iommu_group + ../../../../kernel/iommu_groups/26 + +This device is therefore in IOMMU group 26. This device is on the +pci bus, therefore the user will make use of vfio-pci to manage the +group:: + + # modprobe vfio-pci + +Binding this device to the vfio-pci driver creates the VFIO group +character devices for this group:: + + $ lspci -n -s 0000:06:0d.0 + 06:0d.0 0401: 1102:0002 (rev 08) + # echo 0000:06:0d.0 > /sys/bus/pci/devices/0000:06:0d.0/driver/unbind + # echo 1102 0002 > /sys/bus/pci/drivers/vfio-pci/new_id + +Now we need to look at what other devices are in the group to free +it for use by VFIO:: + + $ ls -l /sys/bus/pci/devices/0000:06:0d.0/iommu_group/devices + total 0 + lrwxrwxrwx. 1 root root 0 Apr 23 16:13 0000:00:1e.0 -> + ../../../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1e.0 + lrwxrwxrwx. 1 root root 0 Apr 23 16:13 0000:06:0d.0 -> + ../../../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1e.0/0000:06:0d.0 + lrwxrwxrwx. 1 root root 0 Apr 23 16:13 0000:06:0d.1 -> + ../../../../devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1e.0/0000:06:0d.1 + +This device is behind a PCIe-to-PCI bridge [4]_, therefore we also +need to add device 0000:06:0d.1 to the group following the same +procedure as above. Device 0000:00:1e.0 is a bridge that does +not currently have a host driver, therefore it's not required to +bind this device to the vfio-pci driver (vfio-pci does not currently +support PCI bridges). + +The final step is to provide the user with access to the group if +unprivileged operation is desired (note that /dev/vfio/vfio provides +no capabilities on its own and is therefore expected to be set to +mode 0666 by the system):: + + # chown user:user /dev/vfio/26 + +The user now has full access to all the devices and the iommu for this +group and can access them as follows:: + + int container, group, device, i; + struct vfio_group_status group_status = + { .argsz = sizeof(group_status) }; + struct vfio_iommu_type1_info iommu_info = { .argsz = sizeof(iommu_info) }; + struct vfio_iommu_type1_dma_map dma_map = { .argsz = sizeof(dma_map) }; + struct vfio_device_info device_info = { .argsz = sizeof(device_info) }; + + /* Create a new container */ + container = open("/dev/vfio/vfio", O_RDWR); + + if (ioctl(container, VFIO_GET_API_VERSION) != VFIO_API_VERSION) + /* Unknown API version */ + + if (!ioctl(container, VFIO_CHECK_EXTENSION, VFIO_TYPE1_IOMMU)) + /* Doesn't support the IOMMU driver we want. */ + + /* Open the group */ + group = open("/dev/vfio/26", O_RDWR); + + /* Test the group is viable and available */ + ioctl(group, VFIO_GROUP_GET_STATUS, &group_status); + + if (!(group_status.flags & VFIO_GROUP_FLAGS_VIABLE)) + /* Group is not viable (ie, not all devices bound for vfio) */ + + /* Add the group to the container */ + ioctl(group, VFIO_GROUP_SET_CONTAINER, &container); + + /* Enable the IOMMU model we want */ + ioctl(container, VFIO_SET_IOMMU, VFIO_TYPE1_IOMMU); + + /* Get addition IOMMU info */ + ioctl(container, VFIO_IOMMU_GET_INFO, &iommu_info); + + /* Allocate some space and setup a DMA mapping */ + dma_map.vaddr = mmap(0, 1024 * 1024, PROT_READ | PROT_WRITE, + MAP_PRIVATE | MAP_ANONYMOUS, 0, 0); + dma_map.size = 1024 * 1024; + dma_map.iova = 0; /* 1MB starting at 0x0 from device view */ + dma_map.flags = VFIO_DMA_MAP_FLAG_READ | VFIO_DMA_MAP_FLAG_WRITE; + + ioctl(container, VFIO_IOMMU_MAP_DMA, &dma_map); + + /* Get a file descriptor for the device */ + device = ioctl(group, VFIO_GROUP_GET_DEVICE_FD, "0000:06:0d.0"); + + /* Test and setup the device */ + ioctl(device, VFIO_DEVICE_GET_INFO, &device_info); + + for (i = 0; i < device_info.num_regions; i++) { + struct vfio_region_info reg = { .argsz = sizeof(reg) }; + + reg.index = i; + + ioctl(device, VFIO_DEVICE_GET_REGION_INFO, ®); + + /* Setup mappings... read/write offsets, mmaps + * For PCI devices, config space is a region */ + } + + for (i = 0; i < device_info.num_irqs; i++) { + struct vfio_irq_info irq = { .argsz = sizeof(irq) }; + + irq.index = i; + + ioctl(device, VFIO_DEVICE_GET_IRQ_INFO, &irq); + + /* Setup IRQs... eventfds, VFIO_DEVICE_SET_IRQS */ + } + + /* Gratuitous device reset and go... */ + ioctl(device, VFIO_DEVICE_RESET); + +VFIO User API +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Please see include/linux/vfio.h for complete API documentation. + +VFIO bus driver API +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +VFIO bus drivers, such as vfio-pci make use of only a few interfaces +into VFIO core. When devices are bound and unbound to the driver, +the driver should call vfio_add_group_dev() and vfio_del_group_dev() +respectively:: + + extern int vfio_add_group_dev(struct device *dev, + const struct vfio_device_ops *ops, + void *device_data); + + extern void *vfio_del_group_dev(struct device *dev); + +vfio_add_group_dev() indicates to the core to begin tracking the +iommu_group of the specified dev and register the dev as owned by +a VFIO bus driver. The driver provides an ops structure for callbacks +similar to a file operations structure:: + + struct vfio_device_ops { + int (*open)(void *device_data); + void (*release)(void *device_data); + ssize_t (*read)(void *device_data, char __user *buf, + size_t count, loff_t *ppos); + ssize_t (*write)(void *device_data, const char __user *buf, + size_t size, loff_t *ppos); + long (*ioctl)(void *device_data, unsigned int cmd, + unsigned long arg); + int (*mmap)(void *device_data, struct vm_area_struct *vma); + }; + +Each function is passed the device_data that was originally registered +in the vfio_add_group_dev() call above. This allows the bus driver +an easy place to store its opaque, private data. The open/release +callbacks are issued when a new file descriptor is created for a +device (via VFIO_GROUP_GET_DEVICE_FD). The ioctl interface provides +a direct pass through for VFIO_DEVICE_* ioctls. The read/write/mmap +interfaces implement the device region access defined by the device's +own VFIO_DEVICE_GET_REGION_INFO ioctl. + + +PPC64 sPAPR implementation note +------------------------------- + +This implementation has some specifics: + +1) On older systems (POWER7 with P5IOC2/IODA1) only one IOMMU group per + container is supported as an IOMMU table is allocated at the boot time, + one table per a IOMMU group which is a Partitionable Endpoint (PE) + (PE is often a PCI domain but not always). + + Newer systems (POWER8 with IODA2) have improved hardware design which allows + to remove this limitation and have multiple IOMMU groups per a VFIO + container. + +2) The hardware supports so called DMA windows - the PCI address range + within which DMA transfer is allowed, any attempt to access address space + out of the window leads to the whole PE isolation. + +3) PPC64 guests are paravirtualized but not fully emulated. There is an API + to map/unmap pages for DMA, and it normally maps 1..32 pages per call and + currently there is no way to reduce the number of calls. In order to make + things faster, the map/unmap handling has been implemented in real mode + which provides an excellent performance which has limitations such as + inability to do locked pages accounting in real time. + +4) According to sPAPR specification, A Partitionable Endpoint (PE) is an I/O + subtree that can be treated as a unit for the purposes of partitioning and + error recovery. A PE may be a single or multi-function IOA (IO Adapter), a + function of a multi-function IOA, or multiple IOAs (possibly including + switch and bridge structures above the multiple IOAs). PPC64 guests detect + PCI errors and recover from them via EEH RTAS services, which works on the + basis of additional ioctl commands. + + So 4 additional ioctls have been added: + + VFIO_IOMMU_SPAPR_TCE_GET_INFO + returns the size and the start of the DMA window on the PCI bus. + + VFIO_IOMMU_ENABLE + enables the container. The locked pages accounting + is done at this point. This lets user first to know what + the DMA window is and adjust rlimit before doing any real job. + + VFIO_IOMMU_DISABLE + disables the container. + + VFIO_EEH_PE_OP + provides an API for EEH setup, error detection and recovery. + + The code flow from the example above should be slightly changed:: + + struct vfio_eeh_pe_op pe_op = { .argsz = sizeof(pe_op), .flags = 0 }; + + ..... + /* Add the group to the container */ + ioctl(group, VFIO_GROUP_SET_CONTAINER, &container); + + /* Enable the IOMMU model we want */ + ioctl(container, VFIO_SET_IOMMU, VFIO_SPAPR_TCE_IOMMU) + + /* Get addition sPAPR IOMMU info */ + vfio_iommu_spapr_tce_info spapr_iommu_info; + ioctl(container, VFIO_IOMMU_SPAPR_TCE_GET_INFO, &spapr_iommu_info); + + if (ioctl(container, VFIO_IOMMU_ENABLE)) + /* Cannot enable container, may be low rlimit */ + + /* Allocate some space and setup a DMA mapping */ + dma_map.vaddr = mmap(0, 1024 * 1024, PROT_READ | PROT_WRITE, + MAP_PRIVATE | MAP_ANONYMOUS, 0, 0); + + dma_map.size = 1024 * 1024; + dma_map.iova = 0; /* 1MB starting at 0x0 from device view */ + dma_map.flags = VFIO_DMA_MAP_FLAG_READ | VFIO_DMA_MAP_FLAG_WRITE; + + /* Check here is .iova/.size are within DMA window from spapr_iommu_info */ + ioctl(container, VFIO_IOMMU_MAP_DMA, &dma_map); + + /* Get a file descriptor for the device */ + device = ioctl(group, VFIO_GROUP_GET_DEVICE_FD, "0000:06:0d.0"); + + .... + + /* Gratuitous device reset and go... */ + ioctl(device, VFIO_DEVICE_RESET); + + /* Make sure EEH is supported */ + ioctl(container, VFIO_CHECK_EXTENSION, VFIO_EEH); + + /* Enable the EEH functionality on the device */ + pe_op.op = VFIO_EEH_PE_ENABLE; + ioctl(container, VFIO_EEH_PE_OP, &pe_op); + + /* You're suggested to create additional data struct to represent + * PE, and put child devices belonging to same IOMMU group to the + * PE instance for later reference. + */ + + /* Check the PE's state and make sure it's in functional state */ + pe_op.op = VFIO_EEH_PE_GET_STATE; + ioctl(container, VFIO_EEH_PE_OP, &pe_op); + + /* Save device state using pci_save_state(). + * EEH should be enabled on the specified device. + */ + + .... + + /* Inject EEH error, which is expected to be caused by 32-bits + * config load. + */ + pe_op.op = VFIO_EEH_PE_INJECT_ERR; + pe_op.err.type = EEH_ERR_TYPE_32; + pe_op.err.func = EEH_ERR_FUNC_LD_CFG_ADDR; + pe_op.err.addr = 0ul; + pe_op.err.mask = 0ul; + ioctl(container, VFIO_EEH_PE_OP, &pe_op); + + .... + + /* When 0xFF's returned from reading PCI config space or IO BARs + * of the PCI device. Check the PE's state to see if that has been + * frozen. + */ + ioctl(container, VFIO_EEH_PE_OP, &pe_op); + + /* Waiting for pending PCI transactions to be completed and don't + * produce any more PCI traffic from/to the affected PE until + * recovery is finished. + */ + + /* Enable IO for the affected PE and collect logs. Usually, the + * standard part of PCI config space, AER registers are dumped + * as logs for further analysis. + */ + pe_op.op = VFIO_EEH_PE_UNFREEZE_IO; + ioctl(container, VFIO_EEH_PE_OP, &pe_op); + + /* + * Issue PE reset: hot or fundamental reset. Usually, hot reset + * is enough. However, the firmware of some PCI adapters would + * require fundamental reset. + */ + pe_op.op = VFIO_EEH_PE_RESET_HOT; + ioctl(container, VFIO_EEH_PE_OP, &pe_op); + pe_op.op = VFIO_EEH_PE_RESET_DEACTIVATE; + ioctl(container, VFIO_EEH_PE_OP, &pe_op); + + /* Configure the PCI bridges for the affected PE */ + pe_op.op = VFIO_EEH_PE_CONFIGURE; + ioctl(container, VFIO_EEH_PE_OP, &pe_op); + + /* Restored state we saved at initialization time. pci_restore_state() + * is good enough as an example. + */ + + /* Hopefully, error is recovered successfully. Now, you can resume to + * start PCI traffic to/from the affected PE. + */ + + .... + +5) There is v2 of SPAPR TCE IOMMU. It deprecates VFIO_IOMMU_ENABLE/ + VFIO_IOMMU_DISABLE and implements 2 new ioctls: + VFIO_IOMMU_SPAPR_REGISTER_MEMORY and VFIO_IOMMU_SPAPR_UNREGISTER_MEMORY + (which are unsupported in v1 IOMMU). + + PPC64 paravirtualized guests generate a lot of map/unmap requests, + and the handling of those includes pinning/unpinning pages and updating + mm::locked_vm counter to make sure we do not exceed the rlimit. + The v2 IOMMU splits accounting and pinning into separate operations: + + - VFIO_IOMMU_SPAPR_REGISTER_MEMORY/VFIO_IOMMU_SPAPR_UNREGISTER_MEMORY ioctls + receive a user space address and size of the block to be pinned. + Bisecting is not supported and VFIO_IOMMU_UNREGISTER_MEMORY is expected to + be called with the exact address and size used for registering + the memory block. The userspace is not expected to call these often. + The ranges are stored in a linked list in a VFIO container. + + - VFIO_IOMMU_MAP_DMA/VFIO_IOMMU_UNMAP_DMA ioctls only update the actual + IOMMU table and do not do pinning; instead these check that the userspace + address is from pre-registered range. + + This separation helps in optimizing DMA for guests. + +6) sPAPR specification allows guests to have an additional DMA window(s) on + a PCI bus with a variable page size. Two ioctls have been added to support + this: VFIO_IOMMU_SPAPR_TCE_CREATE and VFIO_IOMMU_SPAPR_TCE_REMOVE. + The platform has to support the functionality or error will be returned to + the userspace. The existing hardware supports up to 2 DMA windows, one is + 2GB long, uses 4K pages and called "default 32bit window"; the other can + be as big as entire RAM, use different page size, it is optional - guests + create those in run-time if the guest driver supports 64bit DMA. + + VFIO_IOMMU_SPAPR_TCE_CREATE receives a page shift, a DMA window size and + a number of TCE table levels (if a TCE table is going to be big enough and + the kernel may not be able to allocate enough of physically contiguous + memory). It creates a new window in the available slot and returns the bus + address where the new window starts. Due to hardware limitation, the user + space cannot choose the location of DMA windows. + + VFIO_IOMMU_SPAPR_TCE_REMOVE receives the bus start address of the window + and removes it. + +------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +.. [1] VFIO was originally an acronym for "Virtual Function I/O" in its + initial implementation by Tom Lyon while as Cisco. We've since + outgrown the acronym, but it's catchy. + +.. [2] "safe" also depends upon a device being "well behaved". It's + possible for multi-function devices to have backdoors between + functions and even for single function devices to have alternative + access to things like PCI config space through MMIO registers. To + guard against the former we can include additional precautions in the + IOMMU driver to group multi-function PCI devices together + (iommu=group_mf). The latter we can't prevent, but the IOMMU should + still provide isolation. For PCI, SR-IOV Virtual Functions are the + best indicator of "well behaved", as these are designed for + virtualization usage models. + +.. [3] As always there are trade-offs to virtual machine device + assignment that are beyond the scope of VFIO. It's expected that + future IOMMU technologies will reduce some, but maybe not all, of + these trade-offs. + +.. [4] In this case the device is below a PCI bridge, so transactions + from either function of the device are indistinguishable to the iommu:: + + -[0000:00]-+-1e.0-[06]--+-0d.0 + \-0d.1 + + 00:1e.0 PCI bridge: Intel Corporation 82801 PCI Bridge (rev 90) diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/xilinx/eemi.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/xilinx/eemi.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9dcbc6f18d75 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/xilinx/eemi.rst @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ +==================================== +Xilinx Zynq MPSoC EEMI Documentation +==================================== + +Xilinx Zynq MPSoC Firmware Interface +------------------------------------- +The zynqmp-firmware node describes the interface to platform firmware. +ZynqMP has an interface to communicate with secure firmware. Firmware +driver provides an interface to firmware APIs. Interface APIs can be +used by any driver to communicate with PMC(Platform Management Controller). + +Embedded Energy Management Interface (EEMI) +---------------------------------------------- +The embedded energy management interface is used to allow software +components running across different processing clusters on a chip or +device to communicate with a power management controller (PMC) on a +device to issue or respond to power management requests. + +EEMI ops is a structure containing all eemi APIs supported by Zynq MPSoC. +The zynqmp-firmware driver maintain all EEMI APIs in zynqmp_eemi_ops +structure. Any driver who want to communicate with PMC using EEMI APIs +can call zynqmp_pm_get_eemi_ops(). + +Example of EEMI ops:: + + /* zynqmp-firmware driver maintain all EEMI APIs */ + struct zynqmp_eemi_ops { + int (*get_api_version)(u32 *version); + int (*query_data)(struct zynqmp_pm_query_data qdata, u32 *out); + }; + + static const struct zynqmp_eemi_ops eemi_ops = { + .get_api_version = zynqmp_pm_get_api_version, + .query_data = zynqmp_pm_query_data, + }; + +Example of EEMI ops usage:: + + static const struct zynqmp_eemi_ops *eemi_ops; + u32 ret_payload[PAYLOAD_ARG_CNT]; + int ret; + + eemi_ops = zynqmp_pm_get_eemi_ops(); + if (IS_ERR(eemi_ops)) + return PTR_ERR(eemi_ops); + + ret = eemi_ops->query_data(qdata, ret_payload); + +IOCTL +------ +IOCTL API is for device control and configuration. It is not a system +IOCTL but it is an EEMI API. This API can be used by master to control +any device specific configuration. IOCTL definitions can be platform +specific. This API also manage shared device configuration. + +The following IOCTL IDs are valid for device control: +- IOCTL_SET_PLL_FRAC_MODE 8 +- IOCTL_GET_PLL_FRAC_MODE 9 +- IOCTL_SET_PLL_FRAC_DATA 10 +- IOCTL_GET_PLL_FRAC_DATA 11 + +Refer EEMI API guide [0] for IOCTL specific parameters and other EEMI APIs. + +References +---------- +[0] Embedded Energy Management Interface (EEMI) API guide: + https://www.xilinx.com/support/documentation/user_guides/ug1200-eemi-api.pdf diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/xilinx/index.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/xilinx/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..13f7589ed442 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/xilinx/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ + +=========== +Xilinx FPGA +=========== + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 1 + + eemi + +.. only:: subproject and html + + Indices + ======= + + * :ref:`genindex` diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/xillybus.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/xillybus.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2446ee303c09 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/xillybus.rst @@ -0,0 +1,379 @@ +========================================== +Xillybus driver for generic FPGA interface +========================================== + +:Author: Eli Billauer, Xillybus Ltd. (http://xillybus.com) +:Email: eli.billauer@gmail.com or as advertised on Xillybus' site. + +.. Contents: + + - Introduction + -- Background + -- Xillybus Overview + + - Usage + -- User interface + -- Synchronization + -- Seekable pipes + + - Internals + -- Source code organization + -- Pipe attributes + -- Host never reads from the FPGA + -- Channels, pipes, and the message channel + -- Data streaming + -- Data granularity + -- Probing + -- Buffer allocation + -- The "nonempty" message (supporting poll) + + +Introduction +============ + +Background +---------- + +An FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) is a piece of logic hardware, which +can be programmed to become virtually anything that is usually found as a +dedicated chipset: For instance, a display adapter, network interface card, +or even a processor with its peripherals. FPGAs are the LEGO of hardware: +Based upon certain building blocks, you make your own toys the way you like +them. It's usually pointless to reimplement something that is already +available on the market as a chipset, so FPGAs are mostly used when some +special functionality is needed, and the production volume is relatively low +(hence not justifying the development of an ASIC). + +The challenge with FPGAs is that everything is implemented at a very low +level, even lower than assembly language. In order to allow FPGA designers to +focus on their specific project, and not reinvent the wheel over and over +again, pre-designed building blocks, IP cores, are often used. These are the +FPGA parallels of library functions. IP cores may implement certain +mathematical functions, a functional unit (e.g. a USB interface), an entire +processor (e.g. ARM) or anything that might come handy. Think of them as a +building block, with electrical wires dangling on the sides for connection to +other blocks. + +One of the daunting tasks in FPGA design is communicating with a fullblown +operating system (actually, with the processor running it): Implementing the +low-level bus protocol and the somewhat higher-level interface with the host +(registers, interrupts, DMA etc.) is a project in itself. When the FPGA's +function is a well-known one (e.g. a video adapter card, or a NIC), it can +make sense to design the FPGA's interface logic specifically for the project. +A special driver is then written to present the FPGA as a well-known interface +to the kernel and/or user space. In that case, there is no reason to treat the +FPGA differently than any device on the bus. + +It's however common that the desired data communication doesn't fit any well- +known peripheral function. Also, the effort of designing an elegant +abstraction for the data exchange is often considered too big. In those cases, +a quicker and possibly less elegant solution is sought: The driver is +effectively written as a user space program, leaving the kernel space part +with just elementary data transport. This still requires designing some +interface logic for the FPGA, and write a simple ad-hoc driver for the kernel. + +Xillybus Overview +----------------- + +Xillybus is an IP core and a Linux driver. Together, they form a kit for +elementary data transport between an FPGA and the host, providing pipe-like +data streams with a straightforward user interface. It's intended as a low- +effort solution for mixed FPGA-host projects, for which it makes sense to +have the project-specific part of the driver running in a user-space program. + +Since the communication requirements may vary significantly from one FPGA +project to another (the number of data pipes needed in each direction and +their attributes), there isn't one specific chunk of logic being the Xillybus +IP core. Rather, the IP core is configured and built based upon a +specification given by its end user. + +Xillybus presents independent data streams, which resemble pipes or TCP/IP +communication to the user. At the host side, a character device file is used +just like any pipe file. On the FPGA side, hardware FIFOs are used to stream +the data. This is contrary to a common method of communicating through fixed- +sized buffers (even though such buffers are used by Xillybus under the hood). +There may be more than a hundred of these streams on a single IP core, but +also no more than one, depending on the configuration. + +In order to ease the deployment of the Xillybus IP core, it contains a simple +data structure which completely defines the core's configuration. The Linux +driver fetches this data structure during its initialization process, and sets +up the DMA buffers and character devices accordingly. As a result, a single +driver is used to work out of the box with any Xillybus IP core. + +The data structure just mentioned should not be confused with PCI's +configuration space or the Flattened Device Tree. + +Usage +===== + +User interface +-------------- + +On the host, all interface with Xillybus is done through /dev/xillybus_* +device files, which are generated automatically as the drivers loads. The +names of these files depend on the IP core that is loaded in the FPGA (see +Probing below). To communicate with the FPGA, open the device file that +corresponds to the hardware FIFO you want to send data or receive data from, +and use plain write() or read() calls, just like with a regular pipe. In +particular, it makes perfect sense to go:: + + $ cat mydata > /dev/xillybus_thisfifo + + $ cat /dev/xillybus_thatfifo > hisdata + +possibly pressing CTRL-C as some stage, even though the xillybus_* pipes have +the capability to send an EOF (but may not use it). + +The driver and hardware are designed to behave sensibly as pipes, including: + +* Supporting non-blocking I/O (by setting O_NONBLOCK on open() ). + +* Supporting poll() and select(). + +* Being bandwidth efficient under load (using DMA) but also handle small + pieces of data sent across (like TCP/IP) by autoflushing. + +A device file can be read only, write only or bidirectional. Bidirectional +device files are treated like two independent pipes (except for sharing a +"channel" structure in the implementation code). + +Synchronization +--------------- + +Xillybus pipes are configured (on the IP core) to be either synchronous or +asynchronous. For a synchronous pipe, write() returns successfully only after +some data has been submitted and acknowledged by the FPGA. This slows down +bulk data transfers, and is nearly impossible for use with streams that +require data at a constant rate: There is no data transmitted to the FPGA +between write() calls, in particular when the process loses the CPU. + +When a pipe is configured asynchronous, write() returns if there was enough +room in the buffers to store any of the data in the buffers. + +For FPGA to host pipes, asynchronous pipes allow data transfer from the FPGA +as soon as the respective device file is opened, regardless of if the data +has been requested by a read() call. On synchronous pipes, only the amount +of data requested by a read() call is transmitted. + +In summary, for synchronous pipes, data between the host and FPGA is +transmitted only to satisfy the read() or write() call currently handled +by the driver, and those calls wait for the transmission to complete before +returning. + +Note that the synchronization attribute has nothing to do with the possibility +that read() or write() completes less bytes than requested. There is a +separate configuration flag ("allowpartial") that determines whether such a +partial completion is allowed. + +Seekable pipes +-------------- + +A synchronous pipe can be configured to have the stream's position exposed +to the user logic at the FPGA. Such a pipe is also seekable on the host API. +With this feature, a memory or register interface can be attached on the +FPGA side to the seekable stream. Reading or writing to a certain address in +the attached memory is done by seeking to the desired address, and calling +read() or write() as required. + + +Internals +========= + +Source code organization +------------------------ + +The Xillybus driver consists of a core module, xillybus_core.c, and modules +that depend on the specific bus interface (xillybus_of.c and xillybus_pcie.c). + +The bus specific modules are those probed when a suitable device is found by +the kernel. Since the DMA mapping and synchronization functions, which are bus +dependent by their nature, are used by the core module, a +xilly_endpoint_hardware structure is passed to the core module on +initialization. This structure is populated with pointers to wrapper functions +which execute the DMA-related operations on the bus. + +Pipe attributes +--------------- + +Each pipe has a number of attributes which are set when the FPGA component +(IP core) is built. They are fetched from the IDT (the data structure which +defines the core's configuration, see Probing below) by xilly_setupchannels() +in xillybus_core.c as follows: + +* is_writebuf: The pipe's direction. A non-zero value means it's an FPGA to + host pipe (the FPGA "writes"). + +* channelnum: The pipe's identification number in communication between the + host and FPGA. + +* format: The underlying data width. See Data Granularity below. + +* allowpartial: A non-zero value means that a read() or write() (whichever + applies) may return with less than the requested number of bytes. The common + choice is a non-zero value, to match standard UNIX behavior. + +* synchronous: A non-zero value means that the pipe is synchronous. See + Synchronization above. + +* bufsize: Each DMA buffer's size. Always a power of two. + +* bufnum: The number of buffers allocated for this pipe. Always a power of two. + +* exclusive_open: A non-zero value forces exclusive opening of the associated + device file. If the device file is bidirectional, and already opened only in + one direction, the opposite direction may be opened once. + +* seekable: A non-zero value indicates that the pipe is seekable. See + Seekable pipes above. + +* supports_nonempty: A non-zero value (which is typical) indicates that the + hardware will send the messages that are necessary to support select() and + poll() for this pipe. + +Host never reads from the FPGA +------------------------------ + +Even though PCI Express is hotpluggable in general, a typical motherboard +doesn't expect a card to go away all of the sudden. But since the PCIe card +is based upon reprogrammable logic, a sudden disappearance from the bus is +quite likely as a result of an accidental reprogramming of the FPGA while the +host is up. In practice, nothing happens immediately in such a situation. But +if the host attempts to read from an address that is mapped to the PCI Express +device, that leads to an immediate freeze of the system on some motherboards, +even though the PCIe standard requires a graceful recovery. + +In order to avoid these freezes, the Xillybus driver refrains completely from +reading from the device's register space. All communication from the FPGA to +the host is done through DMA. In particular, the Interrupt Service Routine +doesn't follow the common practice of checking a status register when it's +invoked. Rather, the FPGA prepares a small buffer which contains short +messages, which inform the host what the interrupt was about. + +This mechanism is used on non-PCIe buses as well for the sake of uniformity. + + +Channels, pipes, and the message channel +---------------------------------------- + +Each of the (possibly bidirectional) pipes presented to the user is allocated +a data channel between the FPGA and the host. The distinction between channels +and pipes is necessary only because of channel 0, which is used for interrupt- +related messages from the FPGA, and has no pipe attached to it. + +Data streaming +-------------- + +Even though a non-segmented data stream is presented to the user at both +sides, the implementation relies on a set of DMA buffers which is allocated +for each channel. For the sake of illustration, let's take the FPGA to host +direction: As data streams into the respective channel's interface in the +FPGA, the Xillybus IP core writes it to one of the DMA buffers. When the +buffer is full, the FPGA informs the host about that (appending a +XILLYMSG_OPCODE_RELEASEBUF message channel 0 and sending an interrupt if +necessary). The host responds by making the data available for reading through +the character device. When all data has been read, the host writes on the +the FPGA's buffer control register, allowing the buffer's overwriting. Flow +control mechanisms exist on both sides to prevent underflows and overflows. + +This is not good enough for creating a TCP/IP-like stream: If the data flow +stops momentarily before a DMA buffer is filled, the intuitive expectation is +that the partial data in buffer will arrive anyhow, despite the buffer not +being completed. This is implemented by adding a field in the +XILLYMSG_OPCODE_RELEASEBUF message, through which the FPGA informs not just +which buffer is submitted, but how much data it contains. + +But the FPGA will submit a partially filled buffer only if directed to do so +by the host. This situation occurs when the read() method has been blocking +for XILLY_RX_TIMEOUT jiffies (currently 10 ms), after which the host commands +the FPGA to submit a DMA buffer as soon as it can. This timeout mechanism +balances between bus bandwidth efficiency (preventing a lot of partially +filled buffers being sent) and a latency held fairly low for tails of data. + +A similar setting is used in the host to FPGA direction. The handling of +partial DMA buffers is somewhat different, though. The user can tell the +driver to submit all data it has in the buffers to the FPGA, by issuing a +write() with the byte count set to zero. This is similar to a flush request, +but it doesn't block. There is also an autoflushing mechanism, which triggers +an equivalent flush roughly XILLY_RX_TIMEOUT jiffies after the last write(). +This allows the user to be oblivious about the underlying buffering mechanism +and yet enjoy a stream-like interface. + +Note that the issue of partial buffer flushing is irrelevant for pipes having +the "synchronous" attribute nonzero, since synchronous pipes don't allow data +to lay around in the DMA buffers between read() and write() anyhow. + +Data granularity +---------------- + +The data arrives or is sent at the FPGA as 8, 16 or 32 bit wide words, as +configured by the "format" attribute. Whenever possible, the driver attempts +to hide this when the pipe is accessed differently from its natural alignment. +For example, reading single bytes from a pipe with 32 bit granularity works +with no issues. Writing single bytes to pipes with 16 or 32 bit granularity +will also work, but the driver can't send partially completed words to the +FPGA, so the transmission of up to one word may be held until it's fully +occupied with user data. + +This somewhat complicates the handling of host to FPGA streams, because +when a buffer is flushed, it may contain up to 3 bytes don't form a word in +the FPGA, and hence can't be sent. To prevent loss of data, these leftover +bytes need to be moved to the next buffer. The parts in xillybus_core.c +that mention "leftovers" in some way are related to this complication. + +Probing +------- + +As mentioned earlier, the number of pipes that are created when the driver +loads and their attributes depend on the Xillybus IP core in the FPGA. During +the driver's initialization, a blob containing configuration info, the +Interface Description Table (IDT), is sent from the FPGA to the host. The +bootstrap process is done in three phases: + +1. Acquire the length of the IDT, so a buffer can be allocated for it. This + is done by sending a quiesce command to the device, since the acknowledge + for this command contains the IDT's buffer length. + +2. Acquire the IDT itself. + +3. Create the interfaces according to the IDT. + +Buffer allocation +----------------- + +In order to simplify the logic that prevents illegal boundary crossings of +PCIe packets, the following rule applies: If a buffer is smaller than 4kB, +it must not cross a 4kB boundary. Otherwise, it must be 4kB aligned. The +xilly_setupchannels() functions allocates these buffers by requesting whole +pages from the kernel, and diving them into DMA buffers as necessary. Since +all buffers' sizes are powers of two, it's possible to pack any set of such +buffers, with a maximal waste of one page of memory. + +All buffers are allocated when the driver is loaded. This is necessary, +since large continuous physical memory segments are sometimes requested, +which are more likely to be available when the system is freshly booted. + +The allocation of buffer memory takes place in the same order they appear in +the IDT. The driver relies on a rule that the pipes are sorted with decreasing +buffer size in the IDT. If a requested buffer is larger or equal to a page, +the necessary number of pages is requested from the kernel, and these are +used for this buffer. If the requested buffer is smaller than a page, one +single page is requested from the kernel, and that page is partially used. +Or, if there already is a partially used page at hand, the buffer is packed +into that page. It can be shown that all pages requested from the kernel +(except possibly for the last) are 100% utilized this way. + +The "nonempty" message (supporting poll) +---------------------------------------- + +In order to support the "poll" method (and hence select() ), there is a small +catch regarding the FPGA to host direction: The FPGA may have filled a DMA +buffer with some data, but not submitted that buffer. If the host waited for +the buffer's submission by the FPGA, there would be a possibility that the +FPGA side has sent data, but a select() call would still block, because the +host has not received any notification about this. This is solved with +XILLYMSG_OPCODE_NONEMPTY messages sent by the FPGA when a channel goes from +completely empty to containing some data. + +These messages are used only to support poll() and select(). The IP core can +be configured not to send them for a slight reduction of bandwidth. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/zorro.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/zorro.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..664072b017e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/zorro.rst @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ +======================================== +Writing Device Drivers for Zorro Devices +======================================== + +:Author: Written by Geert Uytterhoeven <geert@linux-m68k.org> +:Last revised: September 5, 2003 + + +Introduction +------------ + +The Zorro bus is the bus used in the Amiga family of computers. Thanks to +AutoConfig(tm), it's 100% Plug-and-Play. + +There are two types of Zorro buses, Zorro II and Zorro III: + + - The Zorro II address space is 24-bit and lies within the first 16 MB of the + Amiga's address map. + + - Zorro III is a 32-bit extension of Zorro II, which is backwards compatible + with Zorro II. The Zorro III address space lies outside the first 16 MB. + + +Probing for Zorro Devices +------------------------- + +Zorro devices are found by calling ``zorro_find_device()``, which returns a +pointer to the ``next`` Zorro device with the specified Zorro ID. A probe loop +for the board with Zorro ID ``ZORRO_PROD_xxx`` looks like:: + + struct zorro_dev *z = NULL; + + while ((z = zorro_find_device(ZORRO_PROD_xxx, z))) { + if (!zorro_request_region(z->resource.start+MY_START, MY_SIZE, + "My explanation")) + ... + } + +``ZORRO_WILDCARD`` acts as a wildcard and finds any Zorro device. If your driver +supports different types of boards, you can use a construct like:: + + struct zorro_dev *z = NULL; + + while ((z = zorro_find_device(ZORRO_WILDCARD, z))) { + if (z->id != ZORRO_PROD_xxx1 && z->id != ZORRO_PROD_xxx2 && ...) + continue; + if (!zorro_request_region(z->resource.start+MY_START, MY_SIZE, + "My explanation")) + ... + } + + +Zorro Resources +--------------- + +Before you can access a Zorro device's registers, you have to make sure it's +not yet in use. This is done using the I/O memory space resource management +functions:: + + request_mem_region() + release_mem_region() + +Shortcuts to claim the whole device's address space are provided as well:: + + zorro_request_device + zorro_release_device + + +Accessing the Zorro Address Space +--------------------------------- + +The address regions in the Zorro device resources are Zorro bus address +regions. Due to the identity bus-physical address mapping on the Zorro bus, +they are CPU physical addresses as well. + +The treatment of these regions depends on the type of Zorro space: + + - Zorro II address space is always mapped and does not have to be mapped + explicitly using z_ioremap(). + + Conversion from bus/physical Zorro II addresses to kernel virtual addresses + and vice versa is done using:: + + virt_addr = ZTWO_VADDR(bus_addr); + bus_addr = ZTWO_PADDR(virt_addr); + + - Zorro III address space must be mapped explicitly using z_ioremap() first + before it can be accessed:: + + virt_addr = z_ioremap(bus_addr, size); + ... + z_iounmap(virt_addr); + + +References +---------- + +#. linux/include/linux/zorro.h +#. linux/include/uapi/linux/zorro.h +#. linux/include/uapi/linux/zorro_ids.h +#. linux/arch/m68k/include/asm/zorro.h +#. linux/drivers/zorro +#. /proc/bus/zorro + |